THE
BUSINESS
ASSOCIATION
DEVELOPMENT
GUIDEBOOK
A practical
guide
to
building
organizational
capacity
@
US
AID
'-'
.......
oco,..""".
The
EDGE
Project
is
implemen
ted by BearlngPolnt
and
funded
by
USAIO
.
2
THE BUSINESS ASSOCIATION DEVELOPMENT GUIDEBOOK
A Resource for Chambers of Commerce and Business Associations
This electronic guidebook was developed by Mark T. McCord, a Senior Manager for
BearingPoint who has more than twenty years of experience in organizational
management, as a mechanism for Chambers of Commerce and business associations to
have access to international best practices. Through narrative, practical examples and
sample documents, the guidebook provides specific information on critical developmental
areas, as well as addressing the methodology used by high-capacity organizations to
achieve sustainability. EDGE created this resource to assist organizational leaders around
the world in transcending theory in favor of a practical approach to sustainable association
development. It is published due to the support of the United States Agency for
International Development, through the Economic Development and Growth for
Enterprises (EDGE) project in Cyprus.
In addition to the guidebook, this compact disc also contains specific samples of
concepts discussed in the narrative. The samples come from Chambers of Commerce and
business associations around the globe, from both developed economies and those that are
in various stages of development. They are just a few examples of programs, services, and
initiatives that are being implemented successfully by organizations around the world. For
more information about this guidebook or to submit examples for future editions, please
contact:
Mark T. McCord, CCE (Certified Chamber Executive)
Senior Manager, BearingPoint
Chief of Party
Economic Development and Growth for Enterprises (EDGE)
Nicosia, Cyprus
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction: The Role of Business Associations in Society
Chapter One: Business Association Development Methodology
Chapter Two: Governance: The Foundation of Sustainability
Chapter Three: Strategic Planning and its Role in Organizational Development
Chapter Four: The Business Association Membership System
Chapter Five: Business Associations and Public Policy Advocacy
Chapter Six: Communications and Marketing for Business Associations
Chapter Seven: Developing Effective Programs and Services
Chapter Eight: Financial Reporting
Chapter Nine: Developing Professional Proposals
Epilogue: Top Ten Ways to Build Organizational Capacity
Examples: Global Examples of Business Association Best Practices
4
INTRODUCTION
THE ROLE OF BUSINESS ASSOCIATIONS IN SOCIETY
SECTION ONE: OVERVIEW OF THE BUSINESS ASSOCIATION’S ROLE
Introduction: Changes in the Business Association Paradigm
Business associations have evolved over thousands of years into organizations that
promote the collective good of their members. The roots of these associations can be
traced to ancient times, when merchants in the Middle East and China joined together to
form cooperatives in order to increase their power in the marketplace. These cooperatives
eventually morphed into merchant guilds that created local monopolies. Eventually, these
guilds gave way to business associations more like those with which we are familiar today.
Modern associations still retain some of the core elements of their forerunners in that they
continue to defend the interests of business and promote economic prosperity. The
evolution of these associations, however, has shaped them into dramatically different
institutions than their predecessors. This evolution has never been more profound than it
has been over the last thirty years, as significant changes have taken place in the structure
and mission of business associations as well as in the services they provide.
With this in mind, the history of business associations as entities promoting
collaborative action is less interesting than the significant changes that have transformed
and continue to transform these organizations into powerful and dynamic engines for
economic growth. New associations are being formed every day, and their relative
strength is measured not by the size of their budgets but by the results they achieve. The
trend in the growth of associations worldwide will continue to rise over the coming years,
which will make the competitive environment even more challenging.
Not so many years ago, success could be measured by the mere existence of
associations. For instance, beginning in the mid-19
th
century, business associations such
as Chambers of Commerce began to proliferate throughout the United States. The
Chambers were widely considered to represent the business community and they served as
the focal point for economic growth and prosperity. Over the years, a paradigm developed
within the Chamber profession as to how the organizations should be managed and what
services they should provide. In some communities, the Chamber of Commerce attempted
to “be all things to all people” by providing a cornucopia of programs and services. It can
be said that these associations took a “shotgun” approach to the business of promoting
business; meaning that they tried to respond to every request of the business community
regardless of need or prioritization. Other Chambers evolved into little more than social
clubs that were run by the elite of the community. Many of these organizations, while
meaning well, initiated programs and services based on factors that had little to do with the
needs of members. Even though membership in the Chamber was voluntary, as they were
developed using the private law model, many of the organizations failed to realize the
importance of marketing their programs and services because, quite simply, there was no
5
competition for members’ money and time.
1
The leaders within a community typically
gravitated to these organizations, but relatively few built strong grassroots support for their
programs and services, as many of the members, while still paying their annual dues, were
detached from the day-to-day operations.
Even so, private law Chambers of Commerce continued to flourish in America
largely due to perceived lack of other options. Because they were not highly regulated by
the state of federal governments, they had maximum flexibility to design and launch
demand-driven programs. The market dictated the success or failure of these programs
that required organizations to remain focused on member needs. In some cases, the
Chambers failed to position themselves to serve the greater business community, which
precipitated the creation of new business organizations that focused on gender, race,
business sector, or geographic area. Since 1980, over hundreds of thousands of business
associations have been created in the United States alone, which generated competition for
the business community’s money and time.
Many private law Chambers use a combination of volunteers and paid staff
members to conduct their programs.
2
This provides for effective implementation of
programs and services, but it also creates a need within the organization to remain vital
through marketing its programs and services. Many of these Chambers have found a niche
in public policy advocacy, using a reform mentality to recruit and retain their membership
base. In the private law system, government cannot regulate the type of programs
associations provide, nor can they “assign” to them tasks that must be implemented.
In Europe, Chambers of Commerce and other business associations have been in
existence for hundreds of years. In most European countries, Chambers of Commerce are
organized according to public law, under which businesses are required to pay annual
dues.
3
It should be said the public law status does not necessarily dictate mandatory
membership, but under the Continental Model, law requires obligatory membership for all
self-employed persons and legal entities that run businesses within a legal district.
4
Obligatory membership includes a regular and mandatory financial contribution to the
Chamber. While this provides stable income to the organization, it also requires Chambers
to fulfill certain tasks defined by law and it sometimes includes supervision of the
organization’s activities by the government.
1
Private Law Chambers are those that exist not through a law passed by government, but rather through
demand of the business community. Membership is voluntary, which requires these associations to provide
programs and services based on member demand in order to remain competitive. The private law model is
most usually referred to as the Anglo Saxon model. For more information, refer to chapter two of this
guidebook.
2
Volunteers in this context are defined as business owners, managers, and/or entrepreneurs that provide their
time free of charge to serve on committees or otherwise assist in the implementation of programs.
3
Public Law Chambers are those that exist under law. Membership is usually mandatory and the
organizations usually serve a geographic area that is set by statute. Many have advisory status, vis-à-vis the
government and are supervised in some form by the government.
4
The Continental Model is a term widely used to define the public law chambers of commerce on the
European continent.
6
Outside of Europe, and especially in developing countries, the public law model
has proliferated. This is especially true in countries that formerly maintained tight control
on all aspects of society. In Latin America, for instance, some governments have
negotiated broad-ranging agreements with unions and business groups that establish
targets for wages, prices and other economic indicators. While these agreements promote
stability within the economy, they at the same time restrict markets from responding to
changing conditions. Under the close scrutiny of the government, many business
associations are reluctant to adopt a reform mentality, even if the business community
supports such a position.
This is not to say that public law organizations are inherently opposed to economic
reforms or are incompatible with a market-based economy. However, their role as agents
for the State must be balanced so as to diminish any anti-reform tendencies they may have.
In Western Europe, and increasingly in other countries as well, balance between State
control of associations and the demand for reform is achieved by the emergence of private,
voluntary-membership associations that represent their members’ interests.
In addition to the Anglo-Saxon (private law) and Continental (public law) models,
there is rapidly emerging a hybrid form of business association that contains certain
elements of each model. Two of these sub-models are the Eurasian and Asian Models.
Most of the organizations utilizing these models embrace voluntary membership but differ
from the traditional Anglo-Saxon model in that they have a law that protects their interests.
Also, they have protection of territory (meaning that no other Chamber or business
association can compete with them in their own region). The Russian Federation Chamber
of Commerce is an example of the Eurasian Model, while the Chamber of Commerce
systems in Indonesia and Japan are examples of the Asian Model.
While organizational models of global business associations tend to vary, one clear
trend has emerged that affects organizations regardless of their geography or governance.
This trend, simply, is one of member demand. Even in countries where public law
Chambers are prevalent, they have come under constant pressure from emerging private
sector associations that are winning the hearts and minds of the business community. It is
as if members in these countries are saying, “You can force us to give you our money, but
you can’t force us to give you our support”. This trend has been prevalent in countries
with private law Chambers for years, but it is now emerging even in transitional countries.
As business communities become more empowered both educationally and economically,
this trend will only increase, putting increasing pressure on aging and outdated
organizations, as well as those that for whatever reason cannot adapt to changing market
conditions.
For years, business executives in transitional countries have regaled the lack of
business association mentality that exists within the business community. While this
complaint makes sense on a tertiary level, in reality it cannot be substantiated, as even in
countries such as Bhutan and Afghanistan, where business associations were virtually
unknown until recent times, the private sector quickly embraced them once it was provided
with a basic understanding of their purpose. It has become obvious that the problem was
7
not within the business community as much as it was within the organizations themselves.
While they struggled to understand their own purpose, the private sector was left twisting
in the wind of change only to eventually anchor itself to the first organization that could
provide significant services.
SECTION TWO: ESTABLISHING A PURPOSE
Many business associations have difficulty because they lack an understanding of
why they exist. Because they don’t understand this basic element of organizational
development, they fail to develop demand-driven programs and thus cannot recruit
members. Organizations that don’t understand their purpose are like rudderless ships that
pound through an angry sea with little sense of direction or accomplishment. This being
said, regardless of a business association’s age or size, it must have a complete
understanding of why it exists. This is the foundation on which success is built.
There is little doubt concerning the importance of business associations to private
sector growth. The question, then, is why are they so important? When analyzing global
organizations, the following factors emerge as the most common reasons why business
associations must exist:
Strong business associations harness the capacity of private businesses.
Owners and managers of private businesses have realized for many years that there
is strength in numbers. Few companies, even those that are considered large by
global standards, can accomplish their goals without the assistance of outside
sources, such as business associations. That’s why companies like Compaq,
Microsoft, and Coca Cola are great supporters of business associations around the
world. They realize that associations provide them the best opportunity to network
with each other and to enhance their economic, social and political interests. The
capacity of small and medium-sized companies is also increased because of the
services that business associations provide, and due to the fact that associations
provide them a collective strength that they do not have on their own. In other
words, the power of “me” becomes the power of “us”.
Strong business associations create business opportunities. One of the major
reasons for the growth of business associations is that they provide business
opportunities for their members. Whether through contacts with companies in a
specific region or around the world, business associations are one of the best
conduits for information and collaboration. This collaboration is a key component
to the development of business opportunities.
Strong business associations protect the interests of both companies and
employees. By harnessing the collective power of their members, business
associations protect the interests of the private sector by developing dialogue with
government. Until recently, many business associations believed that public policy
advocacy (the process of defining issues, developing a position on them, and
advocating this position) was not a service that they could or should provide.
8
However, over the last several years, this attitude has changed as business
associations have come to realize that government simply will not respond to
businesses unless they have an advocate. Business associations are natural
advocates for the private sector, and have learned to use the collective strength of
their members to ensure the views of businesses are heard, and that pro-business
legislation is passed. When this occurs, business associations gain credibility
because they have provided a valuable service to their member companies;
companies benefit because their interests have been protected and pro-business
legislation has been passed; and employees win because stronger companies
provide better job security and more opportunities for advancement. Around the
world, governments are beginning to respond to this approach because they have
come to realize that business pays all the bills, meaning that when businesses
prosper, workers prosper and when workers prosper the government prospers
through increased tax collections, decreased need for social and benevolence
programs, and growing societal harmony. The taxes paid by companies and
workers provide the revenue for government to fund its operations and to provide
assistance for the less fortunate in society. From this standpoint, business really
does pay all the bills, and therefore needs business associations to serve as its
advocate.
Strong business associations promote civil society. For many years, researchers
have sought to develop a link between the strength of business associations and the
development of civil society. The strongest argument in favor of this assertion is
that when business associations provide services to their members, including
encouraging the government to be open and transparent, the framework of civil
society is strengthened. Business associations provide a mechanism in which
legitimate businesses can work together to benefit society.
Strong business associations enhance the business climate. Associations around
the world are embracing public policy advocacy as a way to enhance the business
climate. Movement toward this reform mentality has been largely generated from
member demand for an organization that will protect their interests.
Strong business associations combat corruption: Increasingly, business
associations have become involved in anti-corruption programs, realizing that
corruption costs countries hundreds of millions of dollars while at the same time
eroding competitiveness. The Institute for Private Enterprise and Democracy
Foundation (affiliated with the Chamber of Commerce and Industry of Poland)
established a Business Fair Play program that encourages transparency and ethics
in business. Other organizations, such as Confecamaras in Colombia, are battling
corruption in both the public and private sectors through public policy advocacy
campaigns and informational programs.
9
SECTION THREE: FUTURE TRENDS
It has been said that humans can never change the way they act until they change
the way they think. Analysis of business associations over the last twenty years has
proved the applicability of this statement to organizational development as well. In
countries around the world, associations have either progressed or been marginalized
because of their ability to adapt to changing economic, political and social circumstances.
Embracing change is typically not as difficult for young associations, as long as they are
formed because of demand and adopted an appropriate governance structure, but it is
sometimes traumatic for older, more established associations that have spent years either
under State control or mired in an archaic governance process.
Over the past ten years, an effective method has been developed to conduct a
thorough analysis of business associations using an evaluation model based on
international best practices.
5
Through this analysis, it has become apparent that the
emerging paradigm for business association success will focus on the following core
principles:
1. Embracing strategic planning as a value added process. Increasingly,
successful business associations are viewing strategic planning as a necessary value
added commodity to the development process. A strategic plan, which is most
often defined as a three to five year compendium of an organization’s goals and
action steps, is a “roadmap” to achieve specific and measurable results.
Strategic planning typically involves five primary steps. First, comes the
development of a vision statement, which defines the end state that the association
wants to achieve during the planning period. Secondly, it is the development of a
mission statement that briefly outlines the association’s purpose. The third step is
the development of quantifiable goals and objectives in order to determine the
results to be achieved during the time covered in the strategic plan. The fourth step
is the development of action steps to achieve the goals and objectives and the fifth
step is evaluating the results achieved.
Through utilization of a strategic planning mechanism, successful business
associations can achieve significant results within a specific timeframe. It is
essential, of course, that associations gain input from their members prior to the
development of the strategic plan, and it is likewise important for the organizations
to segment the three to five year strategy into one year increments, sometimes
called a “Program of Work”. Some of the most successful business associations in
5
This model, called the Business Association Diagnostic, assesses organizational strength in ten essential
developmental areas. The evaluation, while not a test, does allow for comparison of business associations to
an international best practices model. The diagnostic focuses on 1) mission and objectives; 2) governance;
3) organizational structure; 4) programs and services; 5) organizational staff; 6) financial planning and
reporting; 7) membership development and retention; 8) communication; 9) public policy advocacy and 10)
information management. It was developed by the Center for International Private Enterprise (CIPE) and
adapted for use in transitional economies.
10
the world use strategic planning as their first and most important building block for
success. As one association executive in the Czech Republic stated, “It only makes
sense to know where you want to go before you start the trip”. Strategic planning
allows associations to know where they want to go and how they are going to get
there.
2. Changing the membership development paradigm. Few changes in the
business association arena over the last twenty years have been more dramatic than
those in membership development. This is especially true for organizations in
countries that have adopted the private law model, since this usually assumes that
membership is voluntary. Changing demographics and processes have also
affected organizations in countries that favor the public law model, in that private
sector organizations have used new approaches in membership development to
create an important niche within the business community.
Within the last twenty years, the membership paradigm has changed from a
“campaign” mentality to a “process” mentality. Through the mid-1980s, business
association executives in the United States were trained to conduct a membership
campaign every year in order to “recruit” new members. These campaigns, which
typically ranged from a few days to a few weeks, used focused marketing,
testimonials, and other sales tactics to “convince” members to join the
organization. In the late 1980s, organizational executives such as Jerry Bartels,
who at the time was President of the Atlanta, Georgia Chamber of Commerce,
began to view membership in a different way.
6
Over time, other organizational
executives joined the discussion and by the mid-1990s the trend in membership
development for the most aggressive business associations swung toward the
implementation of an overall membership system.
The membership system establishes membership recruitment, retention and non-
dues income generation as a tripartite process for organizational growth. Through
this system, membership is “institutionalized” through the involvement of every
facet within the organization. From the President to the receptionist, membership
development is considered of paramount importance and it becomes everyone’s
“job” to increase the organization’s support. Within this system, membership
retention has the highest priority, while the old paradigm of membership
campaigns is relegated to just one of many processes that may be used to recruit
members. Non dues income, defined as income generated by any source other than
membership fees, is the third element for success, as it generates revenue and
support to augment membership dues.
6
Jerry Bartels was one of the initiators of the “Total Resources” strategy, which focused on membership
retention, recruitment, and non-dues income generation as a way for business associations to obtain the “total
resources” necessary to conduct their operations, programs, and services at one time during the year, versus
using the old paradigm of raising funds all year long. This method is still used by many business
associations today.
11
Business associations around the globe have adopted this system to adapt to
changes in marketplace. Even organizations that have mandatory membership are
using elements of the system to upgrade services and to create more revenue
through non dues sources. This system will provide successful business
associations in the twenty-first century with a mechanism to sustain membership
and financial growth.
3. Establishing transparent financial systems. In transitional countries, where
financial systems even at the highest levels of government have been suspect at
best, business associations have struggled to implement financial processes that are
both transparent and effective. The reasons for this are numerous, but the lack of
adherence to international accounting standards is one of the most obvious. Also,
technological limitations in some countries have made the establishment of such a
system fraught with challenges.
Increasingly, however, donors, association leaders and members have pressured
associations to adhere to international standards as far as financial reporting is
concerned. In response, many associations developed a financial system that
includes the approval of an annual budget, the generation of monthly financial
statements, the allocation of expenses through a general ledger, and the creation of
an income statement to track assets. In addition, many have adopted financial
procedures manuals that outline specific processes that must be used to ensure
financial accountability and transparency. Successful associations rely on
transparent financial practices to instill member confidence and to build credibility
within the business community.
4. Embracing public policy advocacy in support of member demand. Within the
last twenty years, there has been an explosion in the number of business
associations that are involved in public policy advocacy. In fact, after the breakup
of the former Eastern Bloc, a number of emerging associations within Eastern and
Southern Europe made a focus on advocacy a priority item in their strategic plans.
In doing so, they determined, quite rightly, that advocacy is a major reason for
businesses to join associations. On their own, businesses may have little access to
information and little recourse against government regulations, but as part of an
association, they have a collective voice.
As new associations emerged around the world and existing associations made the
transitions necessary to address private sector demands, they benefited from a new
paradigm in public policy advocacy that was developed and promulgated based on
research conducted by a number of organizations. Known as the “advocacy
system” this thirteen-step process institutionalized public policy involvement
within the associations’ strategy. In many countries significant structural changes
in government resulted from the ability of business associations to use this process.
In this century, success in advocacy will no longer be measured by whether or not
an organization is involved, but how successful it is and what process it uses.
12
5. Focusing on economic development as an economic building block. The term
“economic development” has been overused and over analyzed. In its most basic
form, economic development simply means “the creation of wealth”. Any function
that creates wealth develops the economy and increases competitiveness.
It is clear that successful business associations in the twenty-first century will
continue to focus on creating wealth within communities. In January 2002, Juan
Camilo Restrepo, a conservative candidate for President of Columbia, stated,
“Today the name of peace is employment….” In other words, business
associations must play a role in developing the overall economy and providing
jobs.
6. Becoming a broker of information. It has often been said that information is
power. However, it has become apparent that simple access to information does
not create power, but rather the use of this information in promoting economic
growth. Throughout the globe, successful organizations are serving as information
brokers to the business community by compiling, interpreting, distributing and
evaluating data. These organizations will come to understand that information is
not only power, it is also a source of revenue and prestige.
7. Embracing community trusteeship as a core value. Community trusteeship, in
its simplest form, is the safeguarding and/or enhancement of the community for
future generations. Community trusteeship has become a core value within strong
business associations, in that they realize their economic, social and educational
responsibility to future generations. Through trusteeship, these associations have
built grassroots support and credibility to enhance private sector development
through individual initiative.
8. Becoming a driving force in educational and workforce initiatives. According
to Luis Jorge Garay, “Poverty, inequalities of income, ownership and opportunity,
the exclusion of large segments of the population from the benefits of modern life,
amongst other things….The elimination of just some of these would be enough to
achieve true peace”.
7
This statement is becoming increasingly meaningful for
business organizations within transitional and post-conflict countries, but it is also
applicable to those in the developed world. Successful business associations are
heightening their involvement in education and workforce issues as a way to
address social unrest and societal fissures.
9. Celebrating diversity as a way to foster social and political change.
Associations such as the Afghanistan International Chamber of Commerce have set
a standard for diversity that is indicative of successful business associations. In
valuing diversity, business associations can expand their breadth of knowledge as
well as their baseline of support.
10. Using technology to build visibility and grassroots support. Technology or lack
thereof, continues to be a significant factor in business association development.
7
Garay, Luis Jorge. Para donde va Columbia? Bogota. February 1999.
13
While technology offers exponential opportunities, severe gaps in infrastructure in
transitional and post-conflict countries have made this medium inaccessible to
many business associations. Future success will depend on the ability to
communicate with members to gather input and garner support. This means that
technological gaps must be bridged through coordinated assistance from
governments, donors and the private sector. Associations must also harness the
power of technology by investing resources in hardware and software, as well as in
technical assistance for staff members and key volunteers. Currently, for all too
many business associations, the technology super highway is a dirt road.
11. Focusing on marketing strategies to reinforce organizational purpose and
message. It has often been said that “It doesn’t matter what you do if no one
knows you did it”. This is especially true of business associations, which depend
on marketing to increase membership, volunteer support and credibility. Even in
organizations with mandatory membership, marketing of programs and services is
critical to maintain connection with the business community. Future success will
depend on associations’ ability to create, market, and evaluate demand-driven
programs and services, as well as to build an organizational brand that denotes
excellence.
12. Adopting a team-oriented management style. Within the association arena, the
paradigm of management has changed significantly over the last twenty years.
Organizations that operated with a top down management style that limited
empowerment opportunities for staff members have been forced to reassess their
management strategies. A growing number of associations have adopted team
approaches to management, which focus on empowerment and individual
initiative. This paradigm is especially foreign to associations in former totalitarian
countries where hierarchical management was accepted as a cultural norm.
However, even associations with a background in top-down management are
beginning to accept the team approach, as they realize it provides them with
maximum ability to adapt to a changing business climate.
13. Employing and empowering professional staff members. The metamorphosis
of organizations in the West was initiated through a variety of factors, not the least
of which was the acceptance of organizational management as a profession.
Organizations are now harnessing the experience of paid professionals in order to
increase their power and influence. These organizations spend significant
resources on training in order to develop specialists in areas that are important to
their members. It is clear from trends within business associations around the
world that the days of volunteer management are coming to an end.
14. Involving the business community. Even in organizations that possess a highly
trained and profession staff, a significant amount of work is conducted through
volunteers that donate their time to assist in the organizations efforts.
Organizations around the world are beginning to recognize that the involvement of
the business community, first through payment of membership dues and then
14
through involvement in the organization’s programs, is critical to sustained growth.
Again, the concept of volunteerism is foreign to many cultures in that no historical
basis exists for its acceptance as a societal norm. However, in countries such as
Romania, Hungary, the Czech Republic, and Russia, volunteers are being
welcomed into associations and they are coming in droves. In fact, volunteerism
within associations is rapidly becoming the rule instead of the exception.
There is no doubt that successful associations are built on a foundation of
knowledge.
However, it is apparent in a changing world that knowledge is not enough to sustain
growth. Rather, it is the use of this knowledge in adapting to change that will create
powerful and sustainable business associations. The remainder of this guidebook will
focus on international best practices in business association management, using examples
from around the world. These examples, while important to an overall understanding of
core organizational management principles will impact associations only if they are used
in combination with strong leadership, vision, and strategy. By changing the way their
leaders think, the paradigm of association management will shift toward more sustainable
organizations and more invigorated business communities.
SECTION FOUR: CONSTRAINTS FACED BY BUSINESS ASSOCIATIONS IN
DEVELOPING/TRANSITIONAL COUNTRIES
Business association development in any part of the world is not easy, as
competition, changing economic structures, and challenging advocacy environments are
forcing even well-established organizations to change the way they conduct business. In
developing and transitioning economies, however, associations face additional constraints
that can be quantified into five basic categories.
The first, and arguably the most complex of these constraints is a lack of a business
association mentality. In many transitional economies, there is a lack of a business
association culture created by the ideology of former governmental regimes. This was the
case throughout most of Eastern Europe, Russia and Central Asia. While virtually every
country in these regions had a history of business associations, most were either controlled
or ended by repressive regimes. When coupled with the transition of most private
enterprises to the State, the years took a toll on the business association mentality and
eventually eroded their ability to be effective. The associations that did survive tended to
be tightly controlled by the State, with most serving as public relations conduits for the
government’s economic policies. Once these regimes changed, the countries were left
with a large number of state owned enterprises, a lack of understanding concerning the
market economy, and relatively little enthusiasm for the support of business associations.
The latter stemmed largely from the belief that associations either could not provide
demand-driven programs and services or that they were merely extensions of government
as had been the norm in many of these countries for over 40 years.
This lack of understanding of the need for business associations created a second
constraint, which was lack of trust. In many transitional countries, oppressive regimes had
15
eroded trust in institutions as a whole. Since many existing organizations, usually national
Chambers of Commerce, had been used by governments to promote specific economic and
social policies, the business community was slow to put their trust in them. This was
especially true since the leadership of a number of these organizations did not change.
With the same people in control and government in transition, little trust could be
developed between the existing associations and the private sector. This eventually led to
either the creation of new demand-driven business associations or the reform of the
existing institutions. The former was perceived to be the path of least resistance in many
countries, as the existing institutions were considered to have too much “baggage” to be
effective even with new leadership. Romania typified many transitional countries by
proliferating new business associations while at the same time undertaking reform of the
Chamber of Commerce and Industry of Romania and Bucharest (CCIRB). CCIRB is
today a growing and progressive organization that is meeting the needs of Romania’s
private sector.
The proliferation of new associations, combined with the restructuring of existing
ones led to a third constraint, which was lack of communication between organizations and
their members. The first hurdle for associations to clear was to create a need within the
private sector to become members. This was a daunting task that many organizations had
not mastered even ten years removed from the change in government. Of course, success
in this endeavor was based on an organization’s ability to develop demand driven
programs and services, while at the same time marketing the benefits of association
membership to the private sector. Associations that were able to develop an effective
communications strategy, such as the Brno Chamber of Commerce in the Czech Republic,
benefited through membership growth. Those that could not communicate effectively
either remained as small and low-capacity organizations or focused on a different method
of achieving sustainability, such as mandatory membership. The latter alleviated the need
for the associations to communicate effectively, while still providing them with a
consistent source of income.
Eventually, though a large number of associations created communications and
marketing strategies in order to reach their potential members. The most successful of
these strategies focused on the matching of customized benefits and services to the needs
of specific members. For instance, manufacturing companies have different needs than
retail trading firms, so the programs and services offered to them should also be different.
Many organizations also created communications products such as newsletters, magazines,
advocacy reports and websites. These products not only provided a variety of ways for
them to market their activities, but they also allowed the organizations to collect member
input and data.
In addition to dealing with external communication issues, a majority of the
associations also dealt with imperfect internal systems that caused chaos within the
management structure. Once internal communications broke down, the associations were
unable to establish a consistent message for the private sector. Over time a number of
these associations were able to improve their internal communications systems by
instituting weekly staff meetings, networking events, and modern management techniques.
16
Lack of effective internal communication led to an overall inability to adjust to a
management style that is conducive to peak organizational effectiveness. This fourth
constraint was exacerbated by the ideology and/or culture within the transitioning
countries. Many had been governed by oppressive regimes for decades, causing a
generation of managers to adopt a top-down management style. This higherarchical style
created bureaucracy and was not compatible with the ability of associations to meet market
demand. This being the case, association leaders had to change their own management
paradigms to adapt to new circumstances. This process moved painfully slow in many
developing nations, and even today the higherarchical management style is prevalent in a
number of transitional countries. Organizations such as the Dhaka, Bangladesh Chamber
of Commerce and Industry have instituted new participatory management systems, though,
which are becoming the more prevalent in transitional countries. DCCI not only
empowers its employees to perform at peak efficiency, but also keeps past volunteer
leaders involved in an advisory council to assist the president and board of directors in
addressing important private sector issues.
A fifth constraint faced by associations in transitional economies was either lack of
a legal infrastructure or the adherence to an archaic law(s) that governed organizational
development. Many countries in transition had laws on the books that specifically
acknowledged one or more business associations (usually a national Chamber of
Commerce or industrialists organization) as the government’s “official” representative on
economic issues. Few of these laws were repealed quickly, which left new business
associations in a kind of legal limbo, which led to a lack of legitimacy for most demand-
driven organizations. When coupled with the lack of a legal framework for doing
business, this led to the proliferation of scores of business associations that lacked
credibility with the government and had little legitimacy within the private sector.
Eventually, a majority of transitional countries repealed their archaic business association
and/or non-governmental organization laws, but some were replaced with new laws that
put different types of restrictions on the development of business associations. There is
still much debate within transitional countries as to the legal framework within which
organizations should operate.
In many transitional countries, non-existent or inconsistent legal frameworks led to
government’s lack of interest in acknowledging the right of associations to advocate on
behalf of their members. While some governments simply ignored the associations, others
actively pursued a “containment policy” whereby one association or group of associations
would be allowed access, while the others remained on the fringe of the policy debate.
After several years of focused attention from private sector organizations, governments in
many transitional countries are becoming more inclusive and supportive of a wide variety
of institutions.
Many of the constraints noted above are being favorably addressed by aggressive
and forward-looking business associations. The most successful organizations are
focusing on making a business case for membership and are ensuring participation from
businesses of all sizes. By tailoring programs and services to companies of different sizes
17
and types, associations in transitional countries have been able to create significant return
on investment for their members, which of course has led to increased member support.
While difficulties remain, these associations are examples for their counterparts around the
world.
18
CHAPTER ONE
THE BUILDING BLOCK METHODOLOGY: DEVELOPING HIGH CAPACITY
ORANIZATIONS
The key to building the capacity of business associations is an understanding of the
developmental model that allows for the creation of sustainable organizations.
BearingPoint has used the following model extensively to build the capacity of Chambers
of Commerce and business associations around the globe. The pyramid in Figure 1.1
outlines the model’s major components, which are:
Governance: Organizational strength flows from the development of a fair and
transparent governance system. This is the foundation on which capacity is built.
Programs and Services: Capacity is also built through the development and
implementation of demand-driven programs and services that meet the private
sector’s needs. Membership input is critical in order for these programs and
services to be truly demand-driven, which typically necessitates an ongoing series
of surveys, focus groups and communication in order to assess member attitudes.
Visibility: Visibility is often confused with effectiveness. However, there are
multitudes of associations around the world that are visible but not effective. The
danger in transitional and post-conflict countries is that donor support will
artificially create visibility that cannot be sustained by the organization due to its
overall lack of capacity. True visibility, which leads to credibility and ultimately to
sustainability, is built on a foundation of good governance and progressive
programs/services that promote member involvement. Visible organizations are
ones that tell their story effectively, utilizing both media and word-of-mouth to
create awareness.
Credibility: It may take a number of years for a business association to build
credibility with its members, the community and the government, as this only
happens through sustained focus on governance, programs/services and
communications.
Sustainability: Credibility over a number of years establishes a sustainable
organization. Sustainability must not be considered only in economic terms, but
also including other factors that contribute to overall organizational health, such as
effective leadership. A sustainable organization is one that has power, both with its
members and with stakeholders in government and the private sector.
It should be noted that these levels are not mutually exclusive, meaning that one
has to accomplish one before moving on to the other. In fact, it is common for business
associations to work on governance, programs/services and visibility at the same time.
However, it is important that an association not “skip a level”. For instance, it would be
counter productive to focus on programs/services and visibility and ignore governance.
19
Figure 1.1 The Organizational Sustainability Pyramid
Movement up the sustainability pyramid requires customized intervention within
the following four activity areas. Each one of these areas should contain demand-driven
and practical objectives and activities that focus on building organizational capacity:
1. Foundational Resources: These are resources that assist business associations in
developing strong and transparent governance structures based on international
best practices. Some of these resources include effective bylaws, election
procedures, strategic planning processes and ethical guidelines. (Governance)
2. Informational Resources: These are resources that provide ongoing, customized
information to business association leaders in order to build their knowledge and
effectiveness. Some of these resources include technical assistance, publications
and networking. (Governance/Programs and Services)
3. Developmental Resources: These are resources that actually build capacity within
business associations by establishing programs and services and internal
management capacity. Some of these resources include staff development and
mentorship. (Programs and Services/Visibility)
4. Financial Resources: These are resources that business associations need to sustain
their operations as well as to manage growth. In transitional countries, this may
require short-term financial assistance through temporary external financing in
order to establish a firm financial foundation. (Credibility/Sustainability)
T
h
Credibility
Sustainability
Visibility
Programs
/
Services
Governance
Must be powerful
Must be believable
Must be noticed
Must be strategic and
demand-driven
Must be transparent
The
Sustainability
P
y
ramid
20
As an association moves toward sustainability, it is buoyed by increased
membership support, which leads to empowerment. The higher an organization moves up
the sustainability pyramid, the higher its members will move up the empowerment
pyramid shown below in Figure 1.2. Those members at the pinnacle of the pyramid, who
are considered to be committed and empowered, are virtual “customers for life”, meaning
that it would take an almost apocalyptical situation to erode their support for the
organization. This being the case, the higher the percentage of members that are in these
two categories, the more sustainable an association becomes. The empowerment pyramid
is shown below, and outlines the process required to turn an “uninformed” businessperson
into an “empowered” member. Graduation of members from “uninformed” to
“empowered” is directly proportional to the organization’s success in moving up the
sustainability pyramid described earlier. The more an association moves toward
sustainability, the more its members will be committed to its success.
Figure 1.2 The Membership Empowerment Pyramid
These pyramids operate parallel to each other, meaning that as an organization
creates a transparent governance structure, institutes demand-driven programs, and
becomes more visible, the business community responds by increasing its monetary and
emotional support, until becoming “empowered”. Reaching the “empowerment” level
essentially means becoming a “customer for life”. At this level, members have so much of
themselves invested in the organization that they would not leave except under virtually
apocalyptic circumstances. While a majority of members in any organization, regardless
of where it is in the world, never reach the “empowered” level, a strong, sustainable
Committed
Empowered
Involved
Interested
Uninformed
E
m
Value representation and
sustain it.
Believe in representation and
are willing to support it.
Acknowledge representation
and become part of it.
Acknowledge representation
but don’t know how it works.
Want representation but
don’t know how to get it.
The
Empowerment
Pyramid
21
organization will strive to ensure that a large majority of its members are at least at the
“committed” level.
The relationship between these two pyramids is at the core of organizational
success, as they show the relationship between strategic governance, programming, and
communications to member involvement. It should be noted that increased funding is not
specifically mentioned in the sustainability pyramid, though it is assumed that a
sustainable organization will also be one that has a funding level that is appropriate to
conduct it operations, communications, and programming. The reason it is not a specific
part of the pyramid is that as members move up the pyramid, and especially when they get
to the “committed” and “empowered” tiers, they are willing to support the organization
with their finances as well as their time. This being the case, there is a corollary between
“empowered” members and a financially “sustainable” organization.
22
CHAPTER TWO
GOVERNANCE: THE FOUNDATION OF SUSTAINABILITY
“The problem with business association governance is that everyone wants to ride
the roller coaster, but few want to design or fix it”. There is a great deal of truth to this
statement in that it is exhilarating to ride a roller coaster….the ups and downs of the trip
are exciting and at the same time somewhat frightening. Yet, at the end of the ride, one
feels excited, even refreshed, by the experience. Those who design or repair roller
coasters enjoy none of the thrill of the ride, but are arguably the most important people in
the process as they keep the train from jumping the tracks. The establishment of good
governance within a business association does the same thing….it keeps the organization
from losing direction, getting off-course, and eventually “jumping the track” into chaos.
For business associations in a growing number of countries, governance has
become more than just a step in the organizational process. It has become one of the most
important aspects of building organizational capacity. In fact, according to the
sustainability pyramid discussed in the last chapter, governance is the foundation on which
the entire organization is built. It is virtually impossible to build a strong association on a
weak foundation, so focus on governance is of critical importance to business associations.
Definition of Governance
In order to discuss governance, it first must be defined. For purposes of this
guidebook, governance is defined as “the development of transparent and fair governing
structures that adhere to international best practices”. “Transparent” is defined as “a
governance structure that is supported by policies and procedures created with the
involvement of organizational members and that are communicated to these members in a
way that ensures understanding and accountability”. Transparency comes when everyone
within the organization has input into the governance structure, understands it, and is
accountable for it. In a transparent organization, everyone from the President down to the
smallest member firms understands the governance structure and is held accountable for
their actions regarding it.
Increasingly, business associations around the world are gravitating toward a
governance system based on international best practices. When evaluating some of the
world’s most successful organizations, one finds common elements within their
governance structures that provide a model for associations in transitional countries.
These structures can be consolidated into three primary categories: legal, organizational
and accountability.
Legal structures are those that are established by law and/or by internal governance
procedures. In many countries, Chambers of Commerce and business associations are
governed by one or more laws that outline the scope of their authority and activities. In
others, associations are governed primarily by market forces that determine their success
23
or failure. Typically, business associations fall into one of three broad models, two of
which establish organizations under public law. They are known as the State, Anglo-
Saxon and Continental models. The following text box contains a brief explanation of
each model:
Figure 2.1 Global Business Association Models
State Model (Public Law): The state model is one where the Chamber of Commerce is controlled either
directly or de-facto by the central government (public sector). Funding typically comes from mandatory
membership or a quasi-mandatory system that provides the Chamber of Commerce with guaranteed income.
While these organizations are typically well funded, most are ineffective representatives of the private sector.
In addition, most do not undertake advocacy activities as they are controlled in whole or in part by
government interests. Countries using the State Model include Libya, China, Vietnam, Iran, and Saudi
Arabia. Its strengths are that it provides stability, sufficient financial resources, little or no competition, and
legal protection from competition. Its weaknesses are that it provides little or no incentive to advocate for
private sector interests and miniscule motivation to provide services. Also, the organization may not be
viewed as professional but rather a government agency and be governed by individuals that may not
necessarily be advocates for the private sector but rather party officials put in place by government leaders.
Anglo-Saxon Model (Private Law): The Anglo-Saxon model is prevalent in the United States, Great Britain,
India and other constitutional democracies. Membership in these associations is voluntary and income is
generated both from membership dues and non-dues income in the form of events, publications, and
services. Many of these Chambers of Commerce have strong advocacy programs to support the interests of
the business community. Countries using the Anglo-Saxon Model include the United States, United
Kingdom, Australia, Argentina, South Africa, and Chile. The model’s strengths are that competition requires
these organizations to provide top-notch programs and services, voluntary membership ensures a focus on
private sector initiatives, they are usually led by professional staff members that are trained in organizational
management, they typically serve as strong advocates for the private sector, and are typically managed by a
board of directors consisting of private businessmen and women.
Continental Model (Public Law): The Continental model is prevalent in Western Europe and parts of
Central and Eastern Africa (in countries that were former colonies of Western European powers). These
Chambers of Commerce usually have mandatory membership and thus have little incentive to launch
sweeping advocacy initiatives. Most of the Chambers operate under the principle of “social responsibility”,
which essentially means their focus is more on employee’s rights than those of employers. Countries using
this model include Germany, France, United Arab Emirates, Portugal, Austria and Turkey. Major strengths
of this model include guaranteed funding through mandatory membership, negligible competition, and
legislative protection. The major weaknesses of this model are that organizations may have little or no
incentive to meet member needs, lack of focus on volunteerism and professional staff, and programs/services
that are not based on member demand. Also, they may be considered advocates for government policy
instead of private sector initiatives.
Those organizations that are established by law under either the State or
Continental models are usually empowered with a specific mission, scope of activities and
structure that is defined within sections of the law. There are instances where more than
one law governs the establishment and operation of business associations. This is an
anomaly, however, as most countries have no more than one law that governs the
establishment and operation of business associations, or at the most two….one for the
Chamber of Commerce system and another for other business organizations including
trade associations. An increasing number of countries are consolidating archaic business
association legislation into singular laws that provide the basis for activities by either
chambers of commerce or business associations. Pakistan’s business association law is
24
included in the appendix as an example of one that unifies all applicable legislation under
one representative law.
As in Pakistan’s legislation, several areas are typically addressed within laws that
govern business associations. Typically, these areas fall into the following broad
categories:
Figure 2.2 Major Functional Areas of Laws Governing Business Associations
Legal Framework: Business association laws typically outline the legal parameters under which an
association or group of associations can operate. This may include registration procedures as well as legal
authority to represent the private sector within and outside the country.
Scope of Responsibilities: Business association laws also typically outline the scope of responsibilities that
organizations have relative to the government and the international community. Some national chambers of
commerce, for instance, are authorized by law to “officially” represent a country’s private sector in
international economic forums, trade exhibitions and trade missions.
Membership: In most but not all cases, laws governing business associations establish mandatory or quasi-
mandatory membership. Mandatory membership requires that all registered businesses (in the case of a
chamber of commerce) or all those within a sector (in the case of a trade association) become members of the
organization. In some cases, this is enforced by providing the chamber of commerce or sectoral association
with the right to license, certify or oversee the standards of registered businesses. In other cases, the
organizations are not provided this right and therefore have no enforcement authority if companies do not
join as required by law.
Organizational Structure: Laws governing business associations usually establish a required structure under
which the organizations must operate. This is most common in cases where the law established a federation
model (such as in Pakistan). In some cases, the law acts almost in the capacity of organizational bylaws as it
outlines specific governance practices to which the organization(s) must adhere.
Programs and Activities: It is typical for laws governing business associations to establish at least a partial
list of programs and services that the organizations should or may provide. In many cases, the government
may even “outsource” services such as business licensing, issuance of certificates of origin, and export
certification to an organization(s) as a way to provide them with consistent revenue. In other cases, the law
provides only broad categories under which programs and services should be constructed.
Relationship to Government: It is also common for these laws to establish guidelines under which an
association(s) may interact with government. Some, especially those under the State Model, are restrictive
and provide few opportunities for business associations to advocate for the interests of the business
community. Others provide ample opportunities for public-private dialogue.
Dissolution: Over the last ten years, it has become popular for laws to address the dissolution of assets
should an organization(s) cease to operate. This is especially the case in countries where Chambers of
Commerce own property and other assets that would require liquidation should the organization cease to
function.
In recent years, there has been a clear trend away from the establishment of
business associations under public law, meaning that more and more organizations are
changing to a voluntary membership system that is driven by market forces versus legal
authority. Countries such as Poland, Hungary and Zambia terminated mandatory
membership in favor of a voluntary, market-oriented approach to development. It is clear,
however, that business associations can thrive under either the public law or private law
systems if they institute sound, transparent governance systems that allow for a focus on
private sector needs.
Organizational structures focus on how an association is organized internally.
This is usually identified on an organizational chart similar to the one contained in the
25
chart below, which outlines the organization of the Bethlehem Chamber of Commerce
(Palestine):
Figure 2.3 Bethlehem, Palestine Chamber of Commerce and Industry Organizational Chart
This chart establishes the members (General Assembly) as the organization’s focal
point and provides it the authority to elect a board of directors in the number and
qualifications established in the bylaws. It also provides the board of directors with
authority to elect a chairman of the board (chief non-paid executive) as well as to hire a
managing director (chief paid executive) that reports to the Chairman and ultimately to the
board as a whole. The managing director is responsible for overseeing the implementation
of the organization’s programs and services through the departments established beneath
his/her authority. In other words, the managing director is a paid, professional
organizational executive that is responsible for the association’s day-to-day operation
including personnel, materials, financial reporting and membership services. He/she is
empowered, according to this organizational chart, to employ professional staff members
to manage each department under his/her authority. The managing director employs an
executive secretary that reports directly to him/her but has no oversight authority relative
to the rest of the staff.
It is not uncommon for business associations to have counselors that provide input
into their strategy and activities. For instance, the Jerusalem Chamber of Commerce has a
legal counselor as well as an economic advisor to provide input into issues that may be
outside the expertise of the organization’s board of directors and staff. In addition, many
26
business associations have affiliate or federated organizations with which they either
interact or are obligated to acknowledge. The Jerusalem Chamber of Commerce is aligned
with a group of four or more organizations that have no oversight authority but do
represent partners with which the Chamber collaborates.
For associations that are organized under a federation, the following model from
the Palestinian Chamber of Commerce provides an overview of an organizational structure
that contains many elements of international best practices:
Figure 2.4 Overview of Federation Organizational Structure
General Assembly:
The general assembly compromises all elected directors of the constituent chambers. It comprises 109
businessmen freely elected by their respective business communities representing collectively all economic
activities of the Palestinian business community. The elected boards of each chamber internally elect a
chairman who automatically becomes a member of the federation council.
Federation Council:
The elected chairmen of the constituent chambers form the Federation Council, which internally elects the
Federation’s president and three vice presidents, one from Gaza and two from the West Bank. The Chairman
of the Jerusalem Chamber of Commerce was elected by consensus as President of the Federation Council.
The following officers were also elected: Chairman of the Gaza Chamber as a first vice president, Chairman
of the Hebron Chamber as a vice president, Chairman of the Nablus Chamber as a vice president, Chairman
of the Ramallah Chamber as treasurer and chairman of the Bethlehem Chamber as a vice treasurer. The rest
of the elected Chamber chairmen are members of the Federation Council.
The Federation Council’s main task is to create harmony and synergy between the constituent Chambers, to
unify the business community behind issues of economic importance, and to provide ongoing capacity
building support for its members. The Council has a regular rotating monthly meeting at the constituent
chambers. The president of the Federation may call for emergency sessions upon his or any member’s
request in order to address any urgent issues that may arise.
Secretariat General:
General Assembly
(
Member Association’s Boards
)
Federation Council
(
Elected b
y
Federation Members
)
Secretariat
(
Chief Paid Executive/Mana
g
ement Staff
)
Administrative (Operational) Directorate
Directorate of Economic Affairs
27
The Federation President nominates a Secretary General, but the appointment has to be approved by the
Council. This also applies to the Secretary General’s assistant. The Secretary General is responsible for the
Federation’s day-to-day operation. He is also responsible for implementing the Council’s policies.
Operational Directorates:
The Federations structure in terms of operational staff is not completed. Currently, only ten staff members
are working for the Federation. This includes the Secretary General and his assistant along with two
secretaries, a chief economist, a senior researcher, two junior researchers and two information technology
specialists.
Directorate of Economic Affairs
The Directorate of Economic Affairs serves as the Federation’s backbone and has a staff of five headed by a
senior researcher. In the future, the plan is to strengthen this directorate to have two main departments;
private sector strategies/policies department and department of services & technical assistance. The private
sector strategies/polices department will consist of three subordinate units; research & studies, foreign trade
and credit & investment. These units will be vertically integrated into the department of strategies and
policies to advocate for better involvement of the private sector in legislation, trade agreements and
economic development initiatives. Additionally, it will be horizontally integrated into the business advisory
& consultation services in order to promote capacity building, marketing & trade promotion and access to
credit and the provision of business development services.
Delivery of these services will be done by the Federation at the constituent chamber level. The main task of
these Federation units is to coordinate activities among the chambers, initiate the process of learning from
success stories, and institutionalize international best practices within constituent organizations.
While there are certainly other organizational models that are appropriate, the two
noted above are common (with variations) for use by local and national business
associations as well as federations. Regardless of the ultimate design, the important
elements of an organizational structure are:
1. The establishment of members as the ultimate governing authority. In both of
these examples, the organizations’ membership elected the governing boards and
thus had input into the overall structure.
2. The establishment of a pro-active governing board. The board of director’s size is
not as important as the criterion established to elect organizational leaders, but
international best practices dictate that boards function at a higher level when
containing no more than 21 members. Board members should be visionary leaders
that are committed to the organization’s success and are willing to act in a
constructive, transparent, and collective manner.
3. The establishment of transparency as organizational culture. The organizational
structure must be supported by transparent bylaws and other regulations that
establish election procedures, ethical behavior, and constructive member input.
4. The employment and empowerment of paid staff: In both of these examples, paid
staff form the critical nexus between the governing board, which is responsible for
strategy, and the members, which expect effective, demand-driven services.
Regardless of their location on the organizational chart, the employment of
professional, highly-motivated staff members is critical to organizational success.
28
An association’s organizational structure is critical in its overall development, as
structural difficulties in the area of governance are often the cause of problems in other
areas such as membership, programming and communications. For this reason,
organizations should take full advantage of international best practices models such as
those outlined above.
Accountability structures focus on the establishment of internal regulations that
promote accountable behavior on behalf of members, staff, directors and other leaders.
This structure includes but is not limited to the following:
Figure 2.5 Accountability Structures Utilized by Progressive Business Associations
Bylaws: Bylaws establish the framework under which an organization exists. It outlines the structure,
operational procedures, and other governance principles under which the organization operates. Bylaws are
considered by most highly-functioning organizations to be their most important governance document. Two
sample bylaws are included in the appendix and provide an overview of the types of information contained
therein.
Codes of Ethics: As an increasing number of business associations focus on transparency, codes of ethics
have become widely used in order to ensure accountability among members, directors and staff. Codes of
ethics usually contain language that addresses conflict of interest, director and staff ethics, gifts, and
guidelines for interaction with public officials among others. A sample code of ethics from the Afghanistan
International Chamber of Commerce is included in the appendix. In AICC’s case, every staff member and
elected director (from the Chairman on down) signed the code of ethics and was bound by its accountability
structure.
Personnel, Policy and Procedures Manual: As organizations grow, operational guidelines become
increasingly important, which is why a number of organizations have created personnel, policy and
procedures manuals to provide a framework under which organizational staff may operate. Typically, such a
manual will include an explanation of office procedures, staff authority, ethics guidelines, employment
practices, dress requirements, annual review processes, and grievance procedures.
Job Descriptions: In order for association staff members to function at a high level, they must have a
specific set of goals, activities and outcomes that are pre-established. In addition, they must understand their
role(s) within the organization. This being the case, most highly-functioning associations have written job
descriptions and/or employment contracts that outline the scope, function, duration and desired outcome for
each staff position. The job descriptions, and the goals that are established in conjunction with them, provide
the basis for annual employee evaluations.
Experience indicates that accountability structures are especially needed in
transitional countries, where rule of law is often lacking. While these structures typically
do not initially have the force of law, they have been found to be constructive mechanisms
for the promotion of transparency and ethical behavior.
All things considered, governance provides the foundation on which successful
business associations are built. While a focus on governance provides little in the way of
excitement, it lays the foundational stones necessary to construct sustainable programs and
services.
29
CHAPTER THREE
STRATEGIC PLANNING AND ITS ROLE IN ORGANIZATIONAL
DEVELOPMENT
SECTION ONE: OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC PLANNING
“The illiterate of the 21
st
Century will not be those who cannot read and write but
those who cannot learn and re-learn”
Salima Ahmad, President of the Bangladesh Women’s Chamber of Commerce and
Industry, understood the daunting task ahead of her when she founded the organization in
2000. Because of the country’s poverty, political unrest, and conservative views on
women’s participation in business, it appeared that her efforts might be doomed from the
start. Nearly nine years later, however, BWCCI is now a dynamic, growing association
that is empowering hundreds of Bangladesh businesswomen. Mrs. Ahmad contributes this
success largely to two factors. First, she focused on the establishment of an effective and
transparent organizational governance process and secondly she took the time to develop a
strategic plan for the organization’s development. “I began with the end in mind”, she
stated during a recent speech. “Strategic planning provided the vision we needed to
establish membership support and credibility. It is the primary reason behind BWCCI’s
success”.
Mrs. Ahmad’s story is reiterated by business association executives around the
world that have discovered the “power of planning”. Thousands of organizations fail
every year and none of them plan to fail. Many of them, however, fail to plan, thus
contributing to their demise. In order to succeed in today’s ever-changing environment,
business associations embrace a new management paradigm that includes appropriate
emphasis on strategy. Strategic planning is defined as the process whereby an
organization determines where it is going and the most direct path to getting there.
Essentially, the process involves the institutionalization of a process that begins with a
definition of where the organization wants to “go” or what it wants to achieve in the
future. Once this is determined, the remainder of the strategic planning process is devoted
to developing a process to move the organization toward the achievement of its vision.
SECTION TWO: KEY ELEMENTS OF STRATEGIC PLANNING
A strategic plan is important for four main reasons. First, it makes an organization
proactive versus reactive. Planning allows an organization to “see the future” and take
advantage of opportunities instead of dealing with day-to-day problems. Secondly, it
allows an organization to adapt to a fluid environment. In transitional countries, changes
are rapid and profound. Organizations can use strategic planning as a way to be on the
leading edge of change instead of being in a constant state of chaos. Thirdly, strategic
planning helps organizations adapt to crisis situations. In 1993, in the aftermath of the
terrorist bombing of the Alfred E. Murrah Federal Building in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma,
the local chamber of commerce played a critical role in helping businesses re-open and
30
assisting the press in gaining access to the facts of the situation. It was able to do this
because of its strategic plan. Finally, and most importantly, strategic planning provides a
mechanism through which organizations can invigorate the membership to support its
vision. Members support with their finances what they support with their ideas and
strategic planning provides a way to gain their involvement in the organization’s
programs.
There are six elements of strategic planning (vision, mission, objectives, activities,
resources and outcomes) that are divided into two functional areas (product and process).
The following is a brief explanation of each functional area and the elements incorporated
in each:
Product: Product incorporates vision, mission and outcomes and is the lynchpin of
the strategic planning process. Successful strategic planners “begin with the end in mind”
and work backward to design a process-oriented approach to achieving the desired
outcomes.
Process: Process incorporates objectives, activities and resources. It is the system
designed to move an organization from its current position to its desired vision. It is
usually based on a system that includes organizational structure, controls and evaluation.
3.1 Essential Elements of a Strategic Plan
Vision=Where does the organization want to go? An organization must agree on a vision
before it can develop a capacity building process. The vision is typically developed with
membership input and fine-tuned by the board of directors at an annual retreat or
conference. It establishes where an organization wants to be within a specific timeframe.
Mission=Why does the organization do what it does? The mission statement, which is
typically outlined in no more than fifty words, outlines why an organization conducts
specific activities at the present time.
Objectives=What process will the organization put in place to achieve its vision?
Objectives are essential elements of the process designed to help an organization progress
from where it is today to its desired vision for the future. They establish what an
organization will do in order to achieve its vision and therefore must be quantifiable,
measurable and achievable.
Activities=How will the organization achieve its goals/objectives? Activities are specific
initiatives designed to achieve objectives. They may range from comprehensive programs
to specific tasks that are necessary to reach benchmarks in the strategic planning process.
Resources=When will the organization achieve its goals/objectives as well as its vision?
Resources include the time, financial resources and materials to initiate the activities
necessary to achieve objectives and ultimately make the organization’s vision a reality. It
establishes a timeline in which an organizational strategy will be implemented.
31
Vision
Of these six elements, vision is the one most often overlooked, as it is sometimes
confused with mission. Vision is typically an end-state the organization wants to achieve
in the long-term. The period of time necessary to achieve the vision is dependent on a
variety of factors such as current organizational capacity, commitment on the part of the
organization’s volunteer leadership and staff, overall member support, and the business
environment in which the association operates. The last factor is of paramount importance
since in a transitional country it may take an organization five years to accomplish what an
organization in a stable political and economic environment could achieve in a fraction of
the time.
Vision differs from mission in three primary ways. First, vision focuses on the
long-term, while mission simply provides a reflection of why the organizations operates
the way it does today. This being the case, the second difference is that vision requires
foresight while mission requires only sight. It is not complicated for an organization to
state its purpose for existence, but it is sometimes very difficult for it to craft a vision.
This is especially true in transitional countries where vision has not been a management
paradigm used in the past. Finally, vision focuses on product while mission focuses on
purpose. In other words, vision outlines what is to be achieved while mission outlines why
it is achieved.
In most cases, vision is incorporated into a short phrase that reminds the
organization’s leaders where they are headed. While it need not be long, the vision
statement should be comprehensive and incorporate member input. Also, it should
establish a timeframe for accomplishment. The following are some examples of effective
vision statements:
Figure 3.2 Sample Vision Statements
“The Chamber will inspire and influence business vitality” Auckland, New Zealand
Chamber of Commerce
“As the premiere advocacy organization in the state, the Chamber will serve as the unified
voice for promoting an economy of increased productivity and per capita income to
achieve global competitiveness”. South Carolina (USA) Chamber of Commerce
“In ten years the Dubai Business Council will be an organization that facilitates trade,
promotes economic opportunities and creates business matches between Afghan
companies in the UAE and those of countries around the world”. Afghan Business
Council, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Mission
A mission statement is a statement of purpose that defines why an organization
exists. It is typically stated in 50 words or less. An organization’s mission sets the
foundation for its strategy as well as builds its identity. The mission statement should be
widely understood by the organization’s members and should create a clear image in the
minds of stakeholders. The following are some examples of effective mission statements:
32
Figure 3.3 Sample Mission Statements
“The mission of the National Association of Manufacturers is to enhance the
competitiveness of manufacturers, to improve American living standards by shaping a
legislative and regulatory environment conducive to US economic growth, and to increase
understanding among policymakers, the media and the general public about the importance
of manufacturing to America’s economic strength.”
“The mission of the Kenya National Chamber of Commerce is to play a central and
catalytic role in facilitating the growth of Kenya’s economy through entrepreneurial
development that is geared to result in creation of wealth and employment.”
Objectives
Objectives are an organization’s goals over the long term and identify what the
organization wants to accomplish. They are typically action-oriented and provide
direction to the organization’s leaders. In addition, they should be realistic, yet
challenging and measurable. For instance, a strong goal would be “increasing membership
income by $50,000 over the next year” versus “increasing membership income”. The
latter provides no measurable goal and no timeline, both of which are necessary in
developing strong objectives.
Many organizations develop their objectives around the “SMARTER” model
outlined below, as it provides a measurable way to track progress toward implementation
of the overall strategic plan:
Figure 3.4 Measuring Objectives
Specific: As mentioned above, objectives should be specific so that there is broad
understanding of what is to be accomplished.
Measurable: Objectives should also be measurable, setting specific targets to be achieved.
Acceptable: Objectives should be acceptable to the membership and developed with input
from the membership.
Resource-sufficient: It is important that objectives be realistic from a resource standpoint.
Resources are the manpower, time, materials and finances needed to accomplish the
objective.
Time-sensitive: Objectives should be tied to a specific timeline so that there is no question
as to when they are to be accomplished.
Extending: Objectives should be aggressive but realistic. They should stretch an
organization’s parameters, but not be unattainable.
Rewarding: Objectives should provide return on investment, as well as measurable
progress toward an organization’s vision.
Activities
Activities are specific initiatives that are implemented by an organization in order
to achieve its objectives. The following is an example:
33
Figure 3.5: Objectives and Activities
Objective: The organization will increase membership income by $50,000 over the
next year.
Activities: a) The organization will conduct a membership campaign from June 1-30 to
recruit 50 new members.
b) The organization will establish monthly networking events to identify and
involve potential members.
c) The organization will run monthly advertisements in the newspaper and
on selected radio stations that discuss chamber events and activities.
As is shown in this example, activities focus on specific actions that will elicit a
planned result. All the activities listed support the overall objective of increasing new
membership income. Therefore, the objective outlines “what” is to be done and the
activities focus on “how” the objective will be achieved.
Resources
Many associations view resources as simply the financial capacity needed to
implement its strategic plan. While finances are certainly one element of the resource
picture, there are other factors to consider, such as time and materials. In many cases,
strategic plans fail not because of lack of vision or even a flawed process, but rather an
underestimation of the resources necessary to make the vision a reality. The involvement
of well-trained paid staff members, committed volunteers, and outside stakeholders are
critical elements of the resource picture. The resources necessary to achieve the
organization’s overall vision should be agreed upon in advance, and changes should be
expected. After all, prices rise, key staff members depart the organization, and assets
depreciate. For these reasons, it is important to revisit the resource plan often.
Once there is an understanding of the elements contained within a strategic plan, an
organization must focus on the process of its development. It is essential that this process
be both participative and strategic, as the organization must generate broad-based support
for the plan’s implementation. The following chart provides an excellent structural
example of a participative strategic planning process. This strategic planning process
begins with the identification of issues and options, which is essential to the establishment
of a strategy. Regardless of an organization’s vision, it must thoroughly understand the
issues that affect its achievement of this vision, as well as the options available to address
these issues. This model also incorporates the use of a strategic planning task force in
order to ensure that plan is indicative of the overall organization. In some organizations,
this task force is the board of directors while in others a task force is appointed and asked
to develop the draft plan for review by the board. Regardless of the system, member input
is the key to a strong strategic plan.
34
SECTION THREE: THE STRATEGIC PLANNING PROCESS FLOW CHART
Ide
ntify
I
ss
u
es
a
nd
O
pt
ions
The
Slate
G
03.I
;!
j
e
~t
iv
es,
a
nd
I'
ri
o
ri
t
ies
Planning
...
Process
Co
ll
ect
a
nd
Inte
rp
re
t Data
I're
pare
p~
ir
a
ry
D
rnfl
I
Co
m
prehe
n
si~
e
I'
lan
Re
v
iO'W
ulld
Re
,
'ise
I
Pre
sen
t
Prel
im
inary
D
rnfl
to Task
Fo
rc
e
...
P
repare
F
i
~
t
D
rafl
I
Co
mp
rehen
si
ve
Plan
Rev
iew
ulld
Rev
ise
I
P
rese
nt
Fir
st D
rn
fi
lo
P
lan
nin
g tlo
ld
Jo
in
l P
ublic
C
om
miss
ion
M
eeting
...
Pr
epa
re
F
ina
l D
ra
fi
R
e"
iewlmd R
I"
'i
sl'
I
Co
m
prehe
n
s i~
e
PI3n
Rev
iew
(llI
d R
evise
I
I'r
esenl
Final
D
rnfi
lO G
overn
i
ng
tlo
ld
Jo
in
l P
ublic
Bod
, He
ari
ng
...
A
do
pt
Com
pr
ehens
iv
e P
lan
Re"iewand H
I"
'i
sl'
35
As noted in the chart above, an organization’s members should be involved in the
early phases of the planning process (issue identification and options), the middle of the
planning process (public hearing or general membership meeting) and the end of the
process (joint public hearing). This will create strong support among the membership base
for the strategy’s implementation.
This mechanism is just one of many that is used by progressive associations to
develop a strategic plan. Another, called the Logic Model, is extensively explained in
Chapter Nine. While they incorporate many of the steps necessary to ensure success, these
planning methodologies should be adapted for use in organizations where the political,
educational, and/or cultural environment requires a different approach. The time frame
necessary to complete each step will depend on a variety of factors but will certainly be
elongated in countries where the communication infrastructure is poor. Because of this, it
is important that an organization’s leadership is totally committed to the strategic planning
process and understands its importance in developing sustainability.
In conclusion, organizations should do everything possible to construct a participative and
transparent strategic planning process. If the process is structured incorrectly, there are a
number of pitfalls that could come into play. First, the organization could try to be all
things to all people, which is not possible. This will drain resources while at the same time
creating frustration among staff and volunteers. Secondly, a flawed strategic planning
process can lead an organization’s total focus to raising funds, which undermines the
reason why associations exist in the first place. Since members are at the core of any
organization, activities only make sense, regardless of their financial impact, if they
benefit the members. Finally, a flawed process can lead to the development of a
bureaucracy that damages the organization and renders it ineffective in providing
programs and services. International best practices indicate that business associations
operate with higher efficiency when staff and volunteers are empowered to utilize their
expertise in a non-bureaucratic, team-oriented way. By avoiding these pitfalls,
organizations can ensure the development of a strategic plan that culminates in turning
vision into reality.
36
CHAPTER FOUR
THE MEMBERSHIP SYSTEM
Regardless of a business association’s structure, membership development plays a
key role in its overall success. Most organizational executives will acknowledge this, but
in many cases the process of recruiting and retaining members is confounding to even
mature associations. There are several reasons for this. First and foremost, many
organizations, especially those in transitional and post-conflict countries, do not have a
background in membership recruitment. Where no paradigm exists, organizations tend to
adopt the easiest approach to membership recruitment, which is advocating for the
government to pass a law establishing mandatory membership. In a large majority of
cases this approach does not produce the desired results, as businesses that are forced to
join an association will not support it with more than the revenue they are obligated to
provide. Over time, a number of association executives realized that from a resource
standpoint, financial and otherwise, it was best to adopt a system that focuses on the
development of “loyal members” versus “loyal subjects”. Because of this, several high
profile organizations that formerly enjoyed mandatory membership eventually pressured
the government to rescind the law, thus allowing them to institute a voluntary system. In
every case, revenues increased, as did overall support for the organizations as a whole.
Even organizations that retained mandatory membership began movement toward
member-oriented programs as a way to create commitment instead of resentment.
Since membership development is one of the most important aspects in association
capacity building, it is the subject of much debate within organizational management
circles. While the last twenty years have produced a number of “unique” membership
programs, the most effective model continues to be what is known as the “membership
system”. This system, called the Chamber and Association Membership Program (CAMP)
was developed especially for use in transitional and post-conflict countries as it
institutionalizes a membership mentality within organizations while at the same time
positively impacting their resource streams.
The CAMP strategy’s foundation is a process-oriented approach meant to initiate
sustainability within business associations. The focus of the program is on the three
essential components of membership development, which are recruitment, retention and
non-dues income.
The CAMP model’s implementation requires the creation of the following strategic
processes within the three component areas:
Step One: Creation of Membership Team
The construction of a membership recruitment team is critical to the success of
membership development. The team must have strong and committed leadership (usually
provided by a member of the organization’s board of directors), as well as trained
members that have marketing/sales skills and are willing to “sell” the organization’s
37
importance to the business community. Before the team begins work, its members should
undergo teambuilding and training in order to ensure that the membership recruitment
effort’s methodology and activities are sound.
It is important that the chief paid executive assign a staff person (usually the
membership director) to provide technical support for the committee’s activities as well as
to coordinate training, networking and membership-outreach events. The staff person not
only provides critical technical assistance to the committee, but also serves as a liaison
between the committee and the organization’s management. This communication link
ensures that everyone including the chief paid executive understands and concurs with the
direction in which the membership recruitment effort is headed. In some organizations,
the recruitment team consists entirely of staff members, but experience indicates that those
with board member and volunteer representation are the most effective since they can
speak to prospective members as businesspeople that have made a conscious decision to
invest their own time and financial resources in the organization.
Whether staff or volunteer oriented, the team’s composition is important in that a
broad range of expertise should be included. Expertise should include marketing,
communications, and sales among others. By utilizing a broad range of skills, the team
can address any situations that arise during strategy development. It is helpful to involve a
board member on the team as he/she can provide a direct link to the organization’s
leadership. In many cases, the board member will chair the membership team, thereby
giving it instant credibility within the organizational structure. Membership teams range
in size, but most are between 9 and 13 members, as this represents a manageable size.
Meetings are set at intervals agreed to by the team, but during strategy development this
may require several meetings a month.
Once the team is created, its members should receive intensive training in order to
ensure a thorough understanding of the organization’s vision, mission, programs, and
activities. Training should be tailored to the members’ expertise. The following is a
sample training outline for an organization’s membership team:
Figure 4.1 Sample Membership Team Training Outline
Module One: Membership Recruitment
Understanding Membership
WHO are your potential members?
WHAT are their expectations?
WHY should they join your association?
WHEN should they be approached for membership?
HOW should the association solicit membership and involvement?
The Laws of Membership Growth
Members and potential members must have realistic expectations.
The association must understand and exceed member expectations.
Relationships sell memberships.
38
Selling a membership is the BEGINNING of a process, not the ENDING of one.
Members expect a fair price for the services provided.
Associations must continually communicate their message to stakeholders.
The more an association knows about its members the more success it will have.
Membership development is considered to be the recruitment of new customers and the
retention of existing customers.
Membership Development
Development of a membership strategy.
Establishment of goals and objectives.
Development of a fair pricing structure.
Development and implementation of a membership recruitment campaign.
Membership Strategy
Should be based on input from the members.
Should be quantitative and measurable.
Should be constructed according to a timeline.
Should identify responsible parties.
Pricing Structure
Know what it costs to provide service.
Minimum dues should be at least equal to the cost of providing service.
Dues can be based on a variety of factors.
Different levels of membership can be established.
Membership Campaigns
Conduct as part of the overall membership strategy.
Set goals and objectives that are quantifiable and attainable.
Recruit a leadership team.
Recruit volunteers.
Develop materials.
Develop sales strategy.
Conduct training for volunteers and staff.
Promote membership in the association by partnering with media.
Conduct campaign.
Celebrate results.
Module Two: Membership Retention
“Membership campaigns are important, but the best way to create membership growth
still is, and always will be, through building relationships and focusing on exceeding
customer expectations.”
39
Membership Retention
It costs 65% more to recruit a new member than it does to retain an existing one.
The first two years of member involvement are critical to retention efforts.
Outstanding service and attention to detail increases retention.
The Formula for Success
Understanding customer expectations + Exhibiting a willingness to exceed them=
Membership Growth.
How to Make Members Love You Forever
Ask them what they need and exceed their expectations.
Say “thank you” without asking for anything.
Tend to the details.
Module Three: Generating Non-Dues Income
Other Sources of Income
Publications: Membership Directors, Catalogues, Brochures
Events: Trade Exhibitions, Forums, Investment Luncheons
Technology: Website Advertising, Development of Web Pages
Information: Research Materials, Statistics
International Best Practices
On-going membership effort.
Higher than 85% annual membership retention.
No more than 60% of association income from membership and no less than 30%.
Increasing amount of budget from non-dues income, but not more than 50%.
Final Thoughts on Membership
Dues: Members will pay for what they get. Great services=more income.
Service: Associations should offer the BEST service to its members.
Staff: Typically, a smaller number of people will accomplish more.
Bureaucracy: Is like a stake in the heart of associations.
40
Step Two: Stakeholder Input
As in the development of an overall organizational strategy, the creation of a
strategic plan for membership development requires input from stakeholders. A variety of
techniques may be used to solicit this input, but the most common are focus groups
(usually consisting of members, former members, and prospective members), surveys and
company site visits. The following is an explanation of each technique:
Focus Groups
Purpose: The purpose of focus groups is to gain information from members, non-
members and former members that can be used to develop a membership recruitment,
retention and non-dues income strategy. Focus groups are widely considered to be an
excellent source of information because they provide instant input within a structured
setting.
Design of Focus Groups: Focus groups typically contain 8-12 participants and are
professionally facilitated in order to achieve maximum results. In the case of a
membership recruitment strategy, it is best to empanel two groups each of members, non-
members and former members. An agenda and list of questions for each group is attached.
Groups should include both men and women of various ages and backgrounds. It is
important to have an adequate demographic representation in the group. The facilitator
should be an experienced but neutral party that has no ties to the organization. No staff
member or volunteer leader of the association should attend the focus group sessions as
this typically hampers discussion and erodes the ability of the facilitator to elicit honest
responses. To form the focus groups, the President or Executive Director of the
organization should send letters to the members, non members and former members
identified by the staff. The letter should stress that all comments made during the sessions
are confidential and that none of the organization’s staff will be present. A sample letter
of invitation is attached. The organization, at its discretion, may offer incentives to those
individuals that participate. This may vary from providing a lunch to giving away prizes.
Typically, the sessions are held over a two or three-day period, with the facilitator holding
both morning and afternoon sessions. While the sessions may be held at the offices of the
organization, most likely they will be held off-site at a conference facility, restaurant or
hotel.
Focus Group Process: Typically, focus group sessions are between 1 hour and 1 ½ hours
in length. Each session is scripted with an agenda and specific questions that are asked by
the facilitator. Responses to the questions are noted on a flip chart either by the facilitator
or a designated recorder. The facilitator must attempt to elicit input from all the
participants, while at the same time ensuring accurate and honest responses. After all
questions have been asked and responses recorded, the facilitator thanks the group and
distributes any incentives that are offered.
Report: Within ten days after the focus groups, the facilitator prepares a report that
provides an overview of all responses, as well as suggests recommendations for future
41
actions within the organization. Typically, the facilitator will meet with the organization’s
senior staff and volunteers to present the report.
Membership Development Surveys
Purpose: Conducting surveys is a traditional way of generating input from stakeholders,
which may include members, non-members, international donors, government officials,
and other individuals/organizations with which a business association has contact. A
survey’s purpose, of course, is to provide structured feedback that can be analyzed and
utilized in the development of an organizational strategy, or at least an element of the
strategy such as membership development.
Survey Design: A survey’s design is critical in its ability to generate useful information.
Surveys that are designed to achieve pre-determined results are not useful inputs to a
strategic plan, nor are unscientific samplings that do not include a broad sampling pool. It
is recommended that for purposes of developing a membership development strategy that
organizations survey a wide-variety of stakeholders in order to gauge overall support for
its activities across diverse groups. The survey should contain both quantifiable and
subjective questions to elicit both structured and un-structured input. Quantifiable
questions allow the organization access to specific data that can be used to analyze the
organization’s perceived effectiveness among a variety of stakeholders, while subjective
responses may provide insight into specific situations and/or attitudes of importance to
individual stakeholders. A survey sample is included in the appendix.
Survey Process: The process used to conduct the survey impacts its results. First and
foremost, a scientific sampling pool must be developed that includes all of the targeted
stakeholders. It is assumed that no more than 15% of respondents will complete a mailed
survey, so in order to achieve an accurate sampling, the survey pool must be large enough
to ensure the proper return. The distribution pool may be smaller for survey projects that
include personal visits and/or follow up. Many organizations outsource survey projects in
order to ensure a scientific sampling as well as impartiality in the question-development,
survey implementation and results analysis processes. In the case of outsourcing, an
organization typically works closely with a professional polling/research company to
develop a sample list, survey methodology, survey instrument, and analysis process. Once
the data is evaluated, it becomes part of the input stream along with focus group results
and the responses from company visits.
Report: Organizations typically report survey findings at a public stakeholders meeting,
but many also publish an executive summary for distribution.
Membership Development Company Visits
Purpose: Conducting company visits can also be an effective way of generating input
although it is time consuming and lacks the scientific nature of either a written survey or a
focus group. Because of this, many organizations utilize company site visits as part of
their survey process. The strength of this technique is it provides the best way to obtain
42
honest, uncensored information on the business association’s performance. Its weakness is
that it takes significant staff and/or volunteer resources to plan, conduct and follow up on
the visits.
Company Visit Design: Companies selected for visits should be approach by mail with
personal follow up from a membership team representative. Once appointments are set, an
appropriate number of visits should be assigned to each team member and selected
association staff. The visit should be no more than one hour in length and should focus on
the completion of a survey form.
Survey Process: Once introductions are made, the membership team representative
should provide a brief overview of the reason for the visit, after which he/she will ask a
few questions in a conversational style. The questions should correspond with a pre-set
survey instrument. Once the survey is completed, the team member may want to tour the
company if asked to do so by the owner.
Report: Organizations typically report survey findings at a public stakeholders meeting,
but many also publish an executive summary for distribution. This can be done in
conjunction with written (mail) survey findings as discussed above.
Gathering input is a critical step in the planning process, but evaluation and follow
up should not be overlooked. Associations sometimes waste their resources by failing to
utilize input correctly, or through being negligent in follow up. Each individual that
participated in the survey as well as every member should receive a copy of the results and
be invited to provide additional input on an ongoing basis. If used properly, the results
will provide the membership team with an indication of what issues should be addressed in
the membership strategy. While some association leaders feel that input should only be
obtained from members, experience indicates that this needlessly narrows the sample pool,
while at the same time creating an information gap.
Step Three: Strategy Development
Utilizing the input received from stakeholders, the membership team should
construct a strategy that focuses on prioritized goals. Using the elements of strategy
development discussed in the previous chapter, team members can construct a customized
and prioritized membership process that will lead to the desired results.
In 2002, the Satu Mare Chamber of Commerce and Industry in Romania developed
a membership development strategy that is included in the appendix. This strategy
allowed the organization to increase membership by more than 30% while at the same time
cutting its attrition rate from 44% to 19% over twelve months. This strategy was
successful because a) it was created utilizing input from key stakeholders, b) it was
designed utilizing a systems-based approach that provided a scientific approach to
development, c) it was created utilizing the techniques described in the previous chapter,
and d) it was customized to fit the organization.
43
When analyzing the results of its information collection efforts, the leaders of the
Satu Mare Chamber identified five primary issues. First, as a whole, members were
uninformed and/or dissatisfied with the organization’s efforts. Secondly, both members
and non-members saw the Chamber as basically a revenue collection agency for the
government instead of an advocate for the private sector. Thirdly, a majority of all
stakeholders that provided input (members, non-members and former members)
considered the Chamber’s leadership to be unconcerned about their problems. Fourthly, a
majority of total respondents said they would retain their membership or (in the case of
non-members or former members) become members of the association only if they saw
real progress in the areas of advocacy and program development. Finally, a large majority
of respondents believed that the Satu Mare Chamber could be a catalyst for private sector
development should it change its mentality. Armed with this information, the Chamber
developed a strategy that focused on retention of existing members first, then the
recruitment of new members and finally the creation of non-dues income. More
importantly, the plan established membership as the Chamber’s single most important
priority.
When analyzing the types of membership strategies within progressive
associations, most contain at least some of the following elements:
Membership Recruitment: This is the process of recruiting new members or bringing
former members back onto the membership roles. Members are defined as those
companies and/or individuals that pay annual dues to an organization. If dues are not paid,
the company and/or individual cannot be considered a member. International best
practices in membership recruitment often include the following activities:
Membership Campaign: A membership campaign is a recruitment tool that is widely used
by voluntary membership organizations around the world. It is an event conducted over a
specific time frame that has the goal of adding new members to the business association.
Campaigns are usually held once a year, but some organizations hold them as often as
quarterly. Their duration ranges from a few days to more than a month during which
organization staff and volunteers (comprising a membership team) attempt to recruit as
many new members as possible. While this technique is still widely used, it is not
considered by membership development experts to be the most effective way of recruiting
new members. Its strengths are that it allows for the recruitment of a volume of new
members at one time and therefore the organization receives a bulk infusion of revenue.
This technique also has some inherent weaknesses, the most significant of which is that it
reduces membership to a one time a year phenomenon. Membership development should
be a daily focus for business associations, not just an annual exercise that brings in
increased revenue during a short period. In addition, campaigns tend to focus on recruiting
new members instead of retaining them. Once an individual or company decides to pay
dues to an organization, this is the beginning of a process not the end of one. Retention
should be the organization’s focus from the first day after a new member joins.
Campaigns tend to skew the focus toward recruitment.
44
Networking Events: Networking events are ongoing programs that are usually informal,
allowing members, non-members and other stakeholders to get to know each other better.
Typically, these events feature a reception (that is often sponsored by a member company
or group of companies) and a short program that focuses on a topic of interest. The
event’s purpose is to create business-to-business linkages among the association’s
members as well as to distribute information on the organization and its programs. An
increasing number of business associations are using networking events as a way to
develop interest within non-members. The American Chamber of Commerce in
Kyrgyzstan sponsors monthly networking events that raise its visibility and allow it to
communicate with a broad range of stakeholders. These events are one of the techniques it
uses to gain new members. The Afghanistan International Chamber of Commerce also
sponsors monthly networking events that promote business linkages as well as facilitate
information flow. AICC has signed up new members at virtually every one of these events
over the last twelve months. Membership experts agree that networking events can be an
important part of an organization’s ongoing membership development strategy.
Ongoing Membership Effort: An ongoing membership effort is one that happens on a
daily basis. It may or may not include an annual recruitment campaign to provide short-
term focus on membership, but it does not depend on such an effort to be the foundation of
its recruitment strategy. Rather, it establishes membership development as a whole as one
of the organization’s most significant goals. Organizations that focus on membership
development as an ongoing exercise usually provide intense training for staff members and
volunteer leaders on the specific elements of the membership system. Staff members and
leaders constantly look for opportunities to recruit new members or retain existing ones.
In other words, membership is a “mentality”. It permeates the entire organization and is
valued by staff and volunteer leaders alike.
Membership Retention: This is the process of retaining dues-paying members from year
to year. Research conducted by the National Association of Membership Directors (U.S.)
reveals that retaining members costs 65% less than recruiting new members. In addition,
NAMD asserts that members retained for at least five consecutive years have an 85%
chance of retaining their membership for at least ten years more. In other words, creating
loyal members is of paramount importance to business associations. International best
practices in membership retention often include the following activities:
Thank You Campaign: This is a campaign that focuses on ensuring that every member
within an organization receives at least one “unsolicited” visit every year from a staff
member, volunteer leader or their representative. This visit allows the organization to
have a “face” with each of its members, as well as providing an opportunity to express
gratitude for the member’s support. Some organizations structure such a campaign over a
series of days or weeks and they segment their membership lists among dozens of
volunteers and staff members that personally visit each and every member. The campaign
also provides the organization a way to update its membership records by recording
address changes, business closures, new ownership, etc. As effective as “thank you”
campaigns are for some organizations, they are impractical for others. In countries where
security is a concern or where infrastructure does not allow for easy access, this technique
45
may not be feasible. In addition, it is resource-dependent (from the standpoint of staff and
volunteer effort) as well as time consuming.
Involvement on Committees: Committees are an integral part of an organization’s
structure. They provide not only a mechanism through which goals are accomplished but
also a way to involve members in the organization’s programs. Membership experts agree
that involvement is critical to membership retention. In fact, a study conducted by the
National Association of Membership Directors (U.S.), found that members who are
involved in committees and other organizational activities are 77% more likely to renew
their financial support than those who are not involved. Encouraging member
participation costs very little, but the rewards can be extremely high. In some
organizations, committees meet monthly to plan programs or discuss issues. In others,
short-term task forces are responsible for implementing core programs. Regardless of the
system, member involvement is paramount. Through committees and task forces,
members not only gain more knowledge about the organization and its practices but they
also provide a great service to staff and volunteers by segmenting the work load. One
noted membership expert says, “Members support with their money what they believe in
with their hearts”. Involvement is a way to create a bond between an organization and its
members that leads to ongoing support.
Customized Programs and Services: It is obvious that the development of a sustainable
business association is dependent on the quality of programs and services it provides. The
problem in many organizations, however, is not that they do not provide services, but
rather the kind of services they provide. Programs and services that do not meet the needs
of members waste both an organization’s time and resources. For this reason, the practice
of “customizing” programs and services is becoming increasingly important.
“Customization” assumes that members in different sectors, sub-sectors and industry
groupings may have different needs. For instance, a manufacturing company most likely
will be interested in different services than will a retail business. In addition, some
business owners have different ideas as to what programs and services are important to
them personally. For instance, a member may want to receive his/her newsletter on line
instead of in hard-copy form because he/she has too much paper piling up on the desk. If
an organization does not know this, or ignores it, the member may become dissatisfied and
cease to renew his/her membership. Business associations that offer the same services to
every member therefore ignore the fact that people and companies represent a broad cross-
section of society. “Customizing” programs and services provides a way to meet both
individual and corporate needs. To do this, an organization’s staff and leadership must be
keenly aware of the difference within its membership base, have the willingness to find out
what interests members, and develop a fee-based dues schedule that provides members a
way to pay for the programs and services they desire. Customization requires a thorough
knowledge of what members want, which can be accomplished through personal visits,
surveys, and other input-gathering exercises. However, it can also be accomplished
through a thorough understanding of the industries represented within an organization.
For instance, a retail travel agency’s primary goal is most likely to gain access to more
tourists. This being the case, the owner of a travel agency may want to participate in an
organization’s tourism committee so that he/she can have access to information on laws
46
that govern the industry as well as promotion opportunities. He/she may also be interested
in having access to international trade missions, on-line promotion opportunities, and
advertisement in publications, as all of these initiatives provide access to potential
customers. The owner of a printing company, on the other hand, may be interested in
bidding on the printing for the association’s newsletter and/or magazine, as well as
attending networking events at which he/she can meet potential local customers. If an
organization understands these needs and responds to them, it can create loyal members
that will support it into perpetuity. A noted membership expert defines the importance of
customized programs and services by saying, “If you want pie and someone gives you
cake, you may eat the cake for awhile, but eventually you will go to a place where you can
get pie. It is human nature”.
Fee-Based Membership Dues Structure: A fee-based membership structure is one in
which a member pays for the programs and services that he/she receives. Some
organizations provide a comprehensive list of services that are individually priced
allowing members to choose whatever they want and pay accordingly. Others provide
“tiered” membership services under which the higher a member’s dues, the more services
he/she receives. Either scenario offers members the option to spend as much as they want
thereby overcoming a major objection to joining and retaining membership in associations,
which is “The dues are too high. I cannot afford to be a member”. Fee-based structures
directly countermand the former dues system where fees are based on a company’s size,
turnover, or number of employees. An increasing number of organizations have come to
realize that this system is both archaic and unfair, since it assumes that all members
regardless of size will benefit from all available programs and services. The Afghanistan
International Chamber of Commerce increased its paid membership by more than 30% and
its retention by more than 44% after instituting the “tiered” membership structure that is
included in the appendix.
Non-Dues Income: Non-dues income is considered any revenue that is generated from
sources other than membership dues. In a growing number of organizations, non-dues
income actually constitutes a higher percentage of overall revenue than does dues.
Because competition for revenue is acute, organizations have developed increasingly
creative ways of earning income. Progressive organizations will, however, only embrace
non-dues income sources that fit within their mission and are supported by their investors.
International best practices in non-dues income generation often include the following
activities:
Publications: Publications have long been a source of non-dues revenue. Typically,
revenue is generated through advertising sales, which both pay for the publication’s
printing and distribution as well as generate profit. A number of associations provide
publications free of charge or at a nominal fee to members but sell them to non-members
at a higher price. Generating revenue through publications will be successful only if the
publication is of high quality, contains pertinent information and is widely distributed.
Databases: Information is not only power, it can also be a source of revenue.
Organizations that possess data such as economic statistics, member information, and
47
promotional materials can generate profit by providing them at a fee to individuals and
companies that need this information. Again, some organizations provide this information
free or at a nominal charge to members and at a much higher fee to non-members. To be a
consistent source of non-dues revenue, databases and statistical abstracts must contain
current information and be in a format that can be easily used by customers.
Events: Event sponsorships are another significant source of non-dues revenue.
Companies are likely to sponsor events that provide them visibility and access to potential
customers. These sponsorships can be combined with charging an event entrance fee to
produce significant profit for an organization.
It should be noted that the examples provided above are consistent with the mission
and values of most business associations. Profit-making activities that are counter to an
organization’s mission and/or goals should be examined very carefully before being
implemented, as they can damage its reputation and actually impede future efforts to
generate non-dues revenue. A comprehensive list of “100 Great Funding Ideas for
Business Associations” is contained in the appendix. This list includes actual non-dues
income programs that are successfully being implemented by business associations around
the world.
Step Four: Strategy Implementation
Once the membership development strategy is created, the membership team
should immediately focus on implementation. Depending on the strategy, this may include
a larger focus on membership recruitment, membership retention, or the creation of non-
dues income sources. This will depend on the organization’s priorities based on the input
received from stakeholders.
Regardless of the priorities in which they are addressed, most organizations will
include all three elements in their strategy. This being the case, at least some of the
techniques discussed above will be put into practice. Each element has specific focal areas
that must be addressed by the membership team as they are implemented. For instance, in
membership recruitment, the most significant challenge is overcoming objections from
non-members that do not want to support the organization. Because of this, most
organizations conduct sales training as part of their overall team development plan.
Central to being able to overcome objections is the understanding that “no” does not really
mean “no”. In many cases, it simply means “I am not convinced”. Using this as a
guideline, the following are some ways for the membership team to address some common
objections from non-members:
48
Figure 4.2 Possible Responses to Objections from Non-Members
Objection
Possible Response
"I do not have time to participate"
"I thought the same thing when I was first asked to join. However
I quickly found out that the organization has a number of ways for
me to be involved. Most of them take very little time but produce
outstanding results for the organization as a whole and my business
in specific. If we could find an activity that would fit your time schedule
and
have a positive effect on your business, would you agree to participate"?
"I receive no benefits from
"I can understand your concerns. However, just so I will know, what
kind
the organization".
of benefits do you expect? There is a good chance our organization
provides them but for some reason has not communicated this
effectively".
"I do not agree with the
In all candor, there are some policies that I do not agree with as well.
organization's policies".
However, our policies are developed by gaining input from our
membership
as a whole, so if you are a member, you will have the chance to effect
these
policies. Just so I will know, what are the specific policies with which
you
do not agree? Maybe I can ease your concerns.
"The organization does not do
"It is possible that we have not communicated what we do effectively. If
you
anything"?
have a few moments, could I outline for you just a few of our
organization's
accomplishments over the past year? Then, if you still feel we have not
accomplished anything, I will not take any more of your time".
"My business is too small
I can understand your concern. My business was very small when I
became
to get any benefit".
involved and I had the same concerns. Fortunately, our organization has
a
number of programs such as (list a few) that directly impact small and
medium sized enterprises. Would you agree to go to our next small
business
networking event with me so that you can see first hand how small
companies
can benefit"?
"The membership dues are too high;
"I realize that our membership dues may seem expensive. Believe me, I
felt the
I cannot afford to join".
same way when I was asked to join. However, I soon realized that the
benefits
I receive from the organization are much more than the amount I pay in
dues.
For instance, (share an example). If I can prove to you that the benefits
justify
the expense, will you agree to become a member"?
"I want to think about it"
"No problem. I am not asking you to make a decision today. However,
I hope you will give this serious consideration over the next few days as
I would
49
hate for you to miss the business-to-business mixer we are going to have
on
Friday. It is only for members and will provide you the opportunity to
meet
potential customers. If I picked you up and introduced you to some of
our
other members, would you join me for this event"?
"I am a professional person. The
"You may not know that our organization has a number of professionals
that are
organization is for businessmen".
members. We have doctors, lawyers, real estate agents, teachers and
many
more. In fact, in your profession alone we have more than (number) of
members.
Would it be all right if I had (name of member from target profession)
contact you
and let you know how our organization has made a positive impact on
his/her
business"?
"I am not interested"
No problem. Not everyone is and that is okay. I would like you to
know, however,
that our organization has broad-based support throughout the (country,
community,
profession). It would be helpful for you to let me know why you are not
interested so
that I can report back to our leadership. Why are you not interested in
becoming a
member"?
"Please send me some information"
"As a matter of fact, I have an information packet with me right now. If
you have ten
minutes or so, I can briefly explain what is inside. We have a business-
to-business
mixer coming up in a few days and it would be great if you could attend.
It is for
members only and will provide you a way to meet dozens of potential
customers.
One of the publications in this informational packet is our four-color
membership
directory. Member companies can choose under which categories they
are listed.
How would you like your company listed"?
"I will join if you will guarantee that
"Unfortunately, no organization can guarantee that you will get more
customers.
I will get more customers".
However, we can guarantee that you will get ACCESS to more
customers and that
we can provide the TOOLS you need to increase your business. For
instance, we
offer workshops on customer service, marketing, sales/promotion, and
communications, as well as monthly business-to-business networking
events where
you can build relationships with potential customers. How do these
services sound
to you"?
50
The time frame for implementing the membership strategy will, of course, depend
on its focus. For instance, the timeline for an ongoing membership strategy will be infinite
but will include benchmarks to be achieved at various intervals. A campaign-oriented
strategy may have a finite start and end date. In addition, the implementation timeline for
a retention-oriented strategy may be longer than that of a recruitment-oriented one. For
longer-term strategies, it is important that the entire organization is focused on
implementation in order to provide oversight and follow through.
Step Five: Evaluation
Depending on the type of membership strategy (e.g. campaign-oriented versus
ongoing) evaluation may occur after a specific event or at the end of a specific time period.
In the case of an ongoing strategy, evaluation should occur at least quarterly so that course
corrections can be made if unforeseen opportunities or challenges arise.
Evaluation should focus on actual outcomes versus the goals articulated within the
strategic plan. Once all data has been analyzed, the membership team should prepare a
report for distribution to the board of directors and membership as a whole. Some
organizations release the results in a public forum, as well as in press release form. The
following is the executive summary of the membership campaign evaluation report
submitted by the Greater Colorado Springs, Colorado (USA) Chamber of Commerce after
its membership recruitment effort in 1998:
51
Figure 4.3 Evaluation of Membership Effort
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
“PARTY AT THE PEAK” MEMBERSHIP CAMPAIGN
EVALUATION REPORT
Result: The membership campaign achieved both its monetary and numerical goals,
raising $124,418 in new member revenue. Sixty volunteers representing ten local
companies participated in the campaign.
Budget: The attached budget reflects the income and expenditures for the campaign. In
total, the Chamber received net income of $119,162.
Recommendations: The following are recommendations from the Membership
Recruitment Team that should be considered for next year’s campaign:
1. Prospect List: Prepare a more extensive prospect list and ensure the accuracy of the
contact information.
2. Training: Utilize the same training materials but conduct the training for volunteers
earlier. This should be completed at least two weeks prior to the campaign.
3. Recognition: Provide more recognition to the corporate sponsors for the launch and
celebration events. Present plaques and acknowledge their contributions.
4. Materials: Re-design recruitment materials and membership application. Utilize a “less
is more” approach, meaning that materials should be professional but concise.
5. Dues Schedule: Revise the membership dues schedule to provide for payments of fees-
for-services versus the current focus on number of employees. Each dues category should
be assessed and modified if necessary to create a fair baseline for membership.
6. Database: The Chamber’s membership staff should input the entire prospect list into its
database so it does not have to be recreated next year. Interns should be hired to update
the information and add new prospects.
7. Promotion: The Vice President of Membership Development should coordinate the
media and publicity on the campaign instead of the Vice President of Public Relations.
This report outlines a successful membership campaign, but also provides specific
recommendations for improvement. Two years later, the Colorado Springs Chamber of
Commerce totally revised its membership strategy, moving away from a campaign-
oriented effort to instead focus on ongoing membership development.
52
Step Six: Revision
As in the case of the Greater Colorado Springs Chamber of Commerce, there are
times when a strategy must be revised in order to meet changing paradigms within the
community, industry or organization. For this reason, evaluation is imperative at least
quarterly in order to provide the ability to respond to changing circumstances. Even the
best membership strategies become stale over time, as new ideas and techniques become
prevalent. It is therefore dangerous for an organization to assume that a strategy that has
worked well for the last ten years will produce the same results over the next ten unless
modifications are made along the way.
Creating Customers for Life
In their book entitled, “1:1 Marketing”, Dr. Martha Rogers and Don Pepper outline
ways that companies and organizations can create “customers for life”. This phrase is
defined as members that are so empowered and have such a vested interest in an
organization’s success that they will never leave. The Empowerment Pyramid discussed
in chapter one outlines the process of creating empowered, loyal members. This process
starts immediately after they pay their membership dues for the first time. Constant follow
up is necessary in order to prove to a new member that his/her investment was a sound
one. As stated earlier, involvement is the key. As noted on the pyramid, members must
make the transition from “uninformed” to “involved” in order for them to be committed
and ultimately empowered. This transformation requires everyone in the
organization…from the chief paid executive to the receptionist….to focus on membership
development.
53
CHAPTER FIVE
THE ROLE OF BUSINESS ORGANIZATIONS IN PUBLIC POLICY ADVOCACY
SECTION ONE: OVERVIEW OF ORGANIZATIONAL ADVOCACY
Global experience highlights that economic reform is only truly effective when
business associations make their voice known through advocacy. Business groups
represent an important segment of society -- one that stimulates economic growth through
the creation of goods and services and the jobs that accompany them. Hence, their voice
needs to be heard in the policymaking process. Many think of business associations as
providers of education and entrepreneurial training. These efforts will be in vain if the
overall business environment is not conducive to entrepreneurship. Effective business
associations combine educational goals with an advocacy program for policy reform in
areas that affect their members. In today’s world of global competition where business
men and women are looking for associations that will help their bottom line, no
association can afford to overlook advocacy. In fact, in the long run, advocacy is the key to
an association’s success and survival.
What is Advocacy?
In simple terms, advocacy is the act of transparently influencing or supporting a
person or ideal. Public policy advocacy refers to the influencing of laws and/or
regulations. In the case of business associations, this usually means those policies that
affect their members.
In other words, public policy advocacy involves speaking out in favor of and
garnering support for particular positions concerning political platforms, laws, regulations
and other public actions. The position might be to approve, repeal, reject or amend a
policy. Advocacy, especially public policy advocacy, can be challenging because it may
involve opposing a government’s stand on specific issues. Because of this, even the most
effective public policy advocacy organizations are not always successful. As a matter of
fact, advocacy professionals agree that success in this arena involves risk, patience and
“the willingness to lose…a lot…and keep on trying”. One advocacy professional put it
this way, “Losing is a bi-product of advocacy, but organizations that learn from their
losses will gain an ever increasing number of policy wins”.
Because many public policies directly affect business activity, the private sector
needs to make its voice heard so that it can improve certain public policies. In many cases,
these include tax policies, laws/regulations governing transportation, and tax issues to
name a few.
Because the development of a business-friendly legal framework is crucial to
private sector growth, many businesspersons, through their business associations, regularly
make their positions on specific issues known by engaging in public policy advocacy at all
levels of government. For business associations, this entails educating their members about
54
government policies and gathering their often disparate views into one voice that
articulates the costs and benefits of particular policies. Organizing in this way increases the
likelihood that the government will adopt specific reform measures. Overall, these efforts
focus on the establishment and maintenance of a favorable business environment. The type
of advocacy in which an association can be involved depends on whether the organization
is defined under public law and has mandatory membership requirements, or whether it is
a completely voluntary association.
What Public Policy Advocacy is Not
It is important not only to understand what public policy advocacy is, but also
realize what it is not. From the perspective of business associations, public policy
advocacy is geared towards creating a hospitable business climate for all its members. It is
not designed to:
Obtain preferential treatment for one business or sector
Solve problems concerning members’ day-to-day business activities. (If, however,
daily obstacles are indicative of a larger problem plaguing the business community
at large, then public policy advocacy is warranted. In such cases, special attention
needs to be given to attack the real cause as opposed to the symptom.)
Provide members with daily problem-solving services related to conducting routine
business transactions or settling disputes between members and the government.
To resolve such matters, members should obtain the services of lawyers,
consultants and so forth.
Business associations with mandatory membership, that are government-funded, may
have restrictions on their scope of activities or may jeopardize their funding if they engage
in certain types of advocacy. Most still conduct some aspects of public policy advocacy.
This guidebook is designed to assist business associations in fully participating in the
public policy advocacy process regardless of their structure.
Why is Public Policy Advocacy by Business Associations Important?
To make the voice of business heard
Effective advocacy makes crucial, policy-relevant information widely available to
several key audiences that influence public policy. These audiences include:
The media who benefit greatly from business association and think tank
commentary and criticism. Journalists gather a great deal of their information from
official government sources, but they are better able to analyze this information
once they have listened to the alternative voice of business associations and think
tanks.
Lawmakers who need sound information because they make policy decisions that
affect their citizens’ lives. These citizens, in many cases, will decide on whether or
not to re-elect the same legislators. Sound policies foster a favorable business
55
environment, advance market-oriented reforms and benefit society as a whole. A
hospitable business climate attracts investment and stimulates entrepreneurship
which, in turn, generates economic growth and well-paid quality jobs. All citizens
can take advantage of these new opportunities.
Regulators, bureaucrats and administrators who, when provided with solid
information about the underlying objectives of specific policies and regulations, are
able to do a better job implementing and enforcing them.
The general public including business association members who influence
policymaking decisions. Having access to key information about policies under
consideration educates business association members and the public on policies
that affect them and helps them know what elected officials are doing -- or failing
to do -- on its behalf. Citizens and business associations can then hold these
representatives accountable.
To strengthen business associations
Advocacy is also vital to a business associations survival and growth. Business
associations aim to serve members. To this end, they offer many services such as business
education and training. Yet these efforts may be in vain if laws and regulations make it
very difficult to be a successful entrepreneur. In these circumstances, advocacy is needed
in order to eliminate these barriers so that association members’ businesses can survive
and prosper.
Business associations that advocate effectively are known to:
Articulate members’ concerns as a unified voice thereby quickly attracting
policymakers’ attention
Meet regularly with decision-makers to discuss key policy issues and to provide
well researched publications
Establish regular channels of communication and close working relationships
with government officials: Set up regular times to meet with government
officials.
Use these channels to promote members’ interests by influencing the pace and
direction of specific laws and policy proposals. Moreover, through these activities,
policymakers may begin to consider business associations as key participants in the
policymaking process and as providers of sound policy-relevant information. In
some countries policymakers automatically turned to business associations for
policy advice.
Engage in both pro-active and reactive advocacy to their members’ benefit. By
communicating regularly with policymakers, business association representatives
can help to set the policy agenda by voicing concerns and proposing specific
policies they endorse as opposed to only reacting to others’ proposals. Moreover,
frequent contact also helps business associations to keep
abreast of imminent and current policy proposals so that they can thoroughly
examine the issue and prepare a sound policy response
56
Help prevent frequent changes to the business-related legal and regulatory
framework that frighten investors and hinder entrepreneurship.
Monitor the administration of policies to ensure that enacted provisions of
interest to their members are administered fairly, consistently and swiftly thereby
strengthening the rule of law.
By actively engaging in advocacy, a business association becomes a serious actor
in the policymaking arena and strengthens itself. Successful advocacy raises an
organization’s profile amid policymakers and enhances its reputation within the business
community as a useful membership service provider. This increases contributions from
existing members and attracts new members. With more funding, business associations
can devote more resources to advocacy and thereby enhance advocacy strategies and
tactics. A larger membership means more voting constituents and thus more clout amid
elected policymakers. In short, advocacy equips business association members with the
necessary information, motivation and tools with which to protect and improve the private
sector.
SECTION TWO: PUBLIC POLICY ADVOCACY COALITIONS
At the outset of any discussion of advocacy coalitions, there must be an
understanding of the importance of these organizations to the development of effective
public policy. Among the multitude of reasons why advocacy coalitions must be part of a
process-oriented approach to policy development, four emerge as the most significant.
First and foremost, public policy advocacy coalitions raise the level of debate on
issues that affect private sector development. Because coalitions of business associations
bring significant resources to bear on important issues, the profile of these issues typically
rises. While the concerns of one association may be a low priority for the media and
public officials, those of a coalition of business associations may increase the importance
of issues because of the unified approach. This phenomenon, commonly called the “one
voice” principle, reinforces a common sense approach to advocacy, which is that the
media and public officials respond better to issues that are made significant through
promotion and discussion. According to Edward Priola, and expert in field of public
policy advocacy, “an issue has to become visible”. Because of the constant barrage of
messages through the media, along with the sophistication of direct advocacy efforts by
individuals and organizations, there is no shortage of issues for consideration by public
officials. By using the “one voice” principle, advocacy coalitions can increase the priority
of their issues and ensure full debate and consideration of their proposals.
Secondly, advocacy coalitions provide opportunities to build relationships between
organizations, public officials, and the media. The importance of relationships to success
in advocacy cannot be understated, and its synergetic relationship to the overall goal of
legislative efforts is outlined in the following formula:
57
Figure 5.1 The Advocacy Formula
Relationships + Information= Access
Access + Process= Results
Results + Follow Up + Promotion= Credibility
Credibility x Time= Power
If the end result of coalition advocacy efforts is power, the beginning of these
efforts must be the ability to develop relationships that create unity and access. Unity is
essential within the framework of the coalition itself, but the trust relationship built
between coalition members, the media and public officials is integral in ensuring success.
Because coalitions involve a number of different individuals that represent various
organizations, the pool of potential contacts within the media and government is widened.
Members of the coalition can thus take responsibility for building relationships in a
strategic and process-oriented manner rather than working in the microscopic realm in
which most singular associations operate.
A third aspect in the importance of advocacy coalitions is the unified voice that is
developed through the collaboration of organizations and private sector institutions. The
“one voice” principle aside, coalitions afford the opportunity for organizations to expand
their vision and expertise through cooperation with similar associations. Some coalitions
manage to achieve a unified approach to a group of issues, which are typically published in
the form of a legislative agenda, but in other cases associations may agree on only one
issue. An example of this is the creation of a coalition between business and labor in
Oklahoma in the early 1990’s. The Oklahoma State Chamber of Commerce and a variety
of local labor organizations cooperated to address the state’s abysmal workers
compensation system. The initial meeting between the unlikely coalition partners laid the
foundation for the entire effort by acknowledging that the groups would agree on nothing
else except on a strategy for the workers compensation issue. A strategy was developed
and success achieved, after which the organizations went back to their own “corners” and
focused on separate issues. The unified voice created through this coalition not only had a
favorable impact on the issue, but also developed a level of trust between individuals and
organizations that had not been present in the past. Each of the participating organizations
learned from the process, and the expertise gained through the exercise created additional
collaborative opportunities in the future.
A final measure of the importance of advocacy coalitions is the ability of these
entities to amass grassroots support behind an issue or group of issues. It is reasonable
that the media and public officials would respond better to recommendations promulgated
by a group of organizations representing thousands of members than to a singular
organization representing hundreds. If an effective grassroots effort is initiated, the
combined membership of the coalition organizations can be used to raise the level of
debate on an issue or issues. As the advocacy formula indicates, power is the holy grail of
advocacy. Organizations that achieve power will enjoy great success in public policy
development. An effective grassroots program, using the combined membership resources
of coalition members, can create power, or at least the illusion of power.
58
Types of Coalitions
The type of advocacy coalition depends on the issues to be addressed, the number
of organizations interested in the issues, and the mission of the participating organizations.
The following are the most common types of coalitions:
Sector-Specific: These coalitions consist of organizations that support a specific industry
or sector. They may include employers associations, non-governmental organizations
(NGOs), and even employee or labor organizations. Multi-sector organizations, such as
Chambers of Commerce, may also be involved in these coalitions if they have members
within the particular sector. Sector-specific coalitions typically deal with fewer issues
than other coalitions, but thoroughly cover each issue and make recommendations based
on the combined experience of industry professionals.
Multi-Sector: These coalitions are comprised of a variety of business associations that
come together in support of an overall business environment. It is typically this type of
coalition that produces a National Business Agenda, and other macro-strategies to promote
business development. A multi-sector coalition may consider a large number of issues on
a variety of topics, which makes prioritization a key element of success. These coalitions
are sometimes anchored by a Chamber or other associations but may include organizations
from a variety of industries.
Structure of Coalitions
One of the most important decisions that must be made by business associations
that wish to form a coalition is the structure the coalition will take. Advocacy coalitions
typically have one of the following structures:
Figure 5.2 Types of Advocacy Coalitions
Formal: The coalition is a structured body with elected leadership and specific rules as to
its operation and procedures.
Informal: The coalition has a flexible structure where leadership is shared and/or
assigned depending on the issue and where the operating rules and procedures
are structured according to a specific advocacy scenario.
Federation: The coalition’s formal structure is codified into a legal federation that
continues into perpetuity.
Each advocacy coalition structure has strengths and weaknesses that must be
addressed from the outset. Participating organizations should reach agreement on the
structure early in the process in order to alleviate debates in the future. The following
table outlines the strengths and weaknesses of each organizational structure:
59
Figure 5.3 Analysis of Advocacy Coalition Structures
Process-Oriented Advocacy
The Public Policy Advocacy System
As stated earlier, the strength of coalitions is directly proportional to their
integration into a systems based model. Using the expertise of direct advocacy
professionals, as well as research conducted by experts in the field, the following thirteen-
step coalition advocacy process was developed to build organizational capacity to
influence public policy:
Structure Strengths Weaknesses
Formal a) Structured approach a) Relatively inflexible approach to issues
b) Team roles defined in b) Potential for the development of
advance hierarchy and bureaucracy
c) Leadership identified c) Potential for conflict over leadership
in advance
d) Specific rules and d) Potential for one or a small group of
procedural guidelines organizations to take control of the
process
Informal a) Flexible approach to a) Lack of structure may lead to confusion
issues and emerging over roles and responsibilities
situations
b) Team roles based on b) Communications lapses could result in
issues and expertise mixed messages or conflict within the
coalition
c) Leadership shared
depending on issues access
and other factors
Federation a) Codified structure ensures a) Organizations give up some autonomy
longevity of the coalition
b) Leadership is elected and b) Larger organizations may have more
provides consistency in influence
terms of vision and mission
c) Funding is an issue as the federation
may have staff and overhead costs
60
Table 5.4 The Public Policy Advocacy System
Step One: Creation of the Advocacy Coalition Team: The team should consist of
at least one representative of each of the participating organizations. The representative
should be a senior member of the staff or board of directors who can make decisions on
behalf of the organization. He or she should bring specific expertise to the coalition in
terms of legislative experience, contacts, access to public officials, media expertise, or the
knowledge of issues. Once developed, the coalition should make decisions based on
majority vote, with the agreement that once a decision is made all the participating
organizations will publicly support it.
Step Two: Training of the Advocacy Coalition Team: Even when the coalition
consists of senior organizational representatives, training should be conducted in order to
ensure a complete understanding of the systems-based process and the issues that will be
discussed. Outside resources should be harnessed to ensure that the training is conducted
in a complete and unbiased manner. A training manual should be provided to each team
member in order to initiate continuity.
Step Three: Identification of Issues: Issue identification is one of the earliest and
most important tasks of the coalition team. Identification can be conducted in a variety of
ways, but it must include input from a variety of stakeholders including members of each
of the organizations, technical experts, and data. Once input is gathered and analyzed, the
coalition team has the ability to make informed decisions on the pallet of issues to be
considered. Armed with the data necessary to ensure adequate issue identification, many
coalitions use the simple strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT)
analysis to facilitate the activity. Another popular approach is the “nomination” of issues
by each member of the coalition team, and the discussion and prioritization of each issue.
Issue identification is less complicated in a sector-specific coalition because of a higher
definition of the policy needed to support the industry. Multi-sector coalitions create a
bigger challenge in issue identification, as the field of issues is broader and less focused.
1. Creation of advocacy coalition team
2. Training of advocacy coalition team and
representatives
3. Identification of issues
4. Prioritization of issues
5. Development of policy recommendations
6. Creation of timeline
7. Compilation of legislative agenda
8. Public launch of legislative agenda
9. Development of issue papers
10. Coordination of grassroots support
11. Creation of a National Business Agenda
12. Direct advocacy
13. Evaluation of advocacy effort
61
Step Four: Prioritization of Issues: After identifying the salient issues to be
included in the coalition’s agenda, the team must prioritize them in order to develop an
effective advocacy approach. Prioritization is most easily achieved by having each
member of the team rank the issues from most to least important then to develop a priority
structure based on how many votes the issue receives. During prioritization, the team
should consider the importance of the issue, the timing, and the political reality of
addressing it. Some coalitions assign the highest priority to the most important issues
without considering how long it will take to achieve success or the political realities that
are in play. This can be both frustrating and confusing for the team, and can retard the
development of the coalition.
Step Five: Development of Policy Recommendations: Once issues are identified
and prioritized, the coalition team must develop recommendations for each. In order to do
this, team members must have a thorough knowledge of the issue as well as access to
information on the opinions of key stakeholders. Recommendations should incorporate
specific and practical ideas that support the coalition’s point of view. The
recommendations should be technically sound, but also compliant with available resources
and political realities.
Step Six: Development of a Timeline: Based on the approved recommendations,
the available resources and the current political climate, the team should develop a
timeline to address each issue. The timeline should coincide with the legislative session
(Parliamentary schedule, committee meeting or hearing docket, etc.) and should clearly
define the length of time it will take to address the issue. Some coalition teams structure
develop a strategy to ensure some quick victories, even if these come on lower priority
issues, in order to build credibility to address the higher priority, longer term initiatives.
Step Seven: Compilation of the Legislative Agenda: A legislative agenda is
simply a collection of the coalition’s policy statements. It should include all the
coalition’s approved issues and the recommendations on each. These are referred to as
policy statements because they inform the public official as to the coalition’s opinion on
the issue as well as its recommendations. Information in the legislative agenda may
include the following:
Cover Letter: A letter either on coalition stationary signed by the elected
leader (in the case of a formal coalition) or a series of support letters from
the participating organizations (in the case of an informal association).
Issue Statements: Usually one per page. The statements should include a
brief overview of the issue, the supporting view (coalition’s opinion), the
opposing view, and the policy recommendation.
Organizational Overviews: These overviews provide the media and public
officials with information on the size, structure and influence of the
coalition members.
62
The legislative agenda should be produced both in printed and electronic forms,
and should be designed in an aesthetically appealing manner. The expense of producing
the publication is less important than how professional it looks and the quality of
information it contains. Coalitions typically choose to distribute the agendas at a media
launch event, as well as through personal visits to public officials.
Step Eight: Public Launch of Legislative Agenda: The legislative agenda will not
achieve the desired results unless it is promoted strategically and publicly. Many
coalitions choose to distribute the agenda to public officials in person and follow this
action with a public event for the media and other stakeholders. This strategy works well
when the coalition has a cadre of public officials that will talk to the press. If this is not
the case, the process may be inverted, with the launch event being held first.
The launch event should include members of the coalition, member companies
from each of the participating organizations, public officials, and the media. Typically, a
coalition spokesperson(s) will provide a brief presentation on the group’s history and
structure before focusing on the agenda itself. Experience indicates that the launch event
should be more of a networking event than a conference format. With this in mind, it may
include an opening or closing reception. Copies of the legislative agenda should be
available for each person in attendance. Media representatives should also receive press
kits that include a press release and coalition overview.
Step Nine: Development of Issue Papers: An issue paper should reinforce each
item in the legislative agenda. An issue paper is simply a document that reinforces the
coalition’s recommendation on how to address an issue. It may include data, technical
information, and research reports. In some cases, the issue paper may include an actual
draft of a proposed law. Each issue paper will be different depending on the technical
aspects of the issue addressed. Coalition team members should be assigned the task of
writing, or overseeing the drafting, of issue papers.
Step Ten: Coordination of Grassroots Support: Once the legislative agenda and
issue papers are prepared, the coalition should coordinate its grassroots network in support
of its policy positions. A grassroots network is quite simply a database containing the
names and contact information of individuals that support the coalition’s efforts on one or
more issues. A strategy should be developed that provides a mechanism to inform the
grassroots network of action that is required on each issue. The identified action should be
specific and timely. Usually, this includes making a telephone call, sending a fax or e-
mail, or attending an event. It is important that the information supplied to the members of
the grassroots network be concise, complete, and correct. Complete contact information
for any targeted officials should be provided. A member or members of the coalition team
should be assigned to initiate and follow up on contacts generated by the grassroots
network.
Step Eleven: Creation of a National Business Agenda: One input has been
obtained from members and other stakeholders, a National Business Agenda should be
created to provide background information and recommendations on important issues.
63
The National Business Agenda should serve as the business association’s strategy for its
public policy advocacy effort and should be distributed widely to government, the private
sectors and other stakeholders.
Step Twelve: Direct Advocacy: Direct advocacy (formerly referred to as
lobbying) is probably the most recognized step in the systems-based processed, but it is
also the most misunderstood. Many coalitions and individual organizations mistakenly
believe that direct advocacy is a process when it is actually a component of a process.
Direct advocacy, of course, is the direct contact made by a coalition representative or
representatives with an elected official or bureaucrat. This essential advocacy function can
be conducted either by volunteers or by paid professionals (legislative consultants).
Step Thirteen: Evaluation of Advocacy Efforts: At the end of the legislative
session or the timeline of issues covered in the legislative agenda, the coalition should
evaluate its effort based on the number of its recommendations that were adopted. Also,
the members of the coalition should take into account the increased visibility it received
and whether or not it improved its image as an advocacy organization. An overall
evaluation should be conducted, as well as one on an issue-by-issue basis. The two critical
elements that should be evaluated are “wins” on the issues as well as in credibility. The
goal of the coalition should be not only to win on the issue (meaning its position is
supported by the government) but also to increase its credibility.
Figure 5.5 Advocacy Outcome Scenarios
Advocacy coalitions are essential elements in the successful creation and
implementation of a National Business Agenda. The institutionalization of the advocacy
Issue Credibility Result Coalition/
Association
Effectiveness
Win Win Best possible scenario Increases
in that the coalition
not only is successful
in convincing the
government of its
position, but also does
this in such a way
that it gains
credibility for the
future.
Win Lose In this scenario, the Decreases
coalition wins on the
issue, but loses
credibility due to a
faulty process, non-
transparent behavior,
or win-at-all costs
mentality.
Lose Win This scenario can be Increases
very advantageous for
a coalition in that even
64
process and the creation of sector-specific coalitions will ensure that the business
community’s voice is heard on policy issues.
Case Studies
In the context of transitional economies, four case studies provide excellent
examples of the advocacy coalition process in action. These examples outline diverse
approaches and issues, but reinforce the importance of the systems-based process.
The Open Doors Campaign
Romania
http://www.opendoorscampaign.org
Contact: Radu Nicosevici (Advocacy Academy Association)
The Open Doors Campaign was launched in 2001 by a consortium of business
associations in the tourism, information technology, and manufacturing sectors, along with
non-governmental organizations and other private sector organizations. The campaign’s
goals were threefold. First, the business associations wanted to convince the Government
of Romania to establish transparent processes for citizen participation in the advocacy
process. Realizing the importance of this participation to economic growth, the
associations hoped to increase the understanding of the governmental process in order to
create a partnership between the public and private sectors. Secondly, the associations
wanted to mobilize the business community behind a series of private sector reforms.
These reforms ranged from changes in the fiscal code to the creation of incentives that
would increase foreign direct investment. The Open Doors Campaign’s third goal was to
develop grassroots support for private sector initiatives. This support was needed in order
to establish the private sector as a key dialogue partner with government. As all of these
goals centered on the development of sustainable dialogue with government officials, it
was designed to “open doors” within the government, which would create access for both
citizens and public officials to communicate their desires in an open and transparent way.
The Open Doors Campaign consisted of three business association coalitions, each
of which developed its own legislative agenda. The Tourism for Today and Tomorrow (T-
3) Coalition was launched in early 2001 and was comprised of eighteen tourism
associations. The Tech 21 Coalition was comprised of the eight national information
technology and communications associations. It was officially launched in spring of 2001.
In early 2002, thirteen business associations created the Pro Globe Coalition in the
manufacturing sector. With guidance from international experts, the coalitions used the
systems-based advocacy process to gain input from stakeholders, to identify important
issues, to develop a legislative agenda, and to initiate grassroots support for their policy
positions. In order to promote their activities, each of the associations held a launch event
that was attended by the press, business owners, international organizations and public
officials. In addition, the coalitions designed a National Advocacy Tour, which took the
Open Doors Campaign message to ten major cities in Romania. Because of this tour, the
Open Doors Campaign gained massive media attention, and the coalitions added hundreds
of grassroots supporters to their databases.
65
After developing their legislative agendas, the coalitions created policy position
papers on each issue and began to promote these initiatives to applicable government
officials. In April 2002, the coalitions hosted Advocacy Days, which was the first
grassroots advocacy event held in Romania. During this event, hundreds of business
association members converged on the offices of elected officials to support the coalitions’
initiatives. The event further raised the Open Doors Campaign’s profile.
In early 2003, the Open Doors Campaign moved to its next stage of development
with the creation of the Advocacy Academy Association. Six business associations in the
Banat Region of western Romania formed the Academy with support from the United
States Agency for International Development (USAID). The Academy’s purpose was the
following:
Train advocacy professionals to support the advocacy efforts of business
associations.
Conduct voter demographic studies and other research to compile information on
voter attitudes and trends.
Plan and conduct public events aimed at providing a form for constructive dialogue
between the public and private sectors.
The Advocacy Academy Association’s success was both swift and dramatic. Only
three months after its formation, it conducted the first public hearing in the recent history
of Romania. The hearing provided private sector input into the proposed law to govern
direct advocacy activities. Forty-three private sector representatives testified at the
hearing, which was attended by high-level politicians including the President of the
Romanian Senate, Members of Parliament, and even the Crown Prince of Romania, His
Excellency Radu Horhensolen. The Academy held four other public hearings in 2003, all
of which had a significant impact on public policy. In addition, it graduated its first class
of twelve advocacy professionals who worked with nearly a dozen business associations to
initiate advocacy campaigns.
Because of the relationships built through initiation of the Open Doors Campaign,
23 pro-business initiatives were passed, the advocacy system became the foundation for
private sector dialogue with government, and the business associations gained credibility
and increased membership. Many government officials, including former Minister of
Small and Medium Sized Enterprises Silvia Ciornei, called the Open Doors Campaign
“one of the best programs for initiating dialogue and achieving results”. The Open Doors
Campaign continues to be at the forefront of public policy in Romania, and with the
support of the Advocacy Academy Association, it will remain relevant for years to come.
The Bulldozer Initiative
Bosnia-Herzegovina
http://www.obr.int/obr-dept/econ/bulldozer-initiative/index.asp
Contact: Benjamin Herzberg
66
With the support of the United Nations High Representative, Business associations
in Bosnia-Herzegovina participated in the Bulldozer Initiative to break down
administrative and bureaucratic barriers that plagued private sector development. Because
of its history of conflict, Bosnia-Herzegovina represented a formidable challenge to the
growth of private sector institutions. With over 40% of its economy in the gray sector, the
country badly needed to embrace reforms.
The Bulldozer Initiatives goals were first to break down barriers to development
and secondly to create private sector support. The organizers of the initiative consulted
with hundreds of businesses to identify barriers to growth. “Roadblock Submission
Forms” were provided to businesses throughout the country, and dozens were returned to
the organizing committee. The campaign’s goals were achieved through the initiation of a
strategic and focused advocacy initiative. With support from a number of international
NGOs and donor organizations, the Bulldozer Initiative succeeded in passing nearly 50
reform measures, while at the same time breaking down ethnic divisions. While the
Open Doors Campaign initiative in Romania was a grassroots or “bottom up” effort, the
Bulldozer Initiative worked at both the governmental and grassroots levels.
Advocacy Partnership Program
Tanzania
http://www.tccia.com
Because of Tanzania’s socialistic history, public policy advocacy was an unknown
commodity. Business associations felt powerless to affect change, and bureaucracy, non-
transparency and corruption continually arrested the development of the private sector. In
2002, USAID sought to facilitate the development of advocacy coalitions in several of
Tanzania’s regions.
Through this initiative, regions such as Mbeya, Morogoro, Ruvuma, Rukwa,
Tonga, and Iringa were able to harness grassroots support for local and regional legislative
initiatives. Business association-led advocacy coalitions were created in each region, and
the systems-based advocacy process was used to build the foundation for the development
of policy statements. The goal of the coalitions was to raise the level of debate on policy
issues, as well as to establish a “voice” for the business communities within the region.
The strategy in this initiative was to build the capacity of the participating
organizations to serve as advocates for the business community. With assistance from
international experts, the business associations created dialogue forums is six regions and
thirty-three districts. One region even took the advocacy process to the ward level, in
order to affect local public policy. Public policy advocacy coalitions in all thirty-three
districts developed advocacy agendas that were promoted through well-organized
campaigns. Through these campaigns, and the dialogue events that supported them, the
coalitions gained both visibility and credibility. The coalitions continue to work in pursuit
67
of these goals, but already they have earned the respect of local and regional governmental
officials, who see them as resources and not adversaries.
Montenegro Business Alliance
Montenegro
http://www.visit-mba.org
Contact: Ralph Marlatt
Petar Ivanovic
In order to build Montenegro’s private sector, the Center for Entrepreneurship and
Enterprise Development (CEED) provided technical assistance to business associations in
the creation of the Montenegro Business Alliance (MBA). The purpose of the alliance is
to identify and overcome barriers to private sector growth by adopting a strategic approach
to advocacy. In order to gain input from businesses relative to the issues facing private
sector development, the MBA distributed hundreds of surveys, the results of which were
compiled and used to create a National Business Agenda. In addition, the MBA held a
series of round table discussions between business and governmental leaders, which
initiated open and honest dialogue. In 2001 and 2002, the MBA focused on two primary
pieces of legislation, the Enterprise Law and the Accounting Law. As a direct result of the
MBA’s participation, an Enterprise Law was passed that simplified the business
registration process. A company can now be registered in four days for just 1 Euro. The
Accounting Law initiated international accounting standards throughout Montenegro and
created a public/private institute to develop regulations, provide training for auditors, and
deal with daily accounting issues. The MBA was the only private sector organization
named to the Institute’s board of directors.
In 2003, the MBA’s success continued as it forged alliances between fierce
competitors to address a variety of tax and regulatory issues. In addition, it hosted six
business-to-business forums that attracted over 1,000 participants from Slovenia, Croatia,
Bosnia-Herzegovina, Serbia, Macedonia, Kosovo and Albania. As a result of these
forums, over 4 million Euros in contracts were initiated.
Summary and Conclusions
Public policy advocacy coalitions will continue to be important components of a
process-oriented strategy. Their proliferation in transitional economies will increase as
will their effectiveness in influencing legislation. The key issue for coalitions will not be
whether they continue to exist, but rather how quickly they will adopt cutting-edge
techniques to increase their effectiveness. Many coalitions continue to underutilize their
grassroots network, while focusing mainly on direct advocacy by influential members.
Along the same lines, there is still no clear delineation between influence peddling and
advocacy. Influence peddling is a non-transparent practice that provides advantages to
officials based not on merit but on relationships. It sometimes involves the payment of
bribes or the use of family alliances to initiate action. Influence is maintained as long as
68
the government officials or bureaucrats that benefit from this arrangement are in power.
Advocacy, on the other hand, is a necessary and transparent process by which
organizations and individuals express their points of view in an effort to affect change.
Influence peddling is an affront to democracy, while advocacy reinforces it.
When assessing the impact of coalitions on the advocacy process, it is evident that
there is strength in numbers. Coalitions provide a way for associations to pool resources
and experience to strengthen the business environment. As part of an overall advocacy
process, public policy coalitions are both useful and effective.
SECTION THREE: DEVELOPING A BUSINESS AGENDA
What is a Business Agenda?
As stated in Chapter One, a business agenda is a publication that highlights issues
that are important to an organization’s membership and provides recommendations as to
how to address them. Development of a business agenda is a crucial step in the
establishment of a successful public policy advocacy effort. Even though important, it is
challenging for many organizations as it involves the establishment of a specific process
through which an association(s) can identify, prioritize, and develop policy positions on
issues related to business. This requires the gathering of input from key stakeholders
including members, collaborating organizations, international organizations, and research
organizations.
A business agenda provides a way for an organization or advocacy coalition to
encapsulate its recommendations into one document that is easily distributed to key
stakeholders such as government officials, representatives of international organizations,
and members of the press. The agenda frames issues in an easy-to-follow format that
makes it easy to focus on individual issues within the document. In many cases,
organizations or advocacy coalitions augment the business agenda with policy papers that
provide specific data to support its recommendations.
The development process for a business agenda is encapsulated in steps 3 through
8 of the systems-based advocacy model that is discussed in Chapter One. In order to
implement these steps, an organization must be committed to the implementation of the
following approach, which consists of five developmental phases:
69
Figure 5.6 Phases in the Development of a Business Agenda
Phase 1: Gathering Input
Phase 2: Compiling and Analyzing Data
Phase 3: Conducting Independent Research
Phase 4: Developing Specific Policy Positions
Phase 5: Developing a Utilization Plan for the Agenda
Phases in the Development of a Business Agenda
Gathering Input
As in the development of an overall organizational strategy, the creation of a
business agenda requires input from stakeholders. A variety of techniques may be used to
solicit this input, but the most common are focus groups (usually consisting of members,
international stakeholders, and public officials), surveys, and public meetings. The
following is an explanation of each technique:
Focus Groups
Purpose: The purpose of focus groups is to gain information from members,
representatives from coalition partner organizations, international stakeholders and
government officials that can be used to identify key policy issues. Focus groups are
widely considered to be an excellent source of information because they provide instant
input within a structured setting.
Design of Focus Groups: Focus groups typically contain 8-12 participants and are
professionally facilitated in order to achieve maximum results. In the case of gaining input
for a business agenda, it is best to empanel a number of mixed groups of members
(including representatives from coalition partners if applicable), international stakeholders
and public officials. Groups should include both men and women of various ages and
backgrounds. It is important to have an adequate demographic representation in the group.
The facilitator should be an experienced but neutral party that has no ties to the
organization. An association staff member may facilitate the focus group session or an
outside facilitator may be used. To form the focus groups, the President or Executive
Director of the organization should send letters to stakeholders that have been identified by
the staff. The letter should stress that the session’s purpose is to identify policy issues that
affect business in general or, depending on the mission of the sponsoring organization(s),
an industry as a whole. The organization, at its discretion, may offer incentives to those
individuals that participate. This may vary from providing a lunch to giving away prizes.
Often, the sessions are held over a two or three-day period, with the facilitator holding
both morning and afternoon sessions. While the sessions may be held at the offices of the
70
organization, most likely they will be held off-site at a conference facility, restaurant or
hotel.
Focus Group Process: Typically, focus group sessions are between 1 hour and 1 ½ hours
in length. Each session is scripted with an agenda and specific questions that are asked by
the facilitator. Responses to the questions are noted on a flip chart either by the facilitator
or a designated recorder. The facilitator must attempt to elicit input from all the
participants, while at the same time ensuring accurate and honest responses. After all
questions have been asked and responses recorded, the facilitator thanks the group and
distributes any incentives that are offered. Because the session’s purpose is to elicit
specific input on policy issues, the questions should be designed to focus on challenges
faced by the business community as a whole or an industry in specific. Some facilitators
utilize an analysis of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats (SWOT) to frame the
discussion rather than a pre-planned set of questions. Regardless of the technique used,
the focus group’s goal should be the identification and prioritization of specific policy
issues to be addressed within the business agenda.
Report: Within ten days after the focus groups, the facilitator prepares a report that
identifies the issues that were identified as well as the group’s suggested prioritization.
Prioritization is important because it provides a mechanism to cross-reference responses
from each focus group to determine which issues are considered important by all the
groups. This provides the organization or advocacy coalition with a practical way to
assess which issues should be included in the business agenda and which should be left
out. It also provides a way to determine which of the prioritized issues should be
addressed in the near-term versus taking a longer-term approach. Typically, the facilitator
will meet with the organization’s senior staff and volunteers to present the report.
Public Policy Advocacy Surveys
Purpose: Conducting surveys is a traditional way of generating input from stakeholders.
For purposes of gaining input from a business agenda, it is not as important as focus
groups and public meetings. Surveys, especially those dealing with policy issues, have
become passé in many areas, thus reducing the number of responses, eroding the accuracy
of the responses provided, and generally limiting their effectiveness as an input-gathering
tool. Advocacy experts contend that surveys are most effective when they a) focus on one
particular issue, b) are done in conjunction with or as part of a public meeting, and/or c)
are constructed scientifically to ensure participation by the appropriate stakeholders. In an
advocacy context, surveys are most usually linked to polls, which are a scientific
amalgamation of stakeholder opinions on a candidate or issue.
Survey Design: A survey’s design is critical in its ability to generate useful information.
Surveys that are designed to achieve pre-determined results are not useful inputs to a
business agenda, nor are unscientific samplings that do not include a broad sampling pool.
It is recommended that for purposes of developing a membership development strategy
organizations survey a wide-variety of stakeholders in order to gauge overall support for
its activities across diverse groups. The survey should contain both quantifiable and
71
subjective questions that allow for both structured and un-structured input. Quantifiable
questions allow the organization access to specific data that can be used to analyze the
importance stakeholders place on a specific issue or issues, while subjective responses
may provide insight into situations and/or attitudes of importance to individual
stakeholders.
Survey Process: The process used to conduct the survey impacts its results. First and
foremost, a scientific sampling pool must be developed that includes all of the targeted
stakeholders. It is assumed that no more than 15% of respondents will complete a mailed
survey, so in order to achieve an accurate sampling, the survey pool must be large enough
to ensure the proper return. The distribution pool may be smaller for survey projects that
include personal visits and/or follow up. Many organizations outsource survey projects in
order to ensure a scientific sampling as well as impartiality in the question-development,
survey implementation and results analysis processes. In the case of outsourcing, an
organization typically works closely with a professional polling/research company to
develop a sample list, survey methodology, survey instrument, and analysis process. Once
the data is evaluated, it becomes part of the input stream along with focus group results
and the responses from public forums.
Report: Organizations typically report survey findings at a public stakeholders meeting,
but many also publish an executive summary for distribution.
Public Forums
Purpose: The purpose of a public forum is to generate input from a large respondent pool
at one time. While not as effective as structure focus group discussions, public forums are
useful in that they provide a wide variety of feedback from a broad base of stakeholders.
Public Forum Design: Public forums are usually designed with audience-participation in
mind, meaning that the venue should provide a setting that allows participants the
opportunity to speak. The sound system should either include cordless microphones that
can be passed throughout the audience or a podium and microphone from which
participants can speak. The latter technique is not encouraged since it relinquishes control
of the microphone, rendering the forum’s organizers powerless to control the time or
quantity of remarks. If general comments are accepted from the audience and cordless
microphones are used, it may be necessary to position staff members or volunteers
throughout the room to facilitate the passing or microphones to and from participants.
Public Forum Process: Typically, public forums are divided into three segments. During
the first segment, organizational or advocacy coalition representatives frame the debate,
meaning that they clearly establish the reason for the forum, why it is being conducted,
what results they hope to achieve and what will be done with the results. The second
segment is often used to provide background information on an issue, issues or sector in
order to further narrow the discussion to a finite number of targeted topics. The third
segment usually focuses on gaining input, either through the division of the forum
participants into discussion groups or by allowing input from the floor. The latter
72
technique is often perceived as ineffective due to an organization’s inherent inability to
control the comments made by individual participants. Still, for those organizations
patient enough to allow them these interventions can provide useful feedback for the
creation of a business agenda.
Report: If a series of public forums are conducted, a joint report should be prepared that
outlines the common responses from all the events, as well as outlining the outcomes from
each individual forum.
Gathering input is a critical step in the development of a business agenda, but
evaluation and follow up should not be overlooked. Associations sometimes waste their
resources by failing to utilize input correctly, or through being negligent in follow up.
Each individual that participated in the input-gathering process should receive a copy of
the results and be invited to provide additional feedback on an ongoing basis. If used
properly, the results will provide the association or advocacy coalition with an indication
of key issues and their priority to stakeholders. While some association leaders feel that
input should only be obtained from members, experience indicates that this needlessly
narrows the sample pool, while at the same time creating an information gap.
Compiling and Analyzing Data
Member input gained through focus groups, surveys and public forums is important
in gauging the attitudes of a variety of stakeholders relative to policy issues. This input is
subjective, however, and if used in a vacuum can lead to recommendations that are self-
serving, impractical or ineffective. For this reason, organizations desiring to create
realistic policy recommendations also compile and analyze data. This is most usually done
parallel to the stakeholder input-gathering process, though many organizations use the
compilation and analysis of data as a way to frame the discussion during stakeholder
events. There are four primary types of data to be analyzed:
Statistics
Statistics are data that is compiled over time using specific methodology. If
updated properly utilizing the same methodological norms, statistics can provide an
analysis of trends that is useful the thorough understanding of an economy, sector or
issue(s). Unfortunately, statistics are often incomplete, outdated or compiled using
different methodology so that accurate comparisons and trend analysis cannot take place.
Organizations using statistics to support policy recommendations should understand that a)
one set of statistics often contradict another, creating a “war of numbers” that can create
confusion about an issue(s), b) statistics that are more than a year old have marginal value,
especially countries where the economic system is fluid, and c) statistics must be
interpreted in a way that is both transparent and accurate.
73
Existing Research Reports
Many organizations utilize existing research reports to assess the impact of a policy
issue(s) or as proof that its policy recommendations are accurate. Reports conducted by
organizations such as the World Bank and the United Nations are typically accepted as
substantive, which make them useful inputs into the creation of policy recommendations.
Reports published by think tanks, individual researchers and lesser-known non-
governmental organizations may contain accurate information, but will traditionally have
less influence in support of or opposition to an issue(s).
Research reports should not be confused with opinion-based articles unless they
contain empirical research in support of a position. The Internet, for instance, is filled with
articles that appear to be research-based when in actuality they are little more than
opinion-editorial pieces. These articles have little value in the development of policy
recommendations.
Technical Articles
Technical articles are those written by an expert in a particular field or on a specific
issue. In order to have maximum value as an input into the creation of policy
recommendations, a technical article should contain information that explains a process,
methodology, or issue in such a way as increase the stakeholders’ understanding. For
instance, a technical article on economic policy written by a person of authority might be a
useful input into the policy recommendation process as it would likely provide insight into
specific fiscal issues or policies in play.
On-Line Sources
Over the past few years, on-line resources have been widely used as inputs into the
policy development process. While the Internet contains some useful information,
organizations and advocacy coalitions should use great care in assessing its value.
Resources such as Wikipedia have marginal value in policy analysis, since they can be
changed by any authorized user. On-line statistics, research and reports should be used
expeditiously as they often contain inaccuracies that can render policy recommendations
ineffective.
The outputs generated through data compilation will only be as good as the inputs,
so it is essential that organizations understand the difference between “substantive” and
“un-substantive” data. Substantive data comes from sources that are acknowledged as
experts in data collection. In a development context, organizations such as the World
Bank, United Nations, and high-visibility international non-governmental organizations
(such as Amnesty International or Transparency International) are sources of substantive
data. Regardless of the source, substantive data is based on proven methodology that was
designed to elicit unbiased results. Un-substantive data is that which cannot be verified
through methodology or is offered by an organization that has a reputation for producing
biased results. Data from these sources is often undermined by substantive data and thus
74
may produce a credibility problem for organization or advocacy coalition that is
developing a business agenda.
Conducting Independent Research
In many countries, statistical and technical data is lacking, leaving an information
void that must be filled before an organization or advocacy coalition can ensure the
development of realistic policy recommendations. Because of this, organizations are often
required to conduct independent research either on their own or by using outside expertise.
In a growing number of cases, organizations and advocacy coalitions are utilizing either
individual experts or think tanks as sources of independent research. The method utilized
depends largely on the results to be achieved. Technical experts are typically used to
provide data on trends within a specific sector, overall economic trends or issue-based
analysis. Think tanks tend to take a more academic than technical approach to research,
but are useful sources of data an analysis. In fact, think tanks are among the only sources
of substantive data in many developing countries.
Because of the cost of conducting independent research, many organizations and
advocacy coalitions are reluctant to include it in their issue analysis. Instead, they rely on
readily available sources of data that may be outdated, inapplicable or un-substantive.
This shortcut, while conserving financial resources, has undermined the effectiveness of
many business agendas. After all, recommendations based on ten-year old research or on
analysis for sources lacking credibility is easily contradicted. Policy recommendations
based on anything but substantive data and strategic stakeholder input may not be valid
based on actual conditions within an industry, sector, or geographic region.
Developing Specific Policy Positions
Once stakeholder input and data have been thoroughly analyzed, an organization or
advocacy coalition can develop policy positions to address issues contained within the
business agenda. When developing these positions, organizations should consider the
following:
Policy positions should be specific
Specificity is important when developing policy positions. Vague arguments that
lead to no particular conclusion or in some cases create additional questions, has no value
in affecting change. Policy positions should therefore contain specific actions to be taken
on an issue during a defined period of time.
Policy positions should be realistic
In public policy advocacy there is traditionally a chasm between what an
organization wants and what it can realistically achieve. Rather than focusing on actions
that are not realistic given the current political or economic circumstances, policy positions
should contain realistic recommendations that are supported by substantive data.
75
Unrealistic policy positions erode an organization’s credibility by creating false
expectations among its stakeholders.
Policy positions should be supported by data
Policy positions that are not supported by data are merely a collection of opinions.
While it is important for an organization or advocacy coalition to express its opinion on an
issue(s), it must be supported by data that is perceived to be substantive, meaning that it
was compiled using an accepted methodology by an organization that has some credibility.
Policy positions should be agreed upon by key stakeholders
Prior to its finalization, the business agenda should be reviewed by stakeholders to
ensure broad-based support for the policy positions it contains. This is usually done either
through a meeting with members and other stakeholders or through agreement of
stakeholder representatives. In the case of an advocacy coalition, agreement is achieved
through a meeting of representatives from each of the business associations involved in the
coalition. Many business agendas have been rendered ineffective because of lack of
agreement on its policy positions. Disagreements must be worked out in advance instead
of after the agenda is published and distributed so as not to erode the organization’s or
coalition’s credibility.
Policy positions, where possible, should focus on the financial or social benefits of a
particular action or actions
Advocacy experts agree that the most effective argument of policy change is that of
financial impact. Organizations that can prove the financial impact of a supported or
opposed action have an effective argument for change. Numbers translate easily to the
press as well as in public forums. Policy positions are also strengthened through
recommendations that have social impacts, which will generate broad-based public
support.
Policy positions should be brief and easy to understand
Policy positions should be brief and easy to understand. The business agenda
should not the specific data and details that were used to formulate a position, as this
information is best contained in a separate policy paper. Rather, the policy position should
include clearly stated recommendations for action that are based on research and
stakeholder input.
Developing a Utilization Plan for the Business Agenda
A business agenda can only be effective if utilized in a strategic way. Simple
distribution will not achieve the desired results, as most of the publications are lengthy and
thus easily dismissed by government officials and other target audiences. With this in
76
mind, an organization or advocacy coalition should consider the following utilization
techniques to ensure the business agenda’s impact:
Business Agenda Launch Event
A launch event is a useful way to promote the business agenda by highlighting its
policy positions in front of government officials, representatives of international
organizations, association members, and the media. During its “Open Doors Campaign”
in Romania, the Tourism for Today and Tomorrow (T-3) Coalition (consisting of 11 major
business associations serving the tourism sector) held a launch event to highlight six policy
positions contained in its business agenda. During the two-hour meeting, T-3 Coalition
officials presented the positions and took questions from government officials and other
participants. After the event ended, the Coalition’s leadership held a press conference that
included supportive remarks by the Minister of Tourism. A networking event was held
after the press conference so that the Coalition’s members could interact informally with
participating stakeholders. This event created intense media coverage that brought the six
policy positions into the forefront of discussion. It created a platform on which the follow
up action was conducted.
Another event, “Advocacy Days”, was sponsored by all three coalitions involved in
the Open Doors Campaign as a way to raise the visibility of its advocacy campaign by
generating massive grassroots support.
The event drew over 400 participants from thirteen
Romanian counties. Three government ministers
and fourteen members of parliament also attended
at the Coalitions’ invitation. After a half-day
session promoting the Coalitions’ business agenda,
participants were divided into sector-specific
advocacy teams (tourism, manufacturing and
information technology) for meetings with elected
officials in each of these areas. The event spawned
significant results including 26 press articles, 11
television news reports and 1 magazine article. It
served as a high profile launch for the Open Doors
Campaign, creating momentum that propelled the
effort toward the achievement of its goals. The
Coalitions continue to operate, launching public
policy campaigns and heightening awareness of
three vital economic sectors. Since 2002, the
Coalitions have facilitated the passage of 38 laws
in support of these sectors and the successes
continue with a new group of leaders.
77
Creation of Issue Papers
Issue papers are different from policy positions. As stated earlier, policy positions
are brief statements that include an organization’s or advocacy coalition’s
recommendations on how to address specific issues within the business agenda. Issue
papers are separate, more detailed documents that include statistics and other
documentation in support of a policy position. Issue papers are typically used during press
briefings or meetings with public officials in order to provide background information on a
particular issue(s). Some organizations sponsor round table discussion meetings at which
issue papers are presented and discussed. The effective use of issue papers keeps policy
positions within the business agenda in front of the media, government officials and other
stakeholders.
Creation of Advocacy Committee Structure
Many business associations have created business agendas only to realize too late
that the development of the agenda itself was not enough to affect public policy. Even
follow up actions such as a launch event and the creation of issue papers cannot maintain
the momentum necessary to initiate policy change. This comes through a strategic and
sustained organizational structure that is linked with the business agenda. Typically, this
structure is in the form of advocacy committees that focus on the issues contained within
the agenda. For example, if the business agenda contains the issues of taxation, customs
regime reform and banking reform, an aggressive organization or coalition will form
committees to oversee the advocacy effort in each of these areas. These committees will
host events to highlight policy positions, analyze and comment on pending government
legislation in its area of focus, and conduct hold one-on-one meetings with government
officials to promote the organization’s or coalition’s point of view.
Advocacy committees typically include technical experts within the area of their
focus (for instance a banking reform committee might include bankers, economists,
representatives from the World Bank and International Monetary Fund, etc) and meet on
an “as needed” basis. In many organizations, staff members provide support for the
committees by scheduling meetings, sending reminders to committee members, and taking
minutes. The committees are usually appointed by and serve at the pleasure of an
organization’s board of directors or in the case of an advocacy coalition, its steering
committee.
Press Events
Press events are effective in promoting policy positions, but should be used
judiciously. Organizational or coalition leaders should know when to prepare and send a
press release, conduct a press conference or meeting one-on-one with media
representatives. Typically, press conferences are reserved for major issues or policy
78
announcements, while press releases are utilized to create ongoing visibility or to “wet a
journalist’s appetite” to cover a specific issue(s). Media outreach will be discussed at
length in Chapter Four.
Direct Advocacy
Direct advocacy is another word for “lobbying”, meaning that a person or group of
people attempt to transparently influence a public official by outlining specific policy
position. Direct advocacy is perhaps one of the most common ways to follow up on the
creation of a business agenda, but it is often overused or used in a way that does not
produce desired results. It must be stated that direct advocacy has nothing to do with
having an “inside track” with a politician or resorting to non-transparent practices in order
to achieve success. In most countries, direct advocacy is heavily regulated, with specific
oversight mechanisms in place to ensure compliance with ethics rules. In its purest form,
direct advocacy is the root of democracy, as individuals and groups take their case directly
to officials that have direct influence on the issue(s) they feel are important. Direct
advocacy will be discussed at length in Chapter Six.
SECTION FOUR: DEVELOPING ADVOCACY CAMPAIGNS
What is a Public Policy Advocacy Campaign?
A public policy advocacy campaign is a sustained event that focuses on the
implementation of one or more policy positions outlined in the business agenda.
Campaigns are designed to initiate intense focus on one or more issues in order to achieve
a desired outcome, which is usually the passage or defeat of a specific piece of legislation.
Campaigns usually take one of two forms. Issue-based campaigns are those that focus on
one issue that may constitute a policy position as a whole or one recommendation within a
policy position. For instance, the Advocacy Academy Association in Timisoara, Romania
developed a policy position in support of open and transparent government. This position
contained three specific recommendations, one of which was the passage of a “Freedom of
Information Act” what would require the government to provide information on laws, draft
laws, ordinances or financial practices to organizations or individuals that requested the
information in writing. The association waged an 18-month advocacy campaign in
support of this law that included public hearings, direct advocacy, media outreach,
demonstrations and special events. The law was finally passed, after which the association
focused on the next recommendation under its open and transparent government policy
position.
Campaigns can also be sector-based, meaning that they focus on a finite number of issues
that are important to a particular sector. The Tourism for Today and Tomorrow (T-3)
Coalition mentioned above initiated such a campaign beginning in 2002. After identifying
six key policy issues, it developed positions on each and initiated a campaign called “Open
Doors” to advocate these positions to the appropriate government ministries. Over the
next two years, the Romanian Government adopted four of the six policy positions. Rather
than wage a campaign focusing on each position, the Coalition conducted a campaign
based on a series of positions that support the tourism sector’s development.
79
Elements of a Successful Campaign
Regardless of the type of advocacy campaign, there are common elements that
must be considered if the desired results are to be achieved. Organizations and advocacy
coalitions approach campaigns in different ways, but elements for the following are
typically incorporated into the overall initiatives:
Issue Briefs
Issue briefs differ from policy positions and issue papers. Issue briefs provide a
condensed synopsis of a policy position (usually no more than one page) for use at public
meetings, press conferences and private meetings with government officials. Issue briefs
provide stakeholders with a clear but concise view of the issue, its background and the
organization’s or coalition’s policy position. The following is an issue brief that focused
on support of policies to benefit the light-manufacturing sector:
Figure 5.7 Pro Globe Coalition Issue Brief
ISSUE BRIEF
CORPORATE PROFIT TAX
PREPARED BY
The Pro-Globe Coalition of Business Associations Representing the Light Industry
Sector
For approximately two years, exporters have been subject to exceptional treatment as to
profit tax. In order to stimulate exports, an indirect form of subsidy - a tax of only 6%
has been applied to profits generated from exports, compared to 25% tax on profit from
other types of operations. Over the past six months, discussions about the upcoming end
of this special treatment period have been increasingly frequent. A proposed new profit
tax law was drafted by the government of and forwarded to parliament on April 24. The
new law brings several changes to the profit taxation algorithm, to get it closer to the EU
standards and accession requirements, including gradual cancellation of the exceptional
treatment for exporters. There is speculation that the law was drafted in close
collaboration with IMF representatives. Discussions over the law in the commissions of
the Chamber are expected to start on Tuesday, May 7.
According to the new law, exporters are likely to pay 12.5% tax on respective profit
starting Jan. 1, 2003 and begin paying 25%, from January 1, 2004. The law also alleviates
some previously awarded exceptions, such as operations in the distressed economic zones,
in free trade zones, investments over $1 million and incentives to SMEs. Regional
development policies and foreign investment policies will also be affected by the new law,
in ways that are hardly quantifiable at this point.
80
The first reaction from the Ministry of Finance to the discussions in the Chamber of
Deputies took the form of a promise to make some new subsidies available to compensate
for the doubling and then doubling again of the profit tax for exporters, as well as another
promise to keep stimulating SMEs by providing access to financing sources, state
guarantees for loans and incentives for human resource development.
Although highly predictable, fully in line with gradual EU accession requirements,
lowering protective obstacles to increased competitiveness, the issue of the new law
rapidly got “hot” and also acquired a political component, the National Liberal Party
(PNL) being the first to protest against the law, to come up with a set of proposed
amendments, and to attack the Humanist Party (PUR) for supporting the ruling party
(PSD) in this initiative. PNL asked for the resignation of Silvia Ciornei (PUR) as Minister
of SMEs.
Members of the Pro Globe Coalition have been active in providing input on this issue,
although it was a foregone conclusion from the time this incentive was initiated that it
would gradually be alleviated. Their strategy has been to achieve a phased approach to the
implementation of the tax, and to ensure that the final tax is competitive with that of
surrounding countries. The following is a comparison of the profit tax rate (as proposed
by the Ministry of Finance) with those of selected countries:
Country Profit Tax Rate
Romania 25% (cut from 38% four years ago)
Bulgaria 20% (15% for small enterprises)
Greece 35% for listed companies and 37.5% for
unlisted
Italy 36%
Hungary 18%
Poland 28% (scheduled to fall to 22% by 2004)
France 33.3%
Russia 24%
While the Coalition will support the phased in initiation of this tax, it will not support its
immediate application at the 25% rate. In addition, the Pro Globe Coalition members want
a lower tax rate for small companies and more communication between the Ministries and
the private sector in making revenue-related decisions. The end result of this situation is
that the alleviation of the profit tax incentive and phased in increase to 25% will be a
short-term hardship, but in the long term businesses will not be as severely affected, as
many politicians would lead us to believe. Most see this as a natural progression toward
EU accession.
The Pro-Globe Coalition achieved its goal of obtaining a phased in tax over five
years, as well as incentives for small companies. This issue brief, only one page in length,
provided background on this issue as well as clearly stated the Coalition’s policy position.
It was widely distributed on the Coalition’s letterhead and when the law was passed, the
81
Minister of Small and Medium Sized Enterprises gave it full credit for having waged an
advocacy campaign in support of private sector development.
Advocacy Tour
Advocacy tours are widely used by organizations and advocacy coalitions that
want to develop grassroots support throughout a large geographic area. This approach is
especially effective for issues that have a national scope. In 2006, the Afghanistan
International Chamber of Commerce conducted the first national advocacy tour in the
country’s history, taking its business agenda to more than 2,000 members and other
stakeholders in six cities. In each location, AICC held a press conference to discuss the
positions within its business agenda, a workshop to inform business leaders about issues
that could affect private sector development and a networking reception to its members
with access to key government officials. Its advocacy tour was called “The Building
Bridges Initiative”, meaning that it was designed to bridge the gap between the private
sector and government. As a result of this tour, AICC’s business agenda received
significant press coverage, enjoyed heightened public support, and gained the attention of
key government leaders. In fact, President Hamid Karzai commended AICC for its effort
saying that the tour was, “A positive step toward empowerment of the private sector”.
Advocacy tours, while effective, require a significant amount of coordination, are
expensive, and demand a great deal of follow up. Because of this, they are usually
conducted by larger or regional associations and advocacy coalitions that have the capacity
to implement them. The media traditionally supports such events as they provide
significant opportunities for news coverage. Tours also provide opportunities for
organizational and advocacy campaign branding.
Networking Events
Organizations and advocacy coalitions use informal networking events to build
relationships between the private sector and public officials. These events are useful
elements of advocacy campaigns because they provide low-key ways to advocate an
organization’s or coalition’s policy positions. Public officials tend to embrace these events
because they are informal and non-confrontational, while the private sector participates
because it has direct access to senior-level political officials. Networking events are not
singularly successful, but as part of an overall advocacy campaign strategy they can be
quite effective.
Many associations fund such events either through corporate sponsorships, as
corporations want to be visible to both the private sector and public officials, as well as
through registration fees. In the latter case, the association charges each participant a
small fee to cover the costs of the reception. Some organizations include a short amount
of time for presentations, for instance a presentation by its President on an issue contained
in the business agenda, while others focus only on networking. Typically, the association
pre-assigns staff and committee members to talk with targeted government officials that
attend in order to promote the organization’s point of view. In other words, the
82
networking event appears to be a random, informal gathering of business and government
leaders when in actuality it is well-planned to achieve specific results.
Collaborative Stakeholder Event
Business associations and advocacy coalitions routinely partner with outside
stakeholders to promote policy positions within their business agendas. Stakeholders such
as the International Monetary Fund (IMF), United Nations (UN) and the World Bank
(WB) can provide and policy position with instant credibility. Collaboration between
national and international non-governmental organizations (NGOs) is also common. The
Advocacy Academy Association of Romania, for instance, partnered with the Romanian
Open Society Foundation to sponsor a series of public hearings on issues such as the
Freedom of Information Act and the anti-corruption law. This collaboration cemented an
ongoing partnership between the two organizations while at the same time providing more
visibility to the advocacy campaign.
Media Outreach
Ongoing media outreach is important in the implementation of a successful public
policy advocacy campaign. Organizations that take a process-oriented approach to
advocacy understand that development of a strong relationship with media outlets is key to
the dissemination of its message. Many conduct monthly press briefings or networking
events where members of the press are provided information about policy positions. Other
organizations assign staff and/or volunteer leaders as liaisons between the organization and
the press. The key to a successful advocacy campaign is staying ahead of the news instead
of behind it. In other words an association or advocacy coalition must manage its message
instead of being forced to respond to inaccurate information caused by erroneous reporting
or lack of clarity. Edward Priola, an expert in advocacy communications, says it this way,
“An organization cannot be on the offensive if it is on the defensive. Building strong
relationships with the media is vital. Without them failure is virtually 100% assured”.
The role of media management in public policy advocacy will be discussed at length in
Chapter Four.
Grassroots Support
Grassroots support for policy issues within a business agenda is an advocacy
campaigns lynchpin of success. It has been said that politicians in democratic societies
value one thing above all others….votes. This being the case, organizations and/or
advocacy coalitions that generate grassroots support and thus control votes, also enjoy a
good deal of power. As stated in an earlier chapter, power is the “holy grail” of advocacy.
Organizations that possess it exponentially increase their chances of success.
Advocacy tours and focused media management are two ways to develop
grassroots support, but there are many others that are also being effectively used by
business associations around the world. Newsletters, action-oriented e-mail messages,
television programs, radio announcements and targeted mailings are all used to develop
83
and sustain grassroots support. While none of them are particularly effective on their own,
when used in combination with other techniques, they are valuable tools in generating
enthusiasm for issues and campaigns.
In designing a plan to generate and sustain grassroots support, business
associations and/or advocacy coalitions must first decide who
they need to reach. Will the
campaign target members only or will it focus on the public at large. Also, a decision
must be made as to how the message will be delivered. What media sources will be used?
Will these sources reach the target audience(s)? Finally, there must be agreement on what
message will be delivered within what period of time. In order to sustain grassroots
support, an organization must keep the issue in front of its stakeholders. The American
Association of Retired Persons (AARP) is one of the largest grassroots organizations in the
United States. Its advocacy effort is extremely sophisticated and successful, largely
because it sustains grassroots support of its members by keeping significant policy issues
in the forefront. It does this through varied communications techniques that are designed
specifically for its members. An organization that generates grassroots support but fails to
sustain it will lose momentum the longer its advocacy campaign is conducted. As a noted
military expert once said, “It doesn’t matter how large your army is at the beginning of a
battle, it matters how many are there at the end”. The same is true of grassroots support,
which is explored in Chapter Five.
SECTION FIVE: COMMUNICATIONS IN SUPPORT OF ADVOCACY CAMPAIGNS
“Literature is the art of writing something that will be read twice or more; journalism what
will be read once”. Cyril Connolloy, Consultant and Author
Media professionals understand that the right to be heard does not automatically
include the right to be taken seriously. In other words, there is a difference between being
loud and being effective. Infant public policy advocacy efforts tend to focus on the
former, as they find their voice and bombard the government with complaints about real
and perceived injustices. Mature organizations focus on effectiveness by learning when,
how, where and to whom to speak. Successful advocacy campaigns are built not as much
on the message as how it is delivered. Being right, therefore, does not guarantee results.
Shrewd use of the media also does not guarantee positive results, but it dramatically
increases the chance of success.
The first step in successfully managing a message is to focus on a) who is the
audience, b) what is the message to be delivered, c) how is the message to be delivered,
and d) when is the message to be delivered.
Who is the Audience? Is the target audience for the advocacy message only members of
an association or advocacy coalition or the public at large? Is the message for government
officials, international donors or national organizations? In reality, an organization may
need to focus on many different audiences for a single issue. For instance, if the issue is to
84
reduce corporate taxes, an organization may want to communicate the issues background
and importance to its members, recommendations to government leaders, and the need for
support to the international community. Reaching all these audiences means that the
organization must “wrap the same messages in different packages”.
What is the Message? Business associations and advocacy coalitions sometimes
inadvertently send unintended messages or make them so convoluted that their target
audiences cannot understand them. Advocacy media experts agree that it is best use the
following guidelines when crafting an advocacy message.
Send clear, concise messages. The more words used to describe an issue or a
policy position, the greater the chance that the real message will get lost in
translation. It is also important to develop concise messages for use by the media.
For instance, an organization has only 30-35 seconds to broadcast a message over
the radio and 60-90 seconds on television. This forces ruthless selection of facts to
“pare down” the message.
Repeat the message frequently during short periods. This is especially important
for radio and television as studies show that listeners/viewers cannot retain
information unless it is repeated frequently.
Be aware of vulnerability to opponents. In creating an advocacy message,
organizations should be aware that the minute it is released, opponents will begin a
process aimed at destroying its credibility. With this in mind, organizations must
ensure that the message is clear, accurate, transparent and fair. Otherwise, it will
inadvertently give the opposition ammunition with which to erode its effect.
Create wedge and magnate issues. In the context of an advocacy campaign, wedge
issues are those that separate your message from your opponent’s, while magnate
issues are those that bond your message to your supporters. In other words, an
advocacy message should separate an organization from its opponents’ argument
while solidifying its position with supporters (grassroots network).
Overcome clutter. Today’s society is cluttered with information. A message must
be crafted in such a way as to break through this clutter. This requires the
development of clear, concise messages that are targeted directly to their
appropriate audiences.
Call to action. An advocacy message should contain a clear call to action. What
does the organization want the reader/listener/participant to do? Should they write
a letter to a policy maker? Should they participate in a protest? If the message is
focused on a public official, what action should he/she take? Unless there is a clear
call to action, the message serves little more than an informational purpose.
Business associations and advocacy coalitions should operate on the principle that it is
easier to motivate someone around something they already know that to convince them to
believe something new. This being the case, the message should be crafted to remind a
target audience of what it already knows and it should evoke feelings that already exist.
For inst
ance, when the American Association of Retired Persons (AARP) communicates
with its members about Social Security reform, it reminds them a) that each of them paid
into the system, b) it is their money that must be protected, c) if mismanaged, the money
85
could be gone, and d) if it is gone they could be left without financial support in their
twilight years. This message is effective because it reinforces what the organization’s
members already know and it evokes strong emotions that precipitate a reaction.
How is the Message to be Delivered? Once the target audiences are identified, an
organization must determine how best to reach them. For instance, to reach the business
community at large to elicit its support for a plan to reduce corporate taxes, an
organization may need to use a combination of communications techniques including
articles/advertisements in widely-read business publications, e-mail alerts to CEOs, and/or
fact sheets distributed through corporate communications departments. To reach
government with its message, it may need to run opinion-editorial articles in leading
newspapers that are widely read by government officials, schedule personal meetings with
appropriate politicians and/or generate mass letters from the business community in
support of the policy position. The standard rule for advocacy media management is that it
does not good to identify the audience if one does not know how to reach it. Some
organizations, especially in developing countries, utilize protests as a way to communicate
advocacy messages. Experience indicates that interventions of this type should be used
scarcely and only as a last resort, as they are both contentious and often produce
convoluted messages that do little to influence decision-makers.
When is the message to be delivered? A business association or advocacy coalition must
determine the most effective time to deliver its message. This may mean a particular day,
a particular time of day, or a specific period of time (e.g. weeks or months). For instance,
if an organization wants to reach the 18-24 age groups with its message, it may want to
consider running advertisements on a popular rock and roll station during early evening
hours when young people are off work and in their cars. A message not heard elicits no
response, so timing is critical.
Methods of Communication
Publications
Publications are widely used in advocacy campaigns to brand the organization or
advocacy coalition that is conducting the
campaign as well as to create an image of
professionalism and credibility. In other words,
a message’s “wrapping” is an important
indicator of its sponsoring organization’s
professionalism. For this reason, successful
advocacy organizations spend significant time
and resources on a campaign’s aesthetic appeal
as well as its message. The following are
examples of effective advocacy publications:
This newsletter, published by the Open Doors
Campaign advocacy coalitions in Romania,
86
conveys messages in a clean, concise format. It is in four colors, printed on high-quality
paper, contains the campaign logo and is filled with photos. A common mistake on
newsletters is to pack them with information and forget about their aesthetic appeal.
Readers want to see photos and will read headlines first to see what interests them.
Experience indicates that if the headlines do not appeal to them, they will not read the
article and the message will be lost. Another common mistake is making newsletters too
long. This newsletter was done in a four-page format. It also contained statistics, a
“countdown calendar” for the campaign and other useful information.
The Open Doors Campaign in Romania produced this holiday
card, which was sent to more than 2,000 stakeholders including
government officials, the boards of directors of the associations
involved in the coalition, international organizations, NGOs and
other business leaders. Its purpose was not to promote
particular issues, but rather to keep the campaign in front of its
stakeholders. The modified use of the campaign logo with the
wreath was appealing both aesthetically and from a branding
standpoint.
This logo was developed to provide visual reinforcement of the
campaign’s concept. The tag on the doorknob reads “Open
Doors” in Romanian. Since the campaign focused on opening up
discussions between government and the private sector, “Open
Doors” represented a useful slogan to reinforce this message. The
logo was designed to provide a visual frame of reference. It was
included on newsletters, folders, newspaper advertisements,
billboards and letterhead. Over three years, it became the most
visible symbol of business association advocacy in the country.
This publication, which in Romanian says, “The State of
Transparency” was published by the Advocacy Academy
Association (“AAA”) of Romania, founded by six business
associations in north Romania as a mechanism to increase
public participation in government. The AAA is not a
lobbying organization, but rather one that promotes
interaction between the public and private sectors. Its
publications, such as this one, focus on unbiased research.
This publication is in four colors on heavy stock paper. It is
neatly bound and has a professional look. It was distributed
to more than 400 stakeholders including senior government
officials and was used extensively by business associations
to support their calls for transparency.
87
Press Releases
Press releases are common tools used to promote advocacy positions. Depending
on the circumstances, organizations may want to distribute press releases individually or
include them as part of a press packet at a media event or press conference. When drafting
a press release, an organization should consider the following:
Figure 5.8 Tips for Writing Successful Press Releases
1. It should include the most important facts early in the release. The press
release’ first paragraph should contain the most important information so that a
reporter will know immediately the salient issues.
2. It should be in plain language. A press release is not literature. Reporters may
know little about the issue contained in the press release, so use of conversational
language is important in creating understanding as well as readability.
3. It should be interesting. Stakeholder quotes generate interest, as does focus on
the issues impact. For instance, rather than saying “the business community is
unhappy with this law” the press release should include a quote from a business
owner and spell out the issue’s effect on his/her business. This creates interest as
well as putting a “face” on the issue.
4. It should contain a sense of urgency. The release should include language that
lets the reporter know why the issue is important right now. It should address the
reasons why the organization feels the time is right to address the issue, rather than
postponing action to a future date.
5. It should be action oriented. A press release should call for a specific action,
such as the initiation of a rally in support of an issue, the coordination of a letter-
writing campaign, or a launch event for an advocacy campaign.
6. It should be relevant. So much news is available today that the public only wants
to read what is relevant and thus reporters only want to report news their readers
will find interesting. Sending a mass-mailed press release to every media outlet
regardless of its size, scope or readership is not an effective way to obtain
coverage. Rather, press releases should target specific publications or media
outlets that focus on readers/viewers that will find the information contained within
the release relevant to their lives or businesses.
7. It should demonstrate value. This can be done by placing a value on the issue or
the solution. For instance, rather than saying “Value Added Taxes on
manufacturing inputs increases the costs of production, which are passed on to the
consumer” a press release should say “Value Added Taxes on imported rubber
increased tire manufacturing costs by 28%, raising the cost of a standard steel-
belted radial tire from $100 to $135 per tire”. This assigns a value to the issue,
making it more interesting for the public and consequently for reporters.
Part of writing an effective press release is structuring it in the appropriate way. The
the following represents an internationally accepted structural model:
88
Figure 5.9 Press Release Structure
1. Release time: This states whether it is for immediate release or if it should be
released on a specific date.
2. Contact information: This provides information on the person within the
organization that should be contacted about the press release. Typically, it includes
the name, title and contact information.
3. Headline: The headline should be interesting but not “sensational”. Because of
the volume of press releases that media professionals receive, a reporter may read
the headline first and if it is not interesting, disregard the press release.
4. Dateline: The dateline is usually corresponds with the date the release is sent,
which may be different from the release date, or the date an event took place.
5. Lead paragraph: The lead paragraph should contain the most important
information, answering the questions “who, what, where, when and how”?
6. Text: This usually comprises two or three paragraphs that may include quotes
from stakeholders, background information, or further explanation of an
organization’s policy position. It is important that the text is concise and clear.
Press releases that are more than 1-1 ½ pages are usually disregarded, so it is better
to use the fewest amount of words possible.
7. Organization summary: The release should include a brief summary of the
business association or advocacy coalition that is sending it in order for the press to
understand how the issue affects the business community.
In addition to being structurally sound, a press release should look professional,
contain no misspellings, and be grammatically correct. This is especially important for
releases that are sent in English by foreign business associations in countries where
English is not the national language. In this case, the press release should be reviewed by
a native English speaker in order to ensure that it is grammatically and structurally correct.
The following press release includes all the elements discussed above and represents an
effective media communications tool:
89
Figure 5.10 Sample Press Release
Press Release
Contact Person: Lidia Stoichici, Public Relations Coordinator, phone: 0722.250.365
Release: Immediately
BRAND CREATION AND PROMOTION – KEY TO INTERNATIONAL
SUCCESS IN TOURISM
- CAMPAIGN TO HOST CONFERENCE ON BUILDING AND MARKETING A
BRAND FOR ROMANIAN TOURISM-
Bucharest, September 19, 2002 – In order to promote the marketing of Romania’s tourism
potential around the world, a conference entitled, “BRAND CREATION AND
PROMOTION – KEY TO INTERNATIONAL SUCCESS IN TOURISM”, will be
held on September 19 at the Marriott Grand Hotel, Timisoara Hall, starting 9.30 am. The
conference is organized by the Tourism for Today and Tomorrow (T-3) Coalition, a
collaborative alliance of eleven Romanian tourism associations, in partnership with the
Ministry of Tourism.
The conference’ purpose is to merge the strengths of the tourism branding initiatives in the
private sector with those of the government and to explain the need for a synergetic
approach in tourism promotion. “We hope this conference will culminate in a partnership,
which will lead to the creation of a successful brand for Romanian tourism,” says Mihai
Rasnita, a T-3 Coalition spokesman and Executive Director of the Romanian Hotelier’s
Association. During the conference, a consortium of business associations representing
the tourism industry will unveil the Re-Discover Romania Tourism Portal, which is
designed as a one-stop point of access for tourism information, bookings, tours,
photographs, and even crafts. Dan Matei Agathon, the Minister of Tourism, says: “I
believe that Romania has already started designing a successful brand promoting Romania
as a tourism destination. However, because of increased competition for tourists, Romania
needs full involvement of all players and especially the private sector, the heart of all
competitive environments…”
The conference will feature Secretary of State Alin Burcea from the Ministry of Tourism
as well as representatives from both government and the private sector. “We want to create
together a successful brand supported by quality services and products that meet the needs
of foreign and domestic tourists alike and that offer a quality holiday for a reasonable
price”, said Cristina Grecu, a T-3 Coalition representative.
Simion Alb, Director of the Romanian Tourism Promoting Office in New York, and Aneta
Bogdan, founding partner of “Brandient”, the first brand consultancy agency in Romania,
will provide insight into image of Romania as a tourism destination, as well as information
on the development of a brand for the country’s tourism products. The Bucovina Regional
Tourism Bureau will also present a model for branding regional tourism.
90
The T-3 Coalition is a joint effort of eleven major business associations that serve the
tourism sector. The Coalition cooperates to promote a common brand image and
legislative structure for the tourism industry. Its partner associations represent more than
6,400 tourism companies in the areas of lodging, restaurants, eco-tourism, rural tourism,
convention promotion, travel agencies, tour guides and chambers of commerce.
Press Conferences
While press conferences can be effective ways to disseminate information on
public policy issues, they are often overused. An organization or advocacy coalition must
determine which issues are important enough to hold a press conference, when the event
should be held, which media should be invited, who should speak on behalf of an issue,
what he/she should say, and finally, what message should be conveyed. The press should
be notified of the event at least a week in advance and follow up contacts should occur.
Follow up is important since media professionals have a number of different stories to
cover. Without proper follow up, they may forget to attend a press conference or simply
not attend because they feel it is low priority.
As an organization or advocacy coalition plans a press conference, it should
develop an agenda that allows for the dissemination of its message in the clearest and most
concise way possible. The following is a sample agenda:
Figure 5.11 Sample Press Conference Agenda
PRESS CONFERENCEON “VALUE ADDED TAX REFORM”
11:00-11:30 A.M.
JANUARY 10, 2008
MARRIOTT HOTEL
Opening Remarks John Richards
President
The Advocacy Coalition
Overview of the Issue and Organizational
Recommendations Dr. Stephen Davison,
Executive Director
The Advocacy Coalition
Question Period Mr. Richards and Mr. Davison will
Take Questions from the Press
Closing Remarks Mr. John Richards
In most cases, press conferences will include refreshments. After adjournment, the
principle presenters should make time for private interviews with the press or for follow up
91
questions. Press conferences that focus on a person or persons releasing a statement to the
press and either allowing no questions or a few unimportant ones are not effective ways to
build media rapport. Failing to provide clear and concise answers to questions, becoming
angry or attacking the media can turn a press conference into an event that damages an
organization or issue rather than promoting them. Press conferences should start and end
on time. Media professionals are busy and they are not impressed with organizations
and/or events that are not conscious of their time.
In summary, press conferences should be used expeditiously as if they become
routine, the media may not respond with the needed urgency. When conducted, they
should be planned with care and structured to ensure that the desired message is delivered
clearly and completely.
Other Media-Oriented Events/Interventions
Media-oriented events other than press conferences can also be effective advocacy
tools. Examples of these events are the writing of opinion-editorial articles that appear on
the opinion page of targeted newspapers, the creation of news stories through events
and/or rallies, and appearance on business-oriented talk shows. These are usually done as
part of an overall media plan that centers around an issue or event.
Techniques in Working with the Media
Be Knowledgeable
There is no substitute for knowledge. It is essential to understand all aspects of an
issue before talking with the media. From an issue standpoint, an organizational or
advocacy coalition representative should know the opposition’s position as well as his/her
own. Advocacy experts agree that organizations or advocacy coalitions that are
knowledgeable about an issue(s) are more likely to receive press coverage over the long
term because they are viewed as a resource for information.
Be Brief
As a general rule in dealing with the press, the more you say, the less impact you
will have. In other words, be concise but clear. This is especially important for the
electronic press as a message must be delivered to their viewers/listeners in no more than
60 seconds. Overwhelming media professionals with information is not effective. Brief
but targeted information/responses are much more effective.
Be Truthful
A top U.S. lobbyist once said: “Anything can be overcome with the media except a
lie. The truth will come out eventually, and it needs to come from you”. Being untruthful
to a media professional will likely destroy and organization’s or advocacy coalition’s
credibility, rending its message ineffective.
92
Be Credible
Issues gain credibility because the organizations promoting them have a history of
being knowledgeable, truthful and professional. Credibility usually ensures adequate press
coverage, as organizations and coalitions are viewed as media resources. It is important to
understand, however, that it may take years to build credibility but it only takes on
interview to destroy it. Organizations must value credibility and protect it at all costs.
Be Respectful
Media professionals have the right to respect from advocacy organization
representatives. Respect includes being conscious of a reporter’s time, providing truthful
and complete information, and professional behavior.
Be Calm
Remain composed at all times. Losing one’s composure may lead to
misstatements, mistakes and ultimately to erosion of credibility. A loss of credibility can
have drastic consequences for a business association that will limit its ability to serve as an
advocate for its members.
SECTION SIX: GENERATING GRASSROOTS SUPPORT
What is Grassroots Support?
Support that is developed from a broad base of stakeholders, usually business
association members, is called grassroots support. The term is corollary to grass, which
develops roots in order to grow. These roots must be watered and nurtured in order to
provide a solid support mechanism for the grass. While the roots are seldom seen, they are
the most important factors in the establishment of healthy grass. The same is true with
public policy advocacy campaigns.
Members and other stakeholders are like roots that must be “watered” with
information and “nurtured” with technical support in order to grow. Organizations that
provide information and support will establish a strong basis of support for their policy
positions. Since political officials in democratic countries desire votes above all else,
grassroots support is an effective way to gain their support for issues within a business
agenda.
Managing the Masses
Create a database of supporters
Development of an effective grassroots network requires creation of a
comprehensive database of supporters. Like with any database, the accuracy of the output
depends on the accuracy of the input. In other words, care must be taken to input complete
93
and accurate contact information, as well as other information that a database user may
need to access.
As mentioned earlier, the Afghanistan International Chamber of Commerce
developed a database of more than 2,000 individuals that attended its public policy
advocacy events. However, because many of these individuals lacked access to
technology, the most important information collected was their mobile phone numbers.
Sending information by mail was impossible, hand delivery was possible but required
significant logistical coordination, e-mail access was sporadic, but virtually every person
in the advocacy database had a mobile phone.
Sophisticated grassroots databases contain more than just contact information.
They also contain birth dates, company information, and issue interest. This information
allows database users to “segment” groups by age, business and/or interest. This helps to
focus the message by directing advocacy communications directly to the most interested
parties in the most appropriate ways.
Focus the message
As stated above, successful development of a grassroots network requires the
“packaging” of messages to individuals that have the most interest. For instance, in a
database containing 1,000 names of potential supporters, only 200 may be interested in a
particular issue. This being the case, a message should be developed that provide clear,
concise information, guidance and recommended action to those with interest in this issue.
The following grassroots alert is a good example of a focused advocacy message:
94
Figure 5.12 Sample Legislative (Grassroots) Alert
LEGISLATIVE ALERT
ACTION NEEDED ON PROPOSED CORPORATE TAX
Issue: The Ministry of Finance is considering passage of a 20% corporate tax in order to
comply with International Monetary Fund and World Bank recommendations. According
to the proposed law, the profit tax would be levied annually on all corporations employing
more than 20 persons. The 20% tax would by paid regardless of the corporation’s
financial position (e.g. whether or not it made a profit).
Our View: We believe that while the 20% profit tax is comparable to that in surrounding
countries, it should be phased in over a four-year period beginning with a rate of 5% for
the first year. Since this is a new tax, the arbitrary establishment of a 20% rate will no
doubt negatively impact the movement of companies from the informal to formal sectors.
We believe this tax rate, if initiated all at once, will have the net effect of forcing
companies out of business by providing yet another economic burden during a time of
market fluidity. The Minister of Finance stated recently: “We are instituting this tax first
because corporations have the most ability to pay”. While this may be true, corporations
also provide jobs…..jobs that will be lost if the government pursues immediate collection
of a 20% corporate tax. According to a study we commissioned, the results of which are
available on-line or at our office, a phased in corporate tax will actually generate more
revenue over the next five years than the arbitrary establishment of a 20% rate in the first
year. This is because the tax will grow as businesses grow instead of serving as an
impediment to business.
Opponent’s View: The Ministry of Finance argues that the establishment of a 20%
corporate tax is absolutely necessary in order to a) generate much needed government
revenue to offset lower donor support, b) develop a “tax paying” culture within the private
sector, and c) put in place a tax the ministry has the capacity to collect at this time. We
have no argument against that establishment of the tax, but rather at its establishment at a
20% rate from its initiation. We call for a four year phase in.
Action: Please attend our conference on Thursday, November 4 at 2:00 p.m. during which
we will make our recommendations to the Minister of Finance. Your show of support will
be critical. Also, we will have a petition available at the event for you to sign. If you
cannot attend, please come to our office and sign the petition, which is available at the
reception desk.
Note that the alert is written in a concise, conversational style and that it requests
specific action on the part of the reader. It also includes an overview of the opponent’s
point of view, which is important in promoting full understanding of the issue.
95
Communicate using a variety of mediums and tools
Another element in creating a strong grassroots development program is the
development of a multi-faceted communications program. Supporters should receive
timely information in a way that will best promote their involvement. This requires a
customized approach that may include communication through mass media sources such
as print, radio and television, as well as legislative alerts (like the above example),
telephone calls, e-mails and/or direct mail. A variety of tools will most likely be necessary
to reach a broad base of supporters, so focus on only one element, such as an e-mail alert,
will not achieve the desired results.
Create a sense of urgency
Supporters need to understand how an issue affects them today and how their
actions can have immediate results. If supporters feel that action on the issue can wait,
they will likely put it off. Urgency is best created through the articulation of clear action
steps that will elicit an immediate response. Typically, an individual will consider action
on an issue immediately after receiving an alert. If action is postponed, he/she will
probably never take action.
Keep supporters involved
Supporters should be apprised of the outcome of their actions. In case of the above
example, the Ministry of Finance rejected the Chamber’s recommendation. This was
communicated to grassroots supporters and the Chamber recommended continued action
as the proposed law transitioned from the Ministry of Finance to Parliament. This kept the
supporters involved in the issue until its culmination.
SECTION SEVEN: DIRECT ADVOCACY “LOBBYING” TECHNIQUES
What is Direct Advocacy?
Direct advocacy, sometimes called “lobbying”, is a technique used by
organizations and advocacy coalitions to take their message(s) directly to government
officials. Transparency is the cornerstone of effective direct advocacy. With this in mind,
the term must be differentiated from “influence peddling”. Influence peddling is a practice
whereby an organization or individual uses their influence in a non-transparent manner to
affect public policy. This could include bribes, gifts to government officials, favors or
other illegal or unethical practices. True direct advocacy assumes that rules, either through
law or organizational ethics, apply to the influencing of public policy and all actions taken
on an organization’s behalf are conducted within these rules. Influence peddling may
produce results in the short term, but it can severely damage an organization’s credibility,
rendering its advocacy efforts ineffective in the long term.
96
The Relationship Between Direct Advocacy and Power
Effective direct advocacy requires business associations and advocacy coalitions to
understand its relationship to power. The following points provide insight into this
relationship:
Figure 5.13 Direct Advocacy’s Relationship to Power
1. As stated in the advocacy formula outlined in Chapter One, power is the “holy
grail” of public policy advocacy. Organizations that have power also have
influence. Direct advocacy is a way to gain power through the development of
transparent relationships with key decision-makers.
2. Projecting power enhances advocacy, so direct advocacy is an integral component
in building consensus behind policy recommendations proposed by business
associations and advocacy coalitions.
3. Decision-makers respect power. Since direct advocacy “projects” power to outside
stakeholders, it is useful in influencing decision-makers to take the actions
recommended by organizations and coalitions that have power through grassroots
support and a strong advocacy system.
4. Power is not given, but built. Direct advocacy is one way to build power and
influence with key decision-makers.
Power is to direct advocacy what a rivet is to an airplane. An airplane may be able to fly
without one rivet, but structurally it will not be as strong and over time it may cause the
entire structure to fail. If organizations do not project power, they will ultimately fail, as
influence peddling will produce short-term results that do not last.
Direct Advocacy Success Tips
Examination of organizations that successfully conduct direct advocacy indicates
that the following elements are important in developing a “lobbying” plan:
Figure 5.14 Tips for Advocacy Professionals (“Lobbyists”)
1. Know the decision-maker: Make and maintain quality, transparent relationships
with decision-makers. Serve as an informational resource to that they realize the
value of the relationship. Relationships are built on trust, which comes through the
development of rapport. Advocacy professionals learn about the likes and dislikes
of decision-makers, as well as their hobbies, interests, and any other information
that can help them build rapport.
2. Build rapport with the gate-keeper: The “gatekeeper”, who is usually a
decision-makers executive assistant or scheduler, is important in that he or she
provides access. Building rapport with the gatekeeper can ensure that an advocacy
professional gains access to a decision-maker. Again, this rapport should be built
in a way that is transparent and within ethical and legal guidelines.
97
3. Know the Institution. Advocacy professionals spend many hours studying the
institution of government. By doing so, they learn the process of passing laws and
the key decision-makers at each step of the process. Armed with this information,
they can determine who and when to “lobby”.
4. Conduct a self-assessment. Organizations and/or advocacy coalitions should
conduct a self-assessment to determine their strengths and weaknesses from the
standpoint of the advocacy issue as well as organizationally. In addition, they
should assess the outcome of their advocacy campaign to determine ways that it
can be improved.
5. Assess the political climate. Advocacy professionals know that even if a
decision-maker wants to support a point of view, he or she may not be able to do so
if it is politically sensitive. Political sensitivity sometimes has to do with party
affiliation, but it can also be caused by timing (e.g. an issue comes up too close to
an election cycle) or relationships. It is best not to ask a decision-maker to support
an issue that will put him or her in a politically vulnerable position unless there is
no other choice.
6. Effectively identify and utilize resources. Resources could be financial,
manpower, equipment, or collaboration with other stakeholders. Regardless of the
type, harnessing resources is vital in the success of advocacy efforts.
7. Remain on the offensive. It has been said:” the best defense is a good offense”.
This is certainly true in the area of public policy advocacy. Advocacy
professionals understand that they must keep an issue in front of decision-makers
over a long period of time, so they cannot become complacent or fail to follow up.
They also try never to become defensive, but rather to anticipate potential issues
and/or problems and address them in advance.
8. Be informed. The most effective lobbyist is one who is well informed about the
issues to be discussed and the decision-maker, his/her voting record, background,
and constituent concerns.
9. Be prepared. Have data - preferably three kinds of data: a) general business data,
b) data on how the issue will affect your members, and c) a personal story - what is
happening to the business community. Know the organization’s position and the
rationale for that position.
10. Be friendly. Don't let persuasion turn into a threat.
11. Be open. Be prepared to listen and to speak. But be sure to structure the meeting so
that there are opportunities to do both.
12. Be calm. The better prepared one is in terms of having background information
and rationale for a position, the better he/she will be able to maintain a professional
demeanor.
13. Give examples. Most government officials are not businessmen or women by
profession, so the more examples given about the impact of legislation on the
business community, the more persuasive the argument will be.
14. Don't argue. Do not argue with a government official. An advocacy professional’s
responsibility is to present your case, not necessarily to win the case.
15. Don't apologize. Never apologize or undercut your position. Remember you are
speaking on behalf of your members.
98
16. Don't get sidetracked. Don't let listening to the decision-maker’s point of view
turn into getting sidetracked on to other issues. Do not get on the defensive and do
not agree with negative statements about your organization or issue.
17. Don't be afraid to admit that you don't know. Some government officials may
intentionally attempt to deal with issues that you do not have a solid grounding in.
Some may ask specific questions for which you have no answers. If you're not sure
of an answer, say, "I'll check and get back to you." Then, follow up - get in touch
with experts within your association and find out the answer and let your legislator
know what the answer was.
18. Find common ground. Even if a government official does not support the position
you are presenting, he/she probably believes in the value of private sector growth.
But if he/she doesn't even believe in that, every official still has the responsibility
of attending to the concerns of all his/her constituents.
19. Don't give up. Continue to keep the decision-maker informed about the impact of
an issue, even after it has passed. If they voted to support a program that works, let
them know how it works. If they opposed a program that was successful, let them
know it works. If they opposed a program that wasn't enacted, let them know the
need still exists.
The Direct Advocacy Axiom
Direct advocacy professionals share a set of “axioms” around which their approach
to creating influence in built. The following are the axiom’s major components:
Figure 5.15 The Direct Advocacy Axiom
1. Honesty is the ONLY policy. A well-known U.S. lobbyist said, “You can lie and
win a few times. Enjoy them because eventually your sins will find you out and
you won’t ever win again”. Dishonesty will catch up with an organization, eroding
its credibility and rending it ineffective in the policy debate. Examples of this
abound, but none are so graphic as that of Enron, the U.S.-based energy company
that built its advocacy program on deception. After years of success, the deceit
was exposed and Enron immediately became a pariah within government circles.
2. Today’s opponent may be tomorrow’s ally. Professional advocates understand
that long-term success depends on “keeping bridges intact”. Meaning they try
never to “burn a bridge” between themselves and an opponent because they may
need that person or organization in the future. Personalizing disagreements not
only damages credibility, but it also creates long-term conflicts between
individuals and groups that can severely erode effectiveness.
3. Be civil, no matter how rude opponents may be. Part of maintaining
relationships is the ability to respond to any situation with professionalism.
Repaying rude behavior with more rude behavior may feel good, but it will damage
the organization’s or advocacy coalition’s credibility. An advocacy professional
understands that his/her actions reflect on the organization or coalition that he/she
represents. With this in mind, professional behavior is of paramount importance.
4. Never minimize or bypass a decision-maker’s staff. In many countries,
representatives of advocacy organizations feel “minimized” if they do not have
99
direct access to government officials. Often, this means they bypass staff members
as they feel they are “unimportant” to the advocacy process. This usually creates
long-term animosity that will manifest itself in inappropriate ways. Advocacy
professionals realize that “gatekeepers” (individuals that provide access to senior
government officials) and key staff members are critical in the direct advocacy
process and thus should be cultivated.
5. Immediately correct information mistakes. In the event an organization or
advocacy coalition inadvertently provides a decision-maker with misinformation, it
should immediately correct the problem by apologizing and correcting the error.
Mistakes happen, but organization’s that are proactive in addressing them will
minimize damage and in some cases even gain in credibility because of their
honest approach to direct advocacy.
6. More information is not necessarily better. The general rule for advocacy
professionals is to “provide enough information but not too much”. Too much
information can be confusing or overwhelming to the point that it is set aside.
Realizing that decision-makers are busy, advocacy professionals learn to condense
information to only that which is of paramount importance.
7. Repeatedly thank supporters. “Thank you” is a powerful word. Advocacy
professionals thank not only their grassroots supporters, but also the decision-
makers that support their point of view by “casting a vote” in their favor.
Direct Advocacy Success Story
The following success story was written by John Engler, a former Governor of the
U.S. State of Michigan and currently the President of the National Association of
Manufacturers (NAM). It highlights the commitment of one organization and its members
in conducting direct advocacy under difficult circumstances:
Figure 5.16 Direct Advocacy Success Story: National Association of Manufacturers
When hundreds of manufacturers from across the country traveled to Washington last
month to make personal visits to Capitol Hill, a winter storm greeted them. Sleet, snow
and ice shut down the city just as members of the National Association of Manufacturers
(NAM) arrived for our biennial outreach program to government officials called, “72
Hours to Educate and Celebrate.” What to do? Cancel or reschedule the more than 100 Hill
meetings? Watch television until the streets cleared? Drink coffee and make phone calls
instead? Hardly. Manufacturers are skilled adapters, and winter’s wrath only invigorated
NAM’s members. After all, we now had a captive audience: Congress was stuck in town,
too. America’s manufacturers therefore continued on with their schedules, hearing from
national leaders such as Vice President Dick Cheney and House Majority Whip James
Clyburn (D-S.C.), who gave important addresses on the manufacturing economy. Over the
next 72 hours, the several hundred registrants for the NAM program completed 110 visits
to government offices, the vast majority with their respective member of Congress. Like
most Washington-headquartered national trade associations, the NAM’s staff can be
100
counted on to lobby on issues with professionalism, skill and intelligence. But for passion
and real-world experience, our power comes from beyond our members throughout the
country.
With dedication and energy, the businessmen and women who belong to the NAM made
their personal contacts with members and their staffs, successfully communicating
manufacturing’s message about four priority issues:
1. The critical importance of a comprehensive national energy strategy.
2. The need for a permanent and strengthened research and development tax credit;
3. The benefit of the Extending Permanent Trade Promotion Authority to encourage new
trade agreements that lower foreign barriers to U.S. manufacturing exports;
4. The opposition to House Resolution 800, the “card-check” legislation that would
eliminate secret-ballot union elections.
As for card check, given the number of cosponsors signed onto H.R. 800, we had no
illusions about preventing passage of the astoundingly misnamed Employee Free Choice
Act. Nevertheless, manufacturers still wanted members of Congress to understand the
depth of their opposition to legislation that abrogates a basic democratic principle, that of
the secret ballot.
Our dedicated activism did have an impact.
Cheney, in a breakfast address to NAM members, for the first time expressed the Bush
administration’s firm intention to veto the card-check bill. That statement and the NAM’s
lobbying shaped subsequent House debate and have helped energize Senate opposition to
the measure.
On energy, an NAM audience welcomed Majority Whip Clyburn’s discussion of cellulosic
ethanol, nuclear power and clean-coal technology — the kind of diverse energy profile this
country requires to keep its manufacturing sector competitive.
Manufacturers heard from a number of other lawmakers throughout the 72 hours of events,
including Sen. Susan Collins (R-Maine) and Reps. Melissa Bean (D-Ill.) and Stephanie
Tubbs Jones (D-Ohio), who spoke at a Women in Manufacturing Breakfast. These
appearances provided much-appreciated opportunities to exchange ideas.
101
till, the most valuable part of 72 Hours to Educate and Celebrate occurred in the one-on-
one and small-group sessions with the members of Congress.
“Truly exceptional” is how one NAM member described his congressional visits. Steve
Lethert, controller of Wood’s Power-Grip Co., traveled from Laurel, Mont., to talk about
the research tax credit, competition from Asia and the coming energy crunch — all critical
concerns for this small manufacturer of vacuum-lifting equipment.
His experience demonstrates the real benefit of being there in person. The NAM outreach
was the first time Lethert had the opportunity to meet with Congressman Denny Rehberg
(R-Mont.), who spent a generous half-hour talking issues. Despite being a small-sized
manufacturer, Power-Grip makes profitable use of the research and development tax
credit, Lethert said, a point he was able to elaborate upon in person.
Following a good meeting with the staff of Sen. Max Baucus (D-Mont.), the senator made
a point of stopping by, as well. The Panamanian ambassador was in the office,
introductions were made, and now Power-Grip is on a list of companies for which the
senator hopes to arrange a Central American trade mission.
Sen. Jon Tester’s (D-Mont.) staffers were also helpful, making the time on the Hill
“beneficial and worthwhile,” Lethert reported.
Lethert’s activities also capture how 72 Hours to Educate and Celebrate carried a strong
bipartisan emphasis. Energy, trade and research and development are all issues that cross
party lines, and Democrats and Republicans alike expressed real interest in working with
the NAM. We’ll take them up on it, you can be sure.
102
CHAPTER SIX
ORGANIZATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS AND MARKETNG
SECTION ONE: OVERVIEW OF COMMUNICATIONS AND MARKETING
Much has been written about the communication structure necessary to ensure that
business associations tell their stories in a timely, effective and consistent way. There are
studies that discuss communications as a science, referring ad nauseum to statistics
proving that an organization’s ability to communicate is directly proportional to its ability
to create empowered members and thus move toward sustainability. In many cases,
however, these studies fail to acknowledge that since organizations are led by people,
interpersonal communications skills are also essential.
The four essential elements of business association communications are planning,
delivery, outcomes, and evaluation, which are defined in more detail below:
Planning
Planning is integral to the development of a successful communications effort, as it
allows an organization to analyze its messages, their delivery, and the effect they have on
stakeholders. As with other planning processes, stakeholder input is important in the
development of a progressive strategy. Typically, such a strategy will have five primary
focal areas:
Definition of Target Audience: While seeming obvious, a business association’s
target audience may not be as easily identified as previously thought. Members, of course,
should be the core audience, but increasingly organizations are finding it important to
disseminate information to other stakeholder groups as well. Non-members and former
members represent target audiences such as political officials, international donors and
non-governmental organizations. During the planning process, it is important to
accurately identify the target audience to be reached, as making a mistake in this area may
unnecessarily narrow an organization’s message, thereby rendering it ineffective. In
transitional economies an interesting communications paradigm has developed, as a
number of organizations, especially those with a national scope, target their messages to
political officials, international donors and NGOs, but rarely communicate effectively with
members. This anomaly provides interesting insight into the development of business
associations in transitional and post-conflict countries. Gilliam Pierre, President of the
International Chamber of Commerce of Sri Lanka (ICCSL) contends that this paradigm
developed because organizational leaders believe that their success is more dependent on
government and donors than on members. In many cases, the organizations are
established by public law that makes membership compulsory. Because of this, the
organizations tend to communicate more effectively with their benefactors (government
and donors) than with the private sector, which is obliged to provide support regardless of
the organizations’ effectiveness.
103
A growing number of business associations are breaking this paradigm, however, after
realizing that regardless of membership status (mandatory or voluntary), communication
with members is a critical factor in advancement up the sustainability and member
empowerment pyramids discussed in chapter one. For this reason, they have expanded
their communications strategies to include members as their central audience.
Definition of Message(s) to be Delivered: A communications plan should also
include the message(s) the association wants to send to its identified audiences. The
following is an overview of typical audiences that are included in a communications plan,
and the message that may be the most effective in reaching them.
Members: Members want to know that the organization is acting in their best interests.
They need to have a thorough understanding of its governance structure, they need to
identify with its leaders, and they need to utilize its services. For this reason, members
require on-going communication utilizing methods that will ensure their acceptance of the
message. Many business associations publish monthly newsletters and magazines for
mass distribution to members, only to find out that the members do not read them. Other
organizations utilize e-mail, telephone and fax communication as additional member
communication techniques. Experience indicates that when utilized in a vacuum, these are
also relatively ineffective techniques. According to studies conducted by the U.S.
Chamber of Commerce and other membership-oriented organizations, there is no single
mechanism that is the “best” for communicating with members. Rather, customization of
the message and the delivery mechanism(s) is the key to success. Members gain
information in different ways. Some will read a newsletter or magazine, others will search
a website, and still others utilize e-mail as a primary form of gathering and disbursing
information. This being the case, business associations that develop a communications
strategy that includes only one or two information delivery mechanisms may find that their
members are out of touch. A communications plan should therefore include a number of
delivery mechanisms that are customized to address the way individual members want to
receive information.
The best way to understand how members want to receive information is to ask
them. Organizations may utilize surveys, personal visits, and/or focus groups to identify
preferred ways of communication. Often, this question appears on a new member
application ensuring that from day one, the organization knows how the new member
wants to receive information. In summary, communicating with members is most
effective when it is done strategically and in a customized way.
Non-Members: Business associations that value membership recruitment often
target specific messages to non-members. To do this effectively, the organization’s
leaders must understand a) the reasons why the targeted companies are not members and
b) the communications techniques and messages that will be the most effective in reaching
them. Once this is established, information can be provided to non-members in a strategic
way. Usually, this information includes an overview of specific activities the organization
is undertaking that will directly impact a non-member business. Some association
104
executives even personalize communication with non-members through personal
invitations, hand-written notes and company visits.
International Donors: In transitional countries where foreign assistance is
provided by a variety of donors, it is common for business associations to develop lines of
communication that focus on future support. In doing so, it is important to a) understand
what types of assistance a donor agency likes to provide, b) build a transparent and close
relationship with one or more agency representatives, c) provide ongoing information
about the association and its activities, and d) maintain visibility and credibility by
assisting the agency without asking for funding or support. By doing this, an organization
develops a close relationship that may eventually lead to support.
Public Officials: As stated in Chapter 5, business associations play an important
role in public policy advocacy. Effectiveness in serving as an advocate for the private
sector is largely dependent on consistent communication with public officials. Of all the
possible strategies that can be implemented, none are more effective than one-on-one
communication that comes through the development of mutual respect and trust.
Ultimately, this is the communications tool most used by effective advocacy-based
organizations. Of course, it is important for public officials, whether they be elected or
senior bureaucrats, to receive ongoing information about the organization’s activities as
well. This can be done in a variety of ways, but some of the most effective have proven to
be the following:
1. Networking Events: Networking events that include both the business community and
public officials provide excellent communications opportunities. It provides an informal
way for an organization to deliver its message to public officials, as well as allows
members to see their association’s leaders at work. Public officials tend to participate in
networking events because they are non-confrontational and informal.
2. Public Meetings: On special occasions, when an organization has an important
message to communicate, it can do so by means of a public meeting. This is a meeting
that involves both public officials and private citizens (usually members) and is conducted
within a formal setting. Public officials usually speak on a topic that is the meeting’s focal
point after which the organization’s leadership and members may respond either through
questions or comments. Public officials tend to dislike these type meetings as they are
often confrontational and seldom do more than raise the visibility of an issue. They are
usually considered to be “complaint sessions” that achieve little more than media
coverage. For an organization that wants to highlight a particular issue through the mass
media, however, public meetings can be effective ways of doing so.
3. Business Agenda: As mentioned in Chapter 5, a business agenda is a collection of a
business association’s public policy recommendations on selected issues. It is usually
published both in hard-copy and on-line and delivered to targeted public officials. While
the importance of such an agenda cannot be overstated, follow up is the key to its effective
utilization. Many associations use the National Business Agenda as a springboard for
conversation with public officials with which they already have an excellent rapport.
105
Public officials typically appreciate receiving a document that has well-constructed
recommendations, but they require follow up to ensure implementation.
4. Press Conferences: Press conferences have a definite place in an organizational
communications strategy. However, overuse of press conferences can backfire in that the
press will stop responding. Press conferences should be held only when an issue is
important enough to generate public interest or when an organization has an important
message it wants to disseminate through the mass media. Public officials typically do not
like to participate in press conferences they do not control and they specifically dislike
having to defend themselves against accusations made to the press in a public forum. This
being the case, press conferences should typically not be used as mechanisms to criticize
public officials unless all other options have been exhausted.
Definition of Roles and Responsibilities: Once the audience has been identified
and the message/communication tools designed for each, the plan should define roles and
responsibilities. Specifically, it should establish areas of responsibility for:
Interaction with the Press: Typically, the Chief Paid Executive (executive director or
secretary general) and the Chief Elected Leader (president or chairman) will be responsible
for talking with the press or making any public statements on the organization’s behalf. In
some organizations, it is only the Chief Elected Leader. In some larger organizations, the
plan will designate a “spokesperson” to interact with the mass media on an ongoing basis.
Typically, this is a former journalist or public relations specialist that is employed by the
organization and works with its leadership on press-related activities.
Interaction with Members: Usually, the membership director will bear primary
responsibility for overseeing interaction with members. He/she will work with the
organization’s communications department (if it has one) to ensure that members are
receiving information in a timely, effective and customized manner. The membership
director also oversees communication with non-members and former members.
Interaction with Donors and/or Public Officials: In most cases, the Chief Paid
Executive or Chief Elected Leader has primary responsibility for interacting with donors
and/or public officials. In some cases, members of the executive committee, board
members and senior staff members will also be authorized to meet with donors and public
officials on the organization’s behalf, but in these cases their roles are specifically defined
within the communications plan.
Creation of a Timeline: A communication’s plan should also include a timeline
for each activity. For instance, if the plan calls for the establishment of monthly
networking events to promote public-private partnerships, a timeline for its
implementation should be included. Timelines create accountability within the plan,
ensuring that activities/programs are completed on time. Monthly meetings should be held
to monitor the plan’s implementation and revise the timeline if necessary.
106
Creation of a Budget: A communications plan is impotent unless tied to an
implementation budget. The budget should accurately reflect the plan’s activities and
should be based on quantifiable information. The budget should also reflect an
organization’s priorities by channeling resources toward communications tools that will
provide the highest return on investment.
Delivery
As stated above, implementation should be monitored on an ongoing basis. While
monthly is the paradigm, some organizations choose to review and revise the
communications plan every quarter. Whatever the frequency, the individuals responsible
for overseeing implementation of various plan components should address any issues that
will cause the timeline to slip or that will entail an overall change in the plan’s strategy.
Outcomes
A communications plan should contain a section on the outcomes that are to be
achieved. As in any strategic plan, outcomes should be measurable so the organization can
easily compare actual results to those planned. As stated in Chapter 3, it is helpful to
begin the development of the plan with the outcomes in mind, thereby developing goals
and activities to achieve the outcomes. This process-oriented approach reduces the danger
of designing a strategy that leads to unexpected or unwanted results.
Evaluation
In addition to scheduled monthly or quarterly evaluations, the communications
plan should be reviewed annually to measure its effectiveness over the prior period and its
relevance for the future. It is recommended that stakeholder input is solicited every year,
as priorities and attitudes tend to change over short periods of time. Evaluation assumes a
comparison of results to projected outcomes. Organizations should consider moving away
from initiatives that are producing limited results and toward those that appear to be
reaching the target audience(s) with the appropriate message(s).
Summary and Conclusions
Communications, both internal to the organization and external to its stakeholders,
is vital in the creation of a valuable brand. In highly-functioning organizations,
communications is as much a part of their culture as programs and services. They realize
that what they do does not matter if their stakeholders do not know. Every organization
has a brand, either positive or negative, that is built largely through its ability to
communicate its vision, mission, objectives and results to the appropriate audiences.
107
SECTION TWO: THE COMMUNICAITONS AUDIT
Result of Poor Communication
According to employee surveys, lack of communication is traditionally at the top
of the list of frustrations encountered by organizational staff members. Even in small
organizations where employees work in close proximity to one another, communication is
often lacking. Lack of communication causes a chain reaction that permeates the entire
organization, eroding efficiency and undermining moral. The following cycles shows in a
graphic way the potential outcome of poor communication:
Lack of communication within an organization is defined as the failure to provide
adequate information to staff members as to what should be done, why it should be done,
how it will impact the organization, and when it needs to be done. In many cases,
employees are given a list of assignments without knowing the background information as
to what their completion of the assignments will accomplish and why they are important.
This initially creates a lack of understanding, which leads to a lack of direction. Because
an employee does not understand the assignment(s), he or she may move in the wrong
direction from the beginning without even realizing it. Once this occurs the quality of
his/her effort begins to suffer because the initial lack of information did not provide the
framework within which the assignment(s) could be completed to the highest standard of
excellence. Lack of quality typically produces a lack of results. Even if the assignment(s)
is completed by the deadline date, it will likely not achieve the results expected, especially
Lack of
Understanding
Lack of Direction
Lack of
Communication
Lack of Quality
Lack of Results
108
since from the beginning the employee did not have adequate information to complete the
task(s). Lack of results, of course, produces lack of satisfaction on the part of
management, leaving them most often wondering why the employee did not complete the
assignment(s) properly. In other words, there are many times when lack of achievement of
results is a communications problem caused by management rather than the lack of an
employee’s knowledge, commitment or work ethic.
An incident that occurred at a well known international non-governmental
organization (NGO) provides a good example of how a cycle of communications
shortcomings can end in dubious results. The organization’s leadership decided to respond
to a major Request for Proposal in Colombia. The project proposed by the donor
organization was more than $121 million over five years and therefore was far larger than
any project on which the organization had bid previously. Its senior management elected
to conduct due diligence to determine whether or not it should submit a proposal to
“prime” the project, meaning that it would be the lead implementing organization. It asked
one of its management team to travel to Colombia and conduct the due diligence. His only
instructions were, “We may want to submit a proposal so your job is to find out whether or
not this is feasible”. The employee requested additional staff support to conduct the due
diligence but was told it was not available. So, armed with a laptop and a list of questions,
he flew to Colombia and over two weeks conducted the assessment. He filed a report with
senior management that offered his strong concerns about the organization’s ability to
compete for this project. He expressed even stronger concerns about what would occur if
the organization won the project, as it would greatly stretch its internal management and
oversight capabilities as well as its financial division.
He heard nothing from senior management for ten days, despite his inquiries as to
the project’s status. Finally, just two weeks before the proposal deadline he was told the
project had been “green lighted” and that he and a small team should draft a proposal. For
the next two weeks, he and his team worked non-stop to write the proposal, obtain partner
participation, and develop a workable budget. Finally, with two days to spare, the team
submitted the final proposal to the organization’s executive director for review prior to its
submission. As the clock ticked closer and closer to the deadline, the team leader asked
numerous times for permission to send the proposal. Finally, only five hours before the
deadline the executive director called the team leader and said. “Your proposal is
outstanding. It is right on the money based on the RFP and it is quite likely that we would
compete favorably for the project. In fact, it is so good I am afraid we would win and we
just do not have the internal capacity, in our headquarters or the field, to implement this
expansive a program. This being the case, I commend your effort but we are not going to
submit the proposal”.
Of course, the proposal development team was devastated and its leader
discouraged. A few days later he was told that the senior managers that authorized the due
diligence trip to Colombia and subsequently green-lighted the project for the development
of a proposal had not at any point informed the executive director of the RFP’s nature and
scope. Their mindset was, “We need to learn to bid on larger projects and even though he
probably won’t approve submitting this proposal, it will be a good learning experience”.
109
Naturally, this was not communicated to the proposal development team. In essence, they
spent hundreds of hours on a “practice exercise” that never had a chance for approval. The
members of the teams went back to their previous jobs both confused and demoralized.
The team leader also returned to his previous job, but only after telling senior management
in no uncertain terms that he had worked on his last proposal.
This scenario could be replayed over and over within organizations. The situation
might differ, but the sequence of events would be similar. Lack of internal communication
is therefore the “first domino to fall” in a chain reaction that eventually produces
unfortunate and sometimes cataclysmic results. At a minimum it creates frustration that
over time manifests itself as bitterness, lack of loyalty and reduced commitment. In other
words, an employee’s lack of effort may stem from the fact that he/she is frustrated by lack
of communication and eventually gives up.
While no communications process is foolproof, there are a number of organizations
worldwide that have developed systems that work effectively. Establishment of such a
system begins with the organization’s acknowledgement that internal communication is
important and that its staff will benefit from a thorough understanding of the
organization’s history, strategy, vision, activities and results. This requires support from
senior management as well as the organization’s board of directors.
Communications Audit
Organizations that are interested in developing strong communications processes
typically begin by identifying the gaps that exist in their current communications structure.
This is best done by conducting a communications audit. A communications audit is
defined as a formal or informal assessment of an organization’s communications practices.
Communications expert Julia Coffman identifies four phases of analysis relative to
implementation of a communications audit.
8
Step One: Understand international best practices
According to Ms. Coffman, there are sixteen essential organizational
communications practices that fit into three broad categories: strategy, implementation,
and support/integration The following list not only outlines specific practices in each of
these areas but can be used as a checklist during the communications audit.
8
Coffman, Julia. “Strategic Communications Audits”, October 2004.
110
Figure 6.1 Essential Strategic Communications Practices
Strategic Communications Practices Quality Criteria/Standards
a. Identify the vision
The communications vision is aligned
with, but distinct from, the organization’s
overall mission.
b. Choose goals and
outcomes
Goals and outcomes are well defined,
measurable, and help guide a defined plan
of action.
c. Select target
audiences
Audiences are specific (not the general
public) and include key decision makers
or individuals with influence on the issue.
d. Develop messages
Messages are specific, clear, persuasive,
reflect audience values, and include a
solution or course of action.
e. Identify credible
messengers
Messengers are seen as credible by the
target audiences, and can be recruited and
available to the cause.
f. Choose
communications
mechanisms/outlets
Outlets (e.g. both in the air (media) and on
the ground) are chosen for their access
and availability to target audiences
Strategy
g. Scan the context
and competition
Risks and contextual variables that can
affect communications success are
identified and factored into planning when
possible.
111
h. Develop effective
materials
Materials are developed in attractive,
accessible, and varied formats for
maximum exposure and visibility.
i. Build valuable
partnerships
Linkages exist with internal and external
stakeholders who can help align with and
carry the message.
j. Train messengers
Internal and external messengers are
trained in key messages and are consistent
in their delivery.
k. Conduct steady
outreach
Outreach and dissemination to audiences
through multiple outlets is regular and
sustained.
Implementation
l. Monitor and
evaluate
Activities and outcomes are regularly
monitored and evaluated for purposes of
accountability and continuous
improvement.
m. Support
communications at the
leadership level
Management understands and supports
communications as an integral part of
organizational viability and success.
n. Earmark sufficient
resources
Fundraising regularly includes dedicated
resources for communications practice.
Support and
Integration
o. Integrate
communications
throughout the
organization
Communications is seen as an integral
part of every organizational project or
strategy.
112
p. Involve staff at all
levels
Communications is not seen as an isolated
function; most if not all staff members
have some knowledge and/or participation
in communications efforts.
Step Two: Identify the possible levels of communications practice
In order to determine the best strategy for initiating a successful communications
structure, an organization must first analyze its current practices and look for gaps between
these practices and the international best practices model shown in the table above. The
following is an overview of the Carnegie Mellon Software Engineering Institute’s Capable
Maturity Model ®. This model is widely used by organizations and corporations to assess
organizational maturity. In this case, it has been adapted to focus on communications that
occurs within nascent versus mature organizations:
Figure 6.2 The Communications Maturity Scale
The Levels of Communication Maturity:
0= Communications effort not performed.
1=Communications effort is ad hoc. .
2=Communications effort is planned.
3=Communications effort is institutionalized.
4=Communications effort is evaluated.
5=Communications effort is optimized.
0
1
2
3
4
5
113
In order to fully comprehend the importance of analyzing an organization’s current
communications strategy, additional insight is needed as to the levels mentioned above.
Level One: Ad Hoc
As stated above, the communications effort is unorganized. Any successes that are
achieved are usually due to one or two individuals. In many cases, ad hoc efforts go over
budget because there is little oversight and minimal efficiency.
Level Two: Planned
The communications effort is planned and deliberate. Resources are allocated and
responsibilities assigned. However, the process is still at the beginning stage and may
involve only one or two individuals.
Level Three: Institutionalized
The communications effort is routine and part of the organization’s culture.
International best practices have been implemented. Practices are known and coordinated
within and outside the organization.
Level Four: Evaluated
The communications effort is evaluated and analyzed. Measures of performance
are tracked in order to better predict future performance.
Level Five: Optimized
The communications effort is one of the organization’s core priorities. It is
continually analyzed and improved based on internal and external changes.
Step Three: Assess current communications performance and capacity
It takes both time and commitment for an organization to move from a
communications effort that is either not done or is ad hoc to one that is optimized.
However, the knowledge of where an organization’s effort currently fits onto this scale is
imperative in making the adjustments necessary to progress from an immature to mature
communications effort.
The main tasks in step three are the collection of data about communications
practices and the use of that data to assess current capacity. The following matrix is a
useful tool in analyzing each of the sixteen factors that are critical to a strong
communications effort.
114
0 1 2 3 4 5
Strategy
Not
Performed Ad Hoc Planned Institutionalized Evaluated Optimized
a. Identify the vision
b. Choose goals and outcomes
c. Select target audiences
d. Develop messages
e. Identify messengers
f. Choose communications outlets
g. Scan the context and competition
Implementation
h. Develop effective materials
i. Build valuable partnerships
j. Train messengers
k. Conduct outreach
l. Monitor and evaluate
Support and Integration
m. Support communications
n. Earmark sufficient resources
o. Integrate communications
throughout the organization
p. Involve staff at all levels
115
Once the decision to conduct a communications audit has been made, an
organization’s leadership must determine whether the audit will be internal or external.
An internal audit will likely be less costly and provide a mechanism to increase the
capacity of staff and volunteer leaders. However, it may also culminate in a lack of
objectivity. Outside experts will be more expensive, but will most likely provide an
unbiased assessment in a timelier manner.
After deciding on whether to conduct an internal or external audit, an
organization’s leadership should then determine which methods it will use to conduct the
assessment. Some of the most common are the following:
Interviews: This is probably the most common audit method. The person
conducting the audit will interview staff, volunteer leaders, members, and other
stakeholders to gain their input on the organization’s current communications effort.
Surveys: This is the second most common method, but typically produces less
reliable results. If the survey is structured correctly, however, it can be conducted rather
inexpensively and within a short timeframe.
Critical Incident Analysis: Staff is asked to describe, through an interview or
questionnaire, specific effective and ineffective communications experiences and or
process within the organization.
Network Analysis: This establishes a chart of how communications flow within
and outside the organization. It reveals the organization’s communications structure,
which may be very different from its organizational structure.
Participant Observation: The person conducting the audit actually participates
in organizational activities to determine effective and ineffective communications
practices.
Document Review: This involves a review and assessment of all
communications documents, whether internal or external.
Focus Groups: These are groups of five to fifteen people that meet together in a
moderated discussion to respond to open-ended questions about the organization’s
communications process.
Most organizations use a combination of these methods when conducting a
communications audit. The following table compares the potential audit methods.
116
Figure 6.3 Comparison of Communications Audit Methods
Method Time Expended Cost
Information
Yield
Interviews
30-60 minutes
each
Moderately
Expensive In-Depth Data
Surveys
20-30 minutes
each
Moderately
Expensive
Standardized
Data
Critical Incident Analysis
20-30 minutes
each Inexpensive
Specific
examples
Network Analysis
20-30 minutes
each
Expensive
(Software) Process flow
Participant Observation Variable Expensive (Time) Process flow
Document Review Variable Expensive (Time)
Materials,
Message
Focus Groups 1-2 hours
Moderately
Expensive In-Depth Data
Step Four: Identify areas of improvement
Once an audit is conducted the next step is to identify areas for improvement. No
organization will score a “5” in all sixteen communications areas, so there will always be
room for improvement. The determination of where an organization should be must be
based on its capabilities rather than a “pie in the sky” plan that will lead to disappointment.
The following is a sample communications audit showing areas where improvement can be
made.
Figure 6.4 Communications Audit of Hypothetical Organization
5. Optimized
4. Evaluated
3.
Institutionalized
2. Planned
1. Ad Hoc
0. Not
Performed
Vision
Goals
Audiences
Messages
Messengers
Mechanisms
Content
Materials
Partnerships
Messengers
Outreach
Evaluation
Support
Resources
Integration
Staff
Involvement
STRATEG
STRATEGY
IMPLEMENTATION SUPPORT/
INTEGRATION
117
Current Performance: The hypothetical organization certainly does
communications planning, but it is not a top priority. Once completed, the
communications strategy typically sits on a shelf with little review until there is a
communications lapse, after which it is pulled off the shelf and revised. Resources
intended for communications are often diverted to other areas and the staff has little
involvement in the overall strategy. Overall, there is major room for improvement in all
but six areas.
Areas for Improvement: The hypothetical organization should start with a review
of its vision and goals. However, there is a danger that the organization will try to
address all its deficient areas at once. This has proven to be a self-defeating strategy in
the past. Instead, the hypothetical organization chooses two areas for dramatic
improvement: content and staff involvement. These two areas are likely to generate
“ripple effect” changes throughout the communications strategy and thus are key areas of
focus. They provide the organization with the best chance for lasting change.
Step Five: Refine, practice and repeat the process as needed
The final step in the assessment of organizational communications is the
development of specific recommendations for how actual communications practices can
be enhanced. These recommendations should be based on collected data and they should
be prioritized to provide the organization with a focused action plan.
While formal communications audits should be conducted every five years,
informal audits should be done more frequently. A good time for an audit is when an
organization is preparing to undergo significant changes in leadership or programming or
when a critical incident occurs that makes an audit necessary.
Summary and Conclusions
It has been said that “A journey of a thousand miles begins with a first step”. A
communications audit is the first step for an organization that wants to increase the
impact of its message and ensure good information flow. The audit allows an
organization to focus on its communications strategy but does not evaluate the overall
effectiveness of its effort. This can only be done through specific evaluation that is
conducted on an ongoing basis. The audit is the first step toward the development of a
communications strategy, but there are many more that must be taken to ensure success.
118
SECTION THREE: COMMUNICATING WITH MEMBERS
The Importance of Communicating with Members
One of the key elements of BearingPoint’s business association development
methodology is the creation of visibility. Members support organizations that they
perceive to be highly visible in the industry or community. Visibility, as long as it is
positive, ultimately leads to credibility. When built on a foundation of strong governance
and programming, the elements of visibility and credibility will eventually pay off in the
creation of organizational sustainability, a point at which empowered members become
virtual “customers for life”. The following two pyramids, which were featured earlier in
the guidebook, show this phenomenon in graphic form by highlighting the link between
the development of sustainability and the emergence of member support.
Communications with members is paramount in moving them up the pyramid from
uninformed to empowered. Figure 6.5 highlights organizational sustainability while
figure 6.6 highlights its effect on members.
Figure 6.5 The Sustainability Pyramid
T
h
Credibility
Sustainability
Visibility
Programs
/
Services
Governance
Must be powerful
Must be believable
Must be noticed
Must be strategic and
demand-driven
Must be transparent
The
Sustainability
P
y
ramid
119
Figure 6.6 The Empowerment Pyramid
In both cases, communication is the engine that drives the organization and its
members to increasingly higher degrees of development. This is especially true in the
area of membership development, where communication is a major factor in transforming
an uninformed member to an empowered one. One organizational executive said it this
way, “Results are important, but they mean nothing if your members don’t know you
achieved them”.
Successful communication with members begins within the organization itself, as
it is difficult to communicate with members in an effective way if internal
communication is lacking. Organizations that make communications a priority typically
focus both internally and externally, with the latter being devoted predominantly to its
members or potential members.
An analysis of organizational communications often shows gaps in perception
between the organization and its members. One communications director summed it up
by saying, “What we have here is a failure to communicate”. This phrase, borrowed
from the 1967 movie “Cool Hand Luke”, highlights the reality that lack of
communication is often misinterpretation. Misinterpretation arises when one or more of
the communicating parties sees only part of the overall picture and therefore does not
effectively present their message.
Committed
Empowered
Involved
Interested
Uninformed
E
m
Value representation and
sustain it.
Believe in representation and
are willing to support it.
Acknowledge representation
and become part of it.
Acknowledge representation
but don’t know how it works.
Want representation but
don’t know how to get it.
The
Empowerment
Pyramid
120
Sheila Birnbach, an organizational effectiveness expert, provides a great example
of this. “An iceberg sits in the water. We see the tip of the iceberg but there is more
below the surface of the water that we don’t see. Misinterpretation develops when we
communicate below the water line”. In other words, organizations can only communicate
what they see, and if they do not have the full picture, they may make significant errors in
judgment.
For instance, if a member always pays his membership dues on time an
organization usually assumes that he/she is satisfied. However, this assumption could be
far from correct, as there may be a variety of other factors that precipitate the member’s
dues payment. He/she may actually know very little about the organization and may not
even understand why he/she pays his/her dues. For an organization to assume that a dues
paying member is a satisfied member is a grave mistake.
When developing an effective member communications program, an organization
should focus on the following ten axioms:
Figure 6.7 Ten Axioms for Effective Member Communications
1. Communicate “above the water line”: Try to see the whole picture.
Communicate with members based on what you hear, see, and experience rather
than just on what you see. Assumptions are recipes for disaster from a
communications standpoint.
2. Listen to what members need instead of communicating to them what you have.
Ask members how they want your organization to communicate with them.
Don’t just communicate in the way that is most comfortable for your
organization.
3. Assess communications strengths and challenges. Understand what you do well
from a communications standpoint and what you do not do well. Build on your
organization’s strengths and minimize its weaknesses.
4. Say what you mean and mean what you say. Send clear, concise and accurate
messages. Members become frustrated with double talk. They need complete
information in order to better understand your message.
5. Ask questions to your members. Constantly question your members as to their
needs, but remember…don’t ask the question if you are not willing to accept the
answer.
6. Communicate in a way that will best reach your members. Customize your
communication to members. Some members want to receive e-mails, some enjoy
reading your magazine or newsletter and others would like a personal visit. Few,
however, care about all these forms of communication. Lack of customization
leads to message confusion and informational clutter. Many members will
become so frustrated with the barrage of information that they will shut off the
lines of communication completely.
7. Avoid the “cookie cutter” approach. Many organizations communicate with every
member in the same way. As stated above, this creates information overload and
is not typically effective.
121
8. Audit your publications. Organizational executives are trained to send monthly
newsletters and produce magazines that contain industry information. However, a
recent study that included members of 160 organizations found that publications
were far down on the list of preferred communications tools. Reading is
becoming a thing of the past, yet organizations continue to kill trees by producing
publications that sit on desks and eventually end up in waste bins. Newsletters,
magazines and other publications can still be relevant, but only when targeted to
the members that are most interested in them.
9. Personalize your approach. Members respond to little things. Sending a card on a
member’s birthday, a flower arrangement on an anniversary or a sympathy note
on the death of a loved one are inexpensive ways to communicate that have a high
impact. Remember, people communicate with people, organizations do not
communicate with organizations.
10. Evaluate your effectiveness. At least annually, assess the effectiveness of your
communications strategy. Every five years, an organization should consider
conducting a full-blown communications audit. Make changes as necessary to
improve member communications.
Member Communications Techniques
The compact disc that accompanies this guidebook has numerous examples of
membership communications tools and most of them fall into one or more of the
following categories:
Electronic Communications
Electronic communications is considered to be a form that uses on-line resources
such as e-mail, web pages, and computer-generated list servers. This form of member
communications has increased exponentially over the last ten to fifteen years.
Unfortunately, many organizations now use this as their primary tool to provide
information to members. Experience indicates that a significant number of members are
pushing back against electronic mediums, such as e-mail, websites and chat rooms, as
they are both interpersonal and constant. Organizations that used to send mass e-mails
announcing programs, services or events are now beginning to rethink this strategy
because it does not achieve positive results. Basically, it contributes to information
overload.
All this being said, there is a definite place for electronic communications within an
organization’s strategy. However, considering it to be the only means, or even the best
means, of communication for all members is a mistake. Some members want
information this way while others reject it. Organizations that have effective member
communications programs understand this and utilize electronic communication only for
those members that want to receive information in this form.
122
Print Communications
Print communications includes newsletters, magazines, brochures and other
published collateral. While publications continue to be important sources of member
communication, they also are among the most overused. Newsletters are the most
common form of print communications and traditionally are distributed monthly. After
conducting a communications audit, many organizations have found that the
effectiveness of newsletters and magazines has waned over the years. “A few years ago,”
says a Chamber of Commerce executive in Romania, “international experts were telling
us that we had to have a monthly newsletter and if possible a quarterly magazine. What
we found out is that associations in the United States were moving more toward on-line
resources and away from print materials, which made us wonder why U.S. experts were
telling us to do something that their own organizations had found only marginally
successful”.
This executive partially missed the point in that the reason these
recommendations were provided, in a large majority of cases, was because association
members had neither the access nor the culture to accept electronic information. Still,
this established a pattern that years later has hampered some organizations in developing
countries, as they have focused so heavily on printed communications materials that they
have not invested in technology. The reality is that organizations should use a variety of
communications techniques to develop a customized approach for members. After all,
some members want to read a newsletter or magazine, while others would never read
them. This begs the question…..”Why do organizations spend the money to print and
distribute information that their members don’t want to read”? This is a fair question and
one that should be answered during the communications audit.
Interpersonal Communications
Interpersonal communications is defined as one-on-one contact with members.
While most professionals in the field of organizational management agree that this is
among the most effective communications approaches, it is also the most time
consuming. A number of organizational executives actively dismiss this process as a
means for communication. “We just don’t have time to personally visit our members”,
they contend. Other say, “Our members are too busy and don’t want us to visit them”.
These arguments, while based in logic, miss the point. Interpersonal communications
does not necessarily mean that an organization’s staff and volunteer leaders will
personally visit every member during a year. Instead, it focuses on the need for an
organization to build strong relationships with its members by personalizing its message
and by communicating in a way that individual members find useful.
An association executive in the state of Oklahoma (USA) ran an organization of
more than 1,000 members. Of course, he could not visit them all, even with help from
his volunteer leaders and staff. Still, he focused on developing an interpersonal message
for each of them. For instance, the birthday, business anniversary and other significant
dates for every member were included in the association’s database. On the significant
123
day, a personalized card was produced and sent to the member that said, “Congratulations
on your (birthday, anniversary, etc). We appreciate your support of our association and
we wish you continued success”. This was a small gesture that cost virtually nothing.
Yet, the association gained a great deal of goodwill from its members as they appreciated
being “remembered” on a special day in their lives. The same association executive
instituted a communications survey to determine what types of information his members
wanted to receive, how they wanted to receive it and when they wanted to receive it.
This was also included in the database and ensured that members received only what they
wanted. Those that wanted the newsletter every month in print form received it that way.
Those that wanted it on-line simply got an e-mail from the association that contained a
link to the newsletter. Those that did not want it but instead wanted the public policy
alert that informed them of important legislative issues received that instead. By taking
the time to compile this information, the association personalized its communication and
gave members exactly what they wanted. Suffice it to say that member retention rates in
this association were high.
Mass Communications
Many organizations, especially those with large membership bases, use mass
communications to disseminate their message. Typically, this kind of communication is
used to reach a wider audience than just the membership. For instance, an organization
may purchase an advertisement in a local newspaper or on a television station that
announces an upcoming event. It may also participate in radio or television programs
that highlight its stance on one or more public policy issues.
Mass communications, while effective in some cases, should be used sparingly as
it is both generic and impersonal. However, when used in conjunction with other
communications techniques within a synergetic strategy, it does have a place.
1:1 Communications
Much of this chapter has been devoted to the strategy of personalizing or
customizing communications to members. One of the pioneers of this philosophy is Dr.
Martha Rogers, who with her partner Donald Pepper, authored a book entitled, “1:1
Marketing”.
9
The book’s premise is that customers (or in the case of an organization,
members) will no longer respond to mass, impersonal communications. However, they
will respond to a customized approach that is tailored to their needs. By creating a
personal bond between an organization and its members, loyalty is developed. Dr.
Rogers calls this process, “Developing Customers for Life”. In other words, as noted on
the pyramid earlier in this chapter, once a member reaches the empowerment level in an
organization, he/she is essentially a “member for life”. How do they reach this level?
Through tailored, personalized communication of programs, services and activities that
interest and benefit them.
9
Rogers, Dr. Martha and Donald Pepper. “The 1:1 Experience”.
124
After implementing the 1:1 system in his organization, a Chamber of Commerce
executive in Romania exclaimed, “It is so easy and so inexpensive I cannot believe it
works”. Experience shows that a personalized membership communications strategy can
exponentially increase member satisfaction. Whether an organization has voluntary or
mandatory membership, it desires to have satisfied “customers”. Personalization of its
communications can play a significant role in its achieving this goal.
Summary and Conclusions
There is no single way to conduct member communications. Most effective
strategies consist of an amalgamation of different techniques that are designed to
customize the message. This usually means that strategies contain elements of all four
techniques: electronic, print, interpersonal and mass communications. It also assumes
that an organization values member communications as one of its top priorities and
therefore is willing to devote the appropriate time and resources to develop an effective
approach. Communication flows from information, so an organization’s ability to
collect, segment and utilize information is critical. In other words, organizations should
spend the amount of time and resources necessary to compile member information and
put it into a database that provides the ability to customize the communications effort.
Without accurate information in a useable database, it is unlikely that an organization can
implement an efficient and effective communications strategy.
SECTION FOUR: MASS COMMUNICATIONS
“My job is not to be liked or necessarily to be fair. My job is to make the public
think”. This statement was made by a senior international journalist based in Brussels. It
represents a growing trend, though a controversial one, among journalists that focus on
eliciting public reaction rather than necessarily focusing on delivering news in an
unbiased way.
Many organizations do not use mass media effectively because they do not
understand it. Media outlets report the news, but they report their version of it, not
necessarily the organization’s version. Also, the mass media focuses on stories that sell,
versus ones that simply report innocuous information. The term, “If it bleeds, it leads”
refers to the news media’s penchant for focusing on sensational and/or “bad” news
because it generates more interest. Unfortunately, organizations around the world
continue to send generic press releases and sponsor unfocused press conferences to
disseminate their message only to complain later that “the news media won’t give us any
coverage”.
With this in mind, how can an organization ensure that its message is disseminated
through the mass media? In short, it can’t. However, it can dramatically increase the
chances of receiving coverage if it utilizes the following “tried and true” techniques for
media management.
125
1. Build relationships with the media. Development of transparent relationships
with the media can ensure that an organization has access to a person that is
willing to listen to and consider its message. A Chamber of Commerce
communications director in the U.S. state of Virginia stated at a recent conference
that she routinely “shows up” at the newspaper office or television station, gets to
know the business reporters, spends time with them and assists them by providing
information and statistics on business issues. She also gives them free access to
Chamber events, including providing a spot for them in the organization’s annual
golf tournament. Though relationships such as these do not guarantee coverage,
they do initiate a bond between the organization and media representatives. There
is a line, however, that should not be crossed. Organizations should not expect
that reporters, regardless of how good a relationship they have built, will only
report its version of a story or will support it over other stakeholders. Building
relationships with the media provides a linkage that allows an organization to tell
its story, not a forum for propaganda.
2. Become a source for information. Since reporters operate under strict deadlines,
they are always in search of information that is readily available. Business
organizations can play a useful role in assisting media representatives by
providing statistics, insight and access to business leaders and issues. This
provides a service to the reporter while at the same time allowing the organization
to exert some control over the message.
3. Stay ahead of the story. It is easy for organization to find themselves on the
“wrong side” of a news story just because they got behind it instead of ahead of it.
Staying “ahead of a story” means that an organization is proactive in monitoring
and reporting on developments in such a way that it delivers the story to the
media before the media even knows it is a story. On issues that are controversial,
organizations should be especially careful not to let the media draw its own
conclusions. The best way to do this is by carefully planning the content, timing
and mechanism for delivering the message. In other words, organizations should
engage in proactive dialogue with the media on issues of importance.
4. Pick your opportunities. Organizations should continually look for opportunities
to communicate programs, services or issues through the mass media. For
example, if an upcoming festival will be covered extensively by the media, an
organization may want to co-sponsor it so as to generate visibility. In addition,
the festival might be the right venue to distribute press packets about an upcoming
issue of importance to the organization.
5. Train your staff and volunteers. “The message doesn’t matter if the person that is
delivering it cannot put it into terms the public understands”. This comment was
made by the media director for a large Russian company. An increasing number
of organizations around the world have now drawn the link between an effective
message and the skills of the person that delivers it. Because of this, they provide
training for staff and volunteer leaders that interact with the mass media. A
skilled media relations representative creates a positive image for the organization
as well as delivers its message in a way that is effective. Training can consist of
one or two day workshops to ongoing training and mentorship, depending on the
organization’s size and the resources it has available.
126
6. Plan media outreach well in advance. As stated above, organizations that are
skilled at working with the mass media understand that planning is necessary in
order to maintain control of the message. These organizations carefully plan
media outreach by staying “ahead” of events and issues instead of behind them.
Every program, activity or issue is part of an overall strategy that includes a) what
message is to be delivered, b) who should deliver the message, c) to what media
sources should it be delivered, d) when should it be delivered, and e) why should
the members (or public) care about the issue.
7. Tailor the message to the media. Some messages are more conducive to
television, some to radio, and still others to newspaper. Organizations that do not
distinguish between media outlets run the risk of wasting money by delivering
their message the wrong way. Many organizations alter their delivery mechanism
depending on the medium. For instance, on radio and television, organizations
should craft their messages around “sound bights” since they only have a few
seconds to deliver the main theme. “Sound bites” are snippets of information that
the members or the public can easily remember. For example, who can forget
George Bush’s famous phrase on September 11, 2001, “You are either for us or
against us”. Right or wrong, he delivered the message he intended and everyone
remembered it. A message needs to be delivered in a different way for the print
media, as detail is needed in order to provide the reader with the information
necessary to grasp the main theme.
8. Utilize advertising as a way to gain press coverage. In many developing
countries, newspapers and other media outlets are starved for cash and therefore
will not print or broadcast press releases free of charge. This being the case, some
organizations purchase advertising as a way to reach their members or the general
public. Over time, the media outlets provide more access to organizations that
advertise with them. It is not right and arguably not fair, but it is reality in many
countries and organizations have to determine whether or not this is a strategy
they want to pursue.
9. Sponsor media-related events/awards. A growing number of organizations
sponsor media-related events to honor media representatives or to build a network
between reporters and the private sector. Some organizations, such as the United
States Chamber of Commerce, present awards to journalists that they believe
comprehensively and fairly report on issues of interest to them. These events do
not have to cost a lot of money but they can be effective ways to build positive
relationships with the media.
10. Develop Opinion-Editorial (OP-ED) articles. Hard hitting and provocative
opinion and editorial articles are another way to reach both members and the
public at large. OP-EDs as they are called are typically printed free of charge and
focus on the opinions of one or a group of people. Whether or not OP-EDs are a
good strategy for an organization depends on its overall media plan.
What Journalists Think is Important
Successful organizational communications executives are the first ones to admit
that their jobs are not easy. Working with the mass media is a little like prize fighting,
127
where the two fighters throw jab after jab in an attempt to gain an advantage. One thing
is for sure, in order to win the battle and to communicate its message, an organization
must understand the rules of the game. According to the Misukanis and Odden, a media
relations firm, journalists at a recent conference listed the following as the most important
rules to remember when utilizing the mass media:
1. Stick to the facts. Understand what news is and what it is not.
2. Journalists are rated on the basis of exclusive stories they generate every day. If
you can give a journalist several exclusives, they will keep coming back for more.
3. Get to know the editor very well, then some amount of any ‘not so important’
news or story can get into the print. .
4. Media relations should be based on a strategy and not a knee jerk reaction.
5. Expect the unexpected from the media but still try and understand them more.
6. For an event, try to identify the right journalist and provide clear details in their
required language.
7. Understand your organization’s message in detail before contacting the media.
8. Never have a press event while journalists are approaching their deadlines.
Chances are that they may not be interested in talking to you as they need to rush
to file their stories.
9. Provide journalists with as much information as possible about the organization,
the specific issue you need to communicate and why it is important.
10. Journalists are more interested in your assistance than your friendship.
11. “SPAM” press releases are not helpful and in fact irritate journalists, thereby
working against the organization.
12. Stories with visuals get more attention. Pictures and video are helpful but they
should be in high resolution so that journalists can use them with a minimum of
editing.
13. The simpler the message the easier it is to understand. Be concise, clear and
efficient in delivery of your message.
Media Relations Tools
There are numerous tools that organizations can use to deliver their message to
members and the public at large. Two, however, are the most “tried and true” methods
for working with the mass media: press releases and press conferences.
Press Releases
Press releases should be concise but also interesting. As a rule they should
answer the questions who, what, where, when and why….Who
is sending the press
release, what is happening, where it is happening, when it is happening and why it is
important. In addition, media representatives provide the following guidelines for the
preparation and distribution of press releases:
128
Make sure the information is newsworthy.
Tell the audience that the information is intended for them and why they
should continue to read it.
Start with a brief description of the news, then distinguish who announced
it, and not the other way around.
Ask yourself, "How are people going to relate to this and will they be able
to connect?"
Make sure the first 10 words of your release are effective, as they are the
most important.
Avoid excessive use of adjectives and fancy language.
Deal with the facts.
Provide as much contact information as possible: individual to contact,
address, phone, fax, email, website address.
Make sure you wait until you have something with enough substance to
issue a release.
Make it as easy as possible for media representatives to do their jobs
Journalists agree that press releases are still effective ways of communicating a
message, but they caution organizations not to overuse them. SPAM press releases
irritate journalists and are rejected out of hand. Organizations that send three or four
press releases a week run the risk of eroding any goodwill they have accumulated with
journalists and are tacitly clouding their own messages by sending too much information.
At some point, journalists do not know what is important and what is not.
Press Conferences
Press conferences, while effective in certain circumstance, are generally held too
often and are ineffective due to lack of planning. For maximum effectiveness, details for
press conferences must be handled very carefully. The following are guidelines for the
initiation of a successful press conference:
Who is coming?
(a) Star Quality: To maximize media attendance at your news conference,
it is beneficial to have at least one high-profile personality
participating (e.g. authorities representative, head of an international
donor organization, etc). It is important to plan ahead and give enough
notice to your invited participants.
(b) Diversity: It will be important to show a cross-section of participants.
This will demonstrate that the issue is a concern to everyone. Try to
enlist participants from business, education and civil society
organizations. Strive for gender diversity among participants.
129
Location, Location, Location
(a) Venue: Use a location that is easily accessible but also visually
interesting for the media. Examples include a hospital emergency
room, local school or steps of a “public” building. Obtain a permit
in advance if needed!
(b) Visuals: Use visual aids at your news conference.
(c) When to hold the event: Try to hold the press conference Tuesday,
Wednesday or Thursday. Avoid Mondays and Fridays. If at all
possible, hold the event between 10:00 am and 2:00 pm. Earlier
than 10:00 am is hard for reporters to attend. After 2:00 pm is
sometimes too late for evening news. 10:00 am or 11:00 am are the
best times-because many noon newscasts will include the event.
Getting the media's attention
(a) Write a media alert that will serve as your announcement of the
news conference/event to the press. Be sure to include who, what,
where, when and why. Keep it short! Make sure to include a
contact name and phone number.
(b) Include background materials, fact sheets, etc. Do not reinvent the
wheel-this information is already available for you.
(c) Fax or e-mail: One day before the event, all area media outlets
should receive the advisory.
(d) Follow up: One day before the event, call the assignment editors to
confirm fax or e-mail transmission, and make sure they know
about the event. Talk it up as much as possible to encourage
coverage! Many TV stations do not make their assignments until
the day of the event. It is worth calling the TV assignment editors
again between 8:30 am and 9:00 am the day of the event.
Setup
(a) The right equipment: Are you using a microphone? Is there
electricity? Do you have/need a podium? Do you have something
for the microphone to sit on or attach to?
(b) Arrange a press table: This is where reporters sign in and pick up
materials. One person should be there to meet and greet the
reporters.
(c) Permit: Do you need a permit for the location you have selected?
Get one, bring it.
(d) If it is an outdoor event, is there a rain location?
(e) All participants should stand together behind the microphone or
podium so that everyone is in the picture.
(f) Make sure that visuals are not placed too high so as to be out of the
picture, or too low so to be blocked by the participants.
130
Speaking Order
(a) Who's next? Determine the order of speakers in advance. It is
preferable to have each person come to the microphone and
introduce him/herself.
(b) Remember to distribute a speakers list to the press as well as the
speakers themselves.
Length
(a) Short and sweet: Each speaker should keep remarks short. The
overall length of the news conference should only be 20--30
minutes (including Q & A period). If there are a lot of speakers,
each may only be able to speak for 2 minutes, or so.
(b) Not all participants need to speak. Ask groups to send a
representative, even if he or she does not wish to speak-this aids in
showing the depth of support.
(c) Speakers should distribute copies of their statements to the media.
If they are ready in advance, they can be included in the press kits.
If not, they can be placed on the press table.
Questions
(a) Often the press will ask questions. They may direct them
specifically to one speaker. If not, you, as the host should be
prepared to answer any questions that come up. If they ask a
question that you cannot answer, don't be afraid to say you're not
sure and get back to them later.
(b) Reporters often want one-on-one interviews with speakers after the
Q & A period. This is your chance to clarify or cover information
not brought out in the Q & A.
Post-event follow-up
After the event, you will want to send a good quality photo to the
newspapers in your region. Include the basics of the event, such as the
"who, what, when, why, where" information, highlight any special
happenings and the successes. Think of it as a news brief or mini-
story.
Summary and Conclusions
Utilization of the media is an essential part of any organizational communications
strategy. However, effective media relations are critical to an organization’s ability to
stay “on message”. Planning, training, knowledge of media attitudes, and proper
utilization of media relations tools are key elements in a successful mass media program.
131
SECTION FIVE: PRESENTATION SKILLS
Organizations are comprised of people, which mean the effectiveness of any
communications strategy is dependent on the skills of the people responsible for
implementation. Interpersonal communications skills are therefore vital in establishing
effective communications within an organization. Of the many aspects of interpersonal
skills that blend to form a strong overall communications effort, public speaking is
among the most important. The ability to articulate a message is an art not a science but
experts agree that there are ten steps that are common to most effective presentations.
Figure 6.8 The Ten Step Approach to Effective Presentations
STEP ONE: Develop a theme for your presentation.
STEP TWO: Develop a rough outline, indicating the major points you will cover.
STEP THREE: Do a second draft of the outline, including specific examples you
want to use to reinforce your major points.
STEP FOUR: Do a final draft of the outline, with notes on voice inflection and the
time to be spent on each point.
STEP FIVE: Practice the presentation for friends and associates, having them
provide constructive criticism on content, timing and delivery.
STEP SIX: Make revisions and practice the presentation again, focusing on hand
gestures and body movements.
STEP SEVEN: Add a media dimension to your presentation. Use Power Point, Flash
Point, or other visual aids.
STEP EIGHT: Do a final practice session of your presentation including all the
media elements.
STEP NINE: Get plenty of rest before the presentation and don’t practice at all the
day of the delivery.
STEP TEN: During the delivery, if something goes wrong, just move on, don’t dwell
on it and allow it to affect the rest of the presentation.
Organizational leaders are typically required to make presentations on a regular
basis to members, public officials, the media and other stakeholders. Effective
presenters typically learn to address three major elements of public speaking, which are:
fear, organization, and delivery.
Overcoming Fear of Public Speaking
Studies indicate that public speaking is among people’s biggest fears and yet
professionals around the globe are called on to make presentations on a daily basis.
Noted communications experts offer the following ten steps as a way for individuals to
overcome anxiety and make effective presentations
10
:
10
Big Dog’s Leadership. http://www.nwlink.com/~donclark/leader/leadpres.html
132
Figure 6.9 Overcoming Fear of Speaking
Before the presentation: Lie on the floor. Your back should be flat on the floor.
Pull your feet towards you so that your knees are up in the air. Relax. Close your
eyes. Feel your back spreading out and supporting your weight. Feel your neck
lengthening. Work your way through your body, relaxing one section at a time -
your toes, feet, legs, torso, etc. When finished, stand up slowly and try to maintain
the relaxed feeling in a standing position.
If you cannot lie down: Stand with you feet about 6 inches apart, arms hanging by
your sides, and fingers unclenched. Gently shake each part of your body, starting
with your hands, then arms, shoulders, torso, and legs. Concentrate on shaking out
the tension. Then slowly rotate your shoulders forwards and the backwards. Move
on to your head. Rotate it slowly clockwise, and then counter-clockwise.
Mental Visualization: Before the presentation, visualize the room, audience, and
you giving the presentation. Mentally go over what you are going to do from the
moment you start to the end of the presentation.
During the presentation: Take a moment to yourself by getting a drink of water,
take a deep breath, concentrate on relaxing the most tense part of your body, and
then return to the presentation saying to yourself, "I can do it!"
You do NOT need to get rid of anxiety and tension! Channel the energy into
concentration and expressiveness.
Know that anxiety and tension are not as noticeable to the audience as they are to
you.
Know that even the best presenters make mistakes. The key is to continue on after
the mistake. If you pick up and continue, so will the audience. Winners continue!
Losers stop!
Never drink alcohol to reduce tension! It affects not only your coordination but
also your awareness of coordination. You might not realize it, but your audience
will!
Organizing the Presentation
Overcoming anxiety is one step on the road to making effective presentations, but
preparation is also important. The following is a presentation outline utilized by
professional speakers that increases the presenter’s ability to drive home key points:
Figure 6.10 Presentation Outline
Use the following blank outline to develop a presentation:
TOPIC: __________________________________
Introduction: Preliminary remarks; Connect with the audience.
133
Thesis: The major theme of your presentation
(Tell them what you’re going to tell them)
Major Points: Points to reinforce your thesis.
(Tell them)
A. Point # 1
B. Point # 2
C. Point # 3
D. Point # 4
Conclusion: Closing remarks; Summary (Tell them what you said)
Delivering Effective Presentations
Overcoming fear of public speaking and learning to organize presentations are
important aspects of communication, but delivery is the key to connecting with the
audience. Professional speakers provide insight into ways that presenters can best deliver
their message. According to presentation experts Dr. Tony Alessandrea and
Dr. Phil Hunsaker, the following are the characteristics of an effective public speaker
11
:
Figure 6.11 Characteristics of an Effective Public Speaker
Understands the needs of his/her audience.
Attempts to meet those needs as effectively as possible.
Is the expert on his subject and has breadth of knowledge in other areas.
Constantly grows and improves in his understanding of his/her areas of expertise
and his ability to present his/her material effectively.
Is enthusiastic about his subject and sincere about conveying his message to the
audience.
Has a pleasing voice and appearance.
Uses examples, illustrations, analogies, and stories to make information more
interesting and exciting.
Paces the program to keep it lively and interesting.
Uses an appropriate level of humor and drama.
Encourages group involvement and participation.
Makes information as practical as possible, telling people how to use the
information.
11
Alessandrea, Tony, PhD and Phil Hunsaker, PhD. Communications at Work. 1993
134
Uses depth and breadth of knowledge to answer a broad range of questions
thoroughly.
Admits when he/she does not know the answer to a question, but offers to
research the answer and relay it to participants. He may ask other participants if
they know the answer.
Helps listeners understand and retain information through the use of attention-
getting verbal and visual devices such as repetition, graphics, and audience
participation.
Using Technology and/or Media to Augment Presentations
Increasingly our society is becoming a visual one. Gone are the days when large
crowds would gather to hear a lengthy oration. In fact, studies show that audiences
respond positively to visual stimulation that gives presentations “a face” or a “frame of
reference”. Consequently, most experts now use media as part of their presentations.
Media can consist of everything from Power Point slides to video, but whatever the
technique, it should be used effectively. The following are tips on the effective use of
media in presentations:
Figure 6.12 Effective Use of Technology During Presentations
When using Power Point slides do not pack the slides with text. Pictures grab an
audience’ attention.
Simply reading the bullet points on Power Point slides is not a presentation, it is a
lecture. While it may be comforting for the presenter, it is mind-numbing for the
audience.
Ensure that there are no misspellings or culturally inappropriate references on
Power Point slides.
Use the same font and design style throughout the Power Point presentation.
Limit the number of slides to 12 or 15. Presentations with 40 or 50 slides are
typically ineffective because the presenter will eventually lose the audience’
interest.
Always prepare print copies of the Power Point slides for distribution to the
audience in case the technology does not work.
If a laser pointer and other equipment are used during a Power Point presentation
the presenter should know how to use them. Practice before making the
presentation.
The same is true for video and or audio that accompany a presentation. The
presenter should know how to launch them at the appropriate time.
The presenter should know when enough is enough. Too much media can
135
actually hamper one’s ability to deliver the presentation’s core message. If the
audience leaves feeling entertained but does not understand the presentation’s
major theme, the presentation has fallen short of expectations.
Summary and Conclusions
When preparing, delivering and evaluating a presentation, it is important to
remember the techniques used by effective speakers. The following, which summarize
the points made earlier in this chapter, are provided by Big Dog Leadership, a
professional leadership and public relations company
12
:
Figure 6.13 Final Thoughts on Presentations
If you have handouts, do not read straight from them. The audience does not
know if they should read along with you or listen to you read.
Do not put both hands in your pockets for long periods of time. This tends to
make you look unprofessional. It is OK to put one hand in a pocket but ensure
there is no loose change or keys to jingle around. This will distract the listeners.
Do not wave a pointer around in the air like a wild knight branding a sword to
slay a dragon. Use the pointer for what it is intended and then put it down,
otherwise the audience will become fixated upon your "sword", instead upon you.
Do not lean on the podium for long periods. The audience will begin to wonder
when you are going to fall over.
Speak to the audience...NOT to the visual aids, such as flip charts or overheads.
Also, do not stand between the visual aid and the audience.
Speak clearly and loudly enough for all to hear. Do not speak in a monotone
voice. Use inflection to emphasize your main points.
The disadvantage of presentations is that people cannot see the punctuation and
this can lead to misunderstandings. An effective way of overcoming this problem
is to pause at the time when there would normally be punctuation marks.
Use colored backgrounds on overhead transparencies and slides (such as yellow)
as the bright white light can be harsh on the eyes. This will quickly cause your
audience to tire. If all of your transparencies or slides have clear backgrounds,
then tape one blank yellow on the overhead face. For slides, use a rubber band to
hold a piece of colored cellophane over the projector lens.
Learn the name of each participant as quickly as possible. Based upon the
atmosphere you want to create, call them by their first names or by using Mr.,
Mrs., Miss, Ms.
Tell them what name and title you prefer to be called.
12
Big Dog Leadership. http://www.nwlink.com/~donclark/leader/leadpres.html
136
Listen intently to comments and opinions. By using a lateral thinking
technique (adding to ideas rather than dismissing them), the audience will feel
that their ideas, comments, and opinions are worthwhile.
Circulate around the room as you speak. This movement creates a physical
closeness to the audience.
List and discuss your objectives at the beginning of the presentation. Let the
audience know how your presentation fits in with their goals. Discuss some of the
fears and apprehensions that both you and the audience might have. Tell them
what they should expect of you and how you will contribute to their goals.
Vary your techniques (lecture, discussion, debate, films, slides, reading, etc.)
Get to the presentation place before your audience arrives; be the last one to
leave.
Be prepared to use an alternate approach if the one you've chosen seems to bog
down. You should be confident enough with your own material so that the
audience's interests and concerns, not the presentation outline, determines the
format. Use your background, experience, and knowledge to interrelate your
subject matter.
When writing on flip charts use no more than 7 lines of text per page and no more
than 7 words per line (the 7/7 rule). Also, use bright and bold colors, and pictures
as well as text.
Consider the time of day and how long you have for your talk. Time of day can
affect the audience. After lunch is known as the graveyard section in training
circles as audiences will feel more like a nap than listening to a talk.
Most people find that if they practice in their head, the actual talk will take about
25 per cent longer. Using a flip chart or other visual aids also adds to the time.
Remember - it is better to finish slightly early than to overrun.
SECTION SIX: BRANDING AN ORGANIZATION
Communications and Branding
Branding and communications are interlocking components in the development of
strong organizations. Branding is the image that an organization enjoys in the eyes of its
stakeholders. Aneta Bogdan, General Director of Brandient, a Romanian branding
company, argues that organizations will develop a brand one way or the other. In a
recent presentation to corporate CEO’s she stated it as follows:
137
“A brand is ultimately a delicate yet powerful sign. But not all signs are brands.
Consumers (members) need their daily intake of aspiration and some certainty in a world
of endless choice. Reputation is a reward of vision. If brands are not valued, they
accomplish nothing. It takes time and fervor, from the single acorn to the living forest, to
build a sign of value”.
According to Ms. Bogdan, a successful brand has value. In an excerpt from an
article in Romania’s CAPITAL Magazine, Ms. Bogdan describes brand value in the
following way:
Reputation has always been perceived as an important factor in business, and
accounting has used for centuries the term of goodwill to account for the value not
attributable to tangible, identifiable assets. The brand is often called “hidden value”,
because in most cases it is not shown on companies’ financial statements.
Essentially, brand value stems from a relationship (like a contract) built between a
brand’s owner (organization) and the consumer (stakeholder). A brand enjoys a price
premium or a superior market share as long as it provides return on investment for the
consumer and fulfills certain emotional needs (status, sense of belonging etc).
Because of this, the concern for brand and brand valuation is a reality because of
consumers (stakeholders) who have the ability to remain loyal to a brand if it meets their
needs or to quit a brand if it does not.
To those who think brand is only image and advertising, brand valuation is not
good news. A solid brand is built over time, around a product/service of constant quality
and having the support of a competent organization. A brand valuation exercise is a
radiography of an organization’s pluses and minuses and shows in the end whether
current successes are ephemeral or perennial.
As Ms. Bogdan states, a brand is built over time and its value increases as an
organization gains credibility. Credibility comes through visibility, which comes through
effective communication.
Brand Versus Organizational Identity
It is important to distinguish between organizational identity, brand identity, and
brand image.
Organizational identity is concerned with the visual aspects of an association’s
presence. When organizations undertake corporate identity exercises, they are usually
modernizing their visual image in terms of logo, design, and collaterals. Such efforts do
not normally entail a change in brand values so that the heart of the brand remains the
same - what it stands for, or its personality. Unfortunately, many organizations do not
realize this fallacy, as they are sometimes led to believe by agencies and consultancy
companies that the visual changes will change the brand image. But changes to logos,
138
signage, and even outlet design do not always change consumer perceptions of quality,
service, and the intangible associations that come to the fore when the brand name is seen
or heard.
The best that such changes can do is to reassure members that the organization is
concerned about how it looks. Brands do have to maintain a modern look, and the visual
identity needs to change over time. But the key to successfully effecting a new look is
evolution, not revolution. Totally changing the brand visuals can give rise to member
concerns about changes of leadership, or possible changes in brand values, or even
unjustified extravagance. If there is a strong brand personality to which consumers are
attracted, then substantial changes may destroy emotional attachments to the brand.
People do not expect or like wild swings in the personality behavior of other people, and
they are just as concerned when the brands to which they have grown used to exhibit
similar "schizophrenic" changes.
On the other hand, if the intention is to substantially improve the standing of the
brand, then corporate identity changes can be accompanied by widespread changes to
organizational culture, quality, and service standards. If done well, and if members
experience a great new or improved experience, then the changes will, over the longer
term, have a corresponding positive effect on brand image.
Brand identity is the total proposition that a company makes to consumers - the
promise it makes. It may consist of features and attributes, benefits, performance, quality,
service support, and the values that the brand possesses. The brand can be viewed as a
product, a personality, a set of values, and a position it occupies in people's minds. Brand
identity is everything the company wants the brand to be seen as.
Brand image, on the other hand, is the totality of consumer perceptions about the
brand, or how they see it, which may not coincide with the brand identity. Companies
have to work hard on the consumer experience to make sure that what customers see and
think is what they want them to.
The Role of Leadership in Organizational Branding
Dr. James C. Burnham is one of the United States leading experts in
organizational branding. In a recent article for weLEAD magazine, Dr. Burnham drew a
strong connection between leadership and the ability to develop a strong brand. He states
that, “Establishing an organizational brand requires strong leadership. There must be
willingness to be critical of both oneself and the organization”. Dr. Burnham goes on to
say that it is important for an organization’s leadership team to determine what the
current organizational culture is and what they want it to be. This is critical in the
development of a brand.
Leaders need to understand that a brand is not the organization’s visible image,
but rather its core values. The United States Chamber of Commerce is perceived as one
of the most powerful business advocacy organizations in the world. Its culture of support
139
for business is its brand. Its logo or letterhead is not. The latter are its organizational
identity as described above. In 1997, Tom Donohue assumed the position of President
(Chief Paid Executive) of the United States Chamber of Commerce. At that time, the
Chamber’s brand as an advocate for business had been tarnished due to poor management
decisions and some highly visible losses in the advocacy arena. Mr. Donohue
reinvigorated the brand by reinforcing the organization’s core values, reigniting the
Chamber’s grassroots support, and sending a clear message that the Chamber was going
to be “in the fight” on behalf of business. Win, lose or draw, the Chamber would fight
for business interests. Today, the Chamber’s brand is stronger than ever thanks to Mr.
Donohue’s leadership in moving the organization back to its core values.
A leader is to a brand what a conductor is to an orchestra. Regardless of how
talented individuals within the orchestra are, they collectively follow the conductor’s
lead. They play the music he has chosen. In organizations, there is a similar scenario
relative to branding. Regardless of the organization’s individual characteristics, it takes
on a brand that is largely defined by its leader(s).
Summary and Conclusions
A brand is what your organization is perceived to be by its members and the
public at large. It is not a logo or an advertising campaign, but rather a value or system
of values within the organization that are projected in ways that create an image. This
image can be positive or negative depending on the organization’s strategy and values.
Leadership is critical to branding because an organization’s values are largely developed
by its leadership.
SECTION SEVEN: CRISIS COMMUNICATIONS
Developing and Updating a Crisis Communication Plan
As much as we wish that things would go right, the reality is that bad things do
happen to good organizations. When crisis occurs, whether it is internal (such as the
termination of a key staff member) or external (a disaster in the community),
organizations are most usually in the thick of the fray and because of their visibility the
media, their members and other stakeholders look to them for information and guidance.
For this reason, visionary organizations develop a crisis communications plan.
Art Samansky, a public relations consultant, authored an article on crisis
communications that appeared in the New York Nonprofits newsletter. Mr. Samansky
likened a crisis communication plan to insurance, noting, “Everyone has insurance if they
have assets they want to protect. We don’t expect to use the insurance, but we still pay
the premium”. His company, The Samansky Group, developed a strategy for
organizations that have a strategy in place. It is called TRUE (Test, Review, Update and
Expand). Test the plan regularly to make sure it is applicable; Review the plan often with
140
staff and volunteers; Update the plan whenever the person responsible for it leaves the
organization; and Expand the plan to address new conditions or threats.
13
For organizations that do not have a crisis communications plan, it should be noted
that it takes significant time to create a comprehensive strategy. However, a basic plan is
better than none at all. In creating a plan, organizational leaders should keep the
following axioms in mind:
Establish a crisis response team. Designate team members for specific roles such
as member support, media relations, logistics, etc. and make sure they know their
roles inside and out. A leader should be selected to oversee the team’s activities.
Examine your organization’s vulnerabilities. Determine your organization’s
weaknesses in addressing a potential crisis. This might be an outdated phone
system, lack of an updated database so that members could be contacted, etc.
Determine which constituencies you will communicate with during a crisis.
Develop a list of media, individuals and other stakeholders that you will contact in
case of a crisis. Make sure the lists are updated and someone is designated to
make the contacts when a crisis occurs.
Commit the plan to paper. The plan is no good if it is just in someone’s head. Put
it on paper and update it on an ongoing basis. Put someone in charge of its
implementation should the need arise.
Customize the plan. Customize the plan as necessary to address as many potential
crisis as possible, whether it is loss of data, natural disaster, or an internal crisis.
Crisis Communications Case Study: Oklahoma City, Oklahoma
On April 19, 1995, domestic terrorists blew up the Alfred P. Murrah federal office
building in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma. Not only did the explosion kill 168 people and
leave more than 800 injured, it also negatively impacted a large number of businesses
throughout the downtown area. Immediately after the explosion, the international media,
public officials, and law enforcement descended on Oklahoma City. Because it had a
crisis communications plan, the Oklahoma City Chamber of Commerce became the
coordinating organization for media information and interaction with various agencies
that wanted access to the blast site. In addition, it became the focal organization for
scores of its member businesses that were damaged or destroyed in the explosion.
Charles Van Ryselburg, who at the time was the President of the Oklahoma City
Chamber of Commerce, became an authority on organizational communications in crisis
situations. Mr. Van Ryselburg provides the following guidelines for communicating in
times of crisis:
Be available to the media, members, and other stakeholders. Within literally
minutes of the disaster, the Oklahoma City Chamber of Commerce mobilized its
crisis management team. Mr. Van Ryselburg was designated as the spokesperson
13
Samansky, Art. “New York Nonprofits”. Volume 21. September 9, 2004.
141
on behalf of the Chamber, Governor Frank Keating on behalf of the State of
Oklahoma, and Mayor Ron Norick on behalf of Oklahoma City. Other members
of the team were put in charge of press coordination, member inquiries/assistance,
agency interaction (e.g. law enforcement, public officials), and operations. This
allowed members of the crisis management team to be constantly available to
various stakeholders. Their names and contact information were widely
publicized so that stakeholders knew whom to contact for information and/or
assistance.
Tell the truth. From the beginning, Governor Keating, Mayor Norick and Mr.
Van Ryselburg told the truth about the disaster. They did not jump to conclusions
or try to put their “spin” on the situation. They gave the facts as they saw them.
This provided the media with trustworthy information, and instilled confidence in
both the Chamber’s members and the public at large that these three men could be
trusted.
Get news out as soon as you can. The Chamber coordinated hourly press
conferences to disseminate updated information. The Chamber did not, however,
distribute information until its accuracy was checked and it was cleared by the
local authorities. If information could not be released, the Chamber said this up
front and let the media know that it would release it as soon as it was validated or
when it had permission.
Quell any rumors that arise. Rumors were rampant throughout the disaster and
one of the Chamber’s major roles was to provide accurate information through its
press conferences and outreach to members. This helped squelch many rumors
before they got started.
Provide a consistent message. Information provided by the Chamber, the city,
and the state was coordinated carefully so that the message was consistent.
Coordination meetings were held every day to ensure that all aspects of
communication and outreach were going well.
Assume there will be leaks. There were certainly leaks, but far fewer than in
other crisis situations. The reason for this was that the Chamber took control of
the communications strategy from the beginning and built relationships with the
media and other stakeholders. The media especially became very adept at
checking information with the appropriate sources at the Chamber rather than
believing rumors or leaks.
Keep the crisis in perspective. Governor Frank Keating said from day one, “We
will survive this. Oklahomans will pull together and we will be stronger than ever
before”. At no time did the Chamber or any of its partners give the illusion that
the “sky was falling”. It simply did its job in the best way it could.
Keep doing business as usual. Not only did the Chamber continue to function, it
did so at an amazingly high degree of excellence. Within hours of the disaster, it
established an office to provide assistance to member businesses that had been
affected. Over the months after the disaster, it assisted hundreds of businesses in
142
accessing financing, insurance benefits and other support to resume operations. It
did all this while still running the day-to-day operations of the Chamber. This
created member loyalty that was unsurpassed.
Summary and Conclusions
Reality is harsh and bad things sometimes happen to good organizations. For this
reason, a crisis communications plan should be part of an organization’s overall strategy.
The plan should establish a framework and structure for information flow during a time
of crisis and should be reviewed at least annually. In addition, a responsible person
within the organization should be given responsibility for the plan’s management.
SECTION EIGHT: A CASE STUDY IN BRANDING
Figure 6.14 Case Study of AfghanMark Carpet Brand
The Afghan Women’s Business Federation (AfghanMark)
The Afghan Women’s Business Federation (AWBF), a consortium of 18 women’s
business associations, launched its AfghanMark carpet program in February 2007. The
organization created the AfghanMark socially conscious brand as a way to a) provide
additional revenue for women weavers, b) establish new markets for Afghan carpets in
the United States, and c) increase the visibility of heirloom quality hand-made carpets
around the world. With assistance from a New York public relations firm and funding
from USAID, AWBF launched the AfghanMark brand at a media event in New York
City. AWBF developed both an on-line and print catalogue as well as a fully functional
web portal at www.afghanmark.com. Within two days of the launch event, the
AfghanMark brand was already available in two New York City carpet emporiums.
Since the brand was launched, AWBF estimates that over $185,000 in carpets have been
sold, with over six times more revenue going to the women weavers than in the past. In
just over a year, AfghanMark has already developed a brand that signifies heirloom
quality, hand-made carpets at competitive prices.
143
CHAPTER SEVEN
DEVELOPING EFFECTIVE PROGRAMS AND SERVICES
SECTION ONE: OVERVIEW OF PROGRAM AND SERVICE DEVELOPMENT
As discussed in earlier chapters, the development of demand-driven programs and
services is an integral part of a business association’s responsibility to its members. In
addition, it is a core element of the business association sustainability pyramid as
described in Chapter 1. Members expect their business associations to provide quality
programs and services. Those that do, not only build both organizational capacity and
member loyalty, which eventually leads to empowered members that are essentially
“customers for life”.
Process for Developing Programs and Services
The following are five primary steps in the design and implementation of
demand-driven programs and services:
Solicit Stakeholder Input
As with other areas of business association development, stakeholder input is key
in the development of effective programs and services. As stated previously,
stakeholders are members, non-members, former members, international donor
organizations, government officials and any other individuals and/or organizations with
which an association interacts. While the needs of members should be paramount, input
from other stakeholders may reveal opportunities for the future or challenges in the
implementation of certain programs/services.
International best practices indicate that input on programs and services is best
compiled through the implementation of a Program Needs Assessment (PNA). A PNA
allows organizations to obtain stakeholder input in a strategic way while at the same time
maximizing resources. Typically, a PNA includes the following input-gathering
techniques:
Market Research: Market research is necessary in order to collect data that may not be
provided through conventional input-gathering techniques such as surveys and focus
groups. This includes the compilation and analysis of statistics, review of scholarly
reports, and the interview of technical experts. Because this information is not readily
available in many transitional and post-conflict countries, market research can often be
time consuming and costly. Failure to conduct research, however, could create an
information gap leading to the creation of non-strategic programs and services.
Focus Groups: The construction of focus groups as a tool for gathering input is
described in Chapter 4. Many organizations utilize focus groups to gain input on a
variety of issues including overall business association effectiveness, programs/services
144
and advocacy issues. Other organizations use focus groups to deal with single issues,
which is more time consuming because it requires the conducting of numerous groups
throughout the year.
Survey: The construction and implementation of surveys is also described in Chapter 4.
Again, some organizations design one survey per year that focuses on a variety of issues
including the development of programs and services. Others design short surveys that are
distributed on an ongoing basis that cover one or two specific issues. While either
technique can be effective, organizational leaders should determine which is most desired
by its stakeholders.
Audit Current Programs/Services
While gathering input from stakeholders and conducting market research, it is
also necessary for an organization to assess the effectiveness of its current programs and
services. This is typically done using an evaluation technique called “The Five Way
Test”, which consists of five questions that organizational leaders should answer before
creating a new program/service or when evaluating existing initiatives.
Figure 7.1 The Five Way Test
1. Is the program consistent with the organization’s mission? An organization’s
purpose should always be considered when evaluating existing or creating new
programs. Programs that are inconsistent with the mission can erode an
association’s credibility over time, thereby diminishing instead of building its
capacity.
2. Is the activity demand-driven? If members and other stakeholders desire a
particular program or service, they will support it with their time and money.
Programs that are not demand-driven may be successful for a time, but typically
are not sustainable in the long-term.
3. Does the program maximize the use of resources? Staff and financial resources
should be considered when evaluating or creating programs. In many cases,
business associations fail to fully comprehend the cost of programs in terms of
time, material and finances, thereby creating programs that are ultimately non-
sustainable or continuing with existing programs that drain the organization’s
resources.
4. Will the program achieve desired outcomes? Program development should be
linked with overall strategic planning to ensure that activities (programs and
services) are consistent with strategic objectives and achieve desired outcomes.
5. Does the program duplicate the efforts of other organizations? Programs should
be unique and necessary. Typically, an organization should avoid developing
new or protecting existing programs that are duplicative of those offered by other
organizations.
Of the questions included in “The Five Way Test” the first is the most important.
Any program that is not consistent with an organization’s mission should not be
145
included in the strategic plan. Thus, if the answer to the first question is no, the other
questions do not matter.
Draft Program/Service Plan:
Once stakeholder input has been evaluated and an audit of current programs and
services has been conducted, an organization is ready to develop a strategic plan based on
market demand. The following is an example of a portion of such a plan, which was
developed by the Asian Development Bank for its operation in Uzbekistan. It began with
the following needs assessment, which was based on stakeholder input.
Table 7.2: Summary of Key Transition and Development Challenges
Transition and development themes: Links with poverty reduction
Sustainable Economic Growth Human
Capital and
Social
Development
Governance
and
Institutional
Development
Stable
macroecono
mic
environment
Enablin
g
private
sector
develop
ment
Environmentally
sustainable rural
development
Education,
health, and
g
ender results
that impact on
MDGs
Public sector
management
Regional
Cooperation
Dimensions
of Povert
y
Reduction
Employ
ment
and
Income
- Non-
distortionary
revenue
mobilization
- Enhanced
efficiency
and pro-poor
orientation of
public
spending
- Cash
availability
maintained
- Current
account
convertibility
unimpeded
- Trade
policy
regime
liberalized
to realize
export
potential
- Enterprise
restructurin
g
accelerated
- Costs of
operating
in official
economy
reduced
- Oversight
functions
of
commercial
banks
- State
procurement
system
liberalized to
improve
incentive
framework in
agricultural
production
- Private
agricultural
service
providers’
network expands
- Rural nonfarm
j
obs created
- Rural financial
services
developed
- Reduced
gender gap in
secondary and
vocational
education
- Women’s
participation
in the labor
force raised
-
Anticorruptio
n strategy
adopted to
reduce waste
of public
resources
- Budgetary
reform
followed
through
- Procurement
reform
- Physical
and economic
distance to
outside
markets
reduced
through
efficient
transport and
customs
facilitation
- Water–
energy
cooperation
opportunities
pursued
146
Utilizing this information, the ADB developed the following program strategy to
address the private sector’s needs, which focused on the following four strategic
priorities:
i. Accelerate environmentally sustainable rural development by supporting a
diversified, productive, and sustainable rural sector, to create rural jobs and raise
rural incomes.
ii. Enable private sector development by enhancing public sector capacity for
reforms and catalyzing private domestic and foreign investment through ADB’s
private sector operations.
iii. Promote regional cooperation in transport and customs transit by helping develop
regional transport corridors and modernizing customs administration.
iv. Build the human capital of the poor by improving access to enterprise
coordination development and quality basic education.
Figure 7.3: Alignment of Priorities with Program Goals
As indicated in the chart above, the ADB’s strategy links goals, priorities and
outcomes under the framework of effective programming. This matrix allows the ADB
to develop effective programs in each priority area that are designed to achieve the
targeted outcomes. The following table provides a list of the programs ADB designed to
address its strategic priorities:
147
Figure 7.4 ADB Programs to Address Strategic Priorities
Links with governance and institutional development
Strategic
Priority
Institution-building
Accountability and
Transparency
Participation and
Partnerships
Accelerate
environmentally
sustainable
rural
development
· Transforming role of
local hokimiyats from
enforcer of state
procurement system to
facilitator of diversified
rural production system.
· Institutional
strengthening of rural
vodakanals for improved
planning and financial
management in water
supply service delivery
Improved cadastre
system and
transparent and
simplified land
registration
procedures for
security of tenure.
· Community land and
water management
organizations involved
in the management,
operation, and
maintenance of irrigation
and drainage facilities
· In rural water supply
sector, building
community participation
structures.
Enable
private sector
development
· Government capacity
for regulatory planning,
management, and review.
· Institution-building
of competition agency
· Regulatory
transparency,
accountability, and
consistency
· Transparency in
privatization process
· Reduced private
enterprise perceptions
of lack of
transparency and
pervasive corruption
·Institutionalizing public-
private consultations on
proposed legislation and
regulations affecting
private businesses.
·Role of industrial
associations reoriented to
serve as training and
information resource
centers for private small
and medium enterprises
Promote
regional
cooperation
in transport
and customs
transit
Strengthened capacity of
transport and trade
facilitation institutions
for coordination and
cooperation within
country and with regional
partners
Good governance and
sound integrity within
customs
administration
Information exchange and
dissemination of regional
best practices in transport
sector and customs
reforms
Build human
capital of the
poor
National capacity for
education policy
formulation, planning,
and financial
management
Reliability and quality
of education
information base
increased
·Community participation
in early childhood
development project
designs and
implementation
·Building private-public
partnerships and
facilitating private
initiative in education
148
The interconnection of objectives, strategic priorities, programs and outcomes is
consistent with the strategic planning model outlined in Chapter 4. Furthermore, it
allows organizations to vertically integrate its strategy throughout the organization versus
dealing with programs and services separately from membership development, for
instance. This ensures a higher degree of success in the implementation phase.
In summary, business associations should keep the following in mind during the
creation of a plan to develop programs and services:
Use Input Gained from Information Process
Use Results of Program and Service Audit
Specify Proposed Results for Each Program/Service
Specify an Implementation Timeline
Assign Specific Responsibilities
Seek Approval from Board of Directors
Implement Program/Service Plan
Programs and services are typically delivered through one of two mechanisms.
First, staff experts can provide the impetus for launching strategic programs. Business
development experts, for instance, provide business plan development, marketing and
access to credit services for their members throughout the country. Secondly, committees
of staff and volunteers are conduits for program and service implementation. The Center
for Entrepreneurship and Enterprise Development in Montenegro, for instance, developed
a business alliance of key stakeholders in order to address emerging public policy issues.
In this case, staff members served as resources and coordinators, but volunteers were
responsible for implementation. A further explanation of each process is outlined below:
Figure 7.5 Staff Driven vs. Volunteer Driven Program Implementation
Staff Driven: In organizations where staff is primarily responsible for the implementation
of programs and services, this is typically done through technical experts that are paid by
the organization. Business associations in countries where volunteerism is not a cultural
paradigm often employ this strategy. Its major strength is that programs and services are
implemented in a professional manner with a minimum of bureaucracy. Its major
weakness is that it creates little ownership on the part of the organizations leaders and
members since they are not involved in the design, delivery or evaluation of programs
and services.
Volunteer Driven: In organizations where volunteers are primarily responsible for the
implementation of programs and services, this is typically done through the establishment
of committees. Committees are typically chaired by an appointed board member and are
coordinated by a paid staff member appointed by the Chief Paid Executive. The process’
major strength is that it creates ownership among the members involved in the committee
and it allows for free exchange of ideas and expertise. Committees can be bureaucratic,
however, and slow down the implementation process, which is the process’ major
weakness.
149
Either technique, or a combination of both, is consistent with international best
practices. The implementation process is therefore based more on organizational
preference than on a scientific method. Regardless of the implementation strategy,
programs and services should receive ongoing evaluation to ensure effectiveness.
Evaluate Results
Effective evaluation depends on the establishment of quantifiable outcomes, as
well as a methodology designed to measure the effectiveness of programs and services.
Each program/service should be evaluated based on its targeted outcomes, actual
outcomes, overall investment (financial resources, staff time and materials), and return on
investment.
Evaluation implies both subjective and objective assessment. From an objective
standpoint, the chief indicators of effectiveness are the achievement of target outcomes
and the creation of return on investment (financial sustainability). The latter is typically
measured using the following formula:
Figure 7.6 Financial Evaluation Formula
Hard costs (direct financial expenditures) + soft costs (indirect expenditures such as staff
time and materials) = Total Monetary Investment (TMI)
Direct revenue (direct monetary support through non-dues income) + indirect revenue
(through increased membership revenue due to the program/service) = Return on
Investment (ROI).
Return on Investment (ROI) – Total Monetary Investment (TMI) = Financial
Sustainability Potential (FSP)
14
Subjective factors also play into the evaluation equation. It has become common
for business associations to survey members at intervals during the program
implementation process to gain input on “perceived” effectiveness. There are instances
where objective and subjective evaluation criteria will lead to different conclusions, at
which time an association’s leadership must determine the best course of action.
Summary
Effective delivery of demand-driven programs and services requires effective
planning, focused implementation, transparent evaluation, and the willingness to take
corrective action. Any program/service that does not provide return on investment
should be evaluated for its effectiveness regardless of whether or not it is valued by the
organization’s leadership. Hanging on to outdated, ineffective programs can cause
harmful financial and credibility problems within an organization.
14
A positive FSP denotes a program/service that adds financial value to the organization. This is one
indicator, though not the only one, that should be used to evaluate effectiveness.
150
SECTION TWO: THE LOGIC MODEL
Increasingly organizations are using logic models to assist them in making
decisions on the development and expansion of programs and services. Succinctly, a
logic model is a) a depiction of a program showing what the program will do and what it
is to accomplish, b) a series of “if-then” relationships that, if implemented as intended,
lead to the desired outcomes, and c) the core of program planning and evaluation.
The model focuses on inputs, outputs, and outcomes as ways to determine the
potential success of a program or service, but it can also be applied to a process, large
programs, or even to organizations as a whole.
To effectively understand the logic model, it is essential to understand its core
components. According to the American Heritage Dictionary (2
nd
Edition), logic
includes the principles of reasoning and the relationship of elements to each other and the
whole, while a model is a preliminary pattern serving as a plan. In other words, the logic
model can help an organization understand what it wants to accomplish through a
particular program or service and thus the best way to design it to achieve maximum
results. Many organizations view a logic model as a kind of roadmap that helps them get
to their destination in the fastest, most direct way.
A logic model is not a theory, reality, or an evaluation method. Rather, it is a
framework for describing the relationships between program and service design,
implementation and results. The model dates to the 1960’s and has been extensively used
by both business and non-profit organizations. Until recently, it was primarily used to
foster organizational change, but it is now seen as a model to facilitate the development
of programs and services as well.
The model’s benefits are readily apparent and focus on improved
communications, explicit assumptions, and realistic outcomes. At its core, the logic
model is relatively simple. The following examples provide an easy understanding of its
thought process
15
:
15
Taylor-Powell, E, & Henert, E. (2008) Developing a Logic Model: Teaching and Training Guide.
Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin-Extension, Cooperative Extension, Program Development and
Evaluation. http://www.uwex.edu/ces/pdande.
151
The diagram above provides a simple yet important explanation of the logic
model, where a focus on outcomes is the most important. Once the planned outcome is
understood, a process to achieve that outcome can be initiated through the development
of strategic inputs and outputs. Another everyday example further reinforces this
methodology. When a family plans a holiday it may use the logic model to initiate a
desired outcome, which is that the family has a good time on its trip. How can this be
assured? It can be assured by structuring the right inputs and outputs.
16
In order to ensure the right inputs and outputs to achieve the desired result, an
organization must make assumptions. The validity of these assumptions will determine
whether or not the organization achieves the desired outcome. From the standpoint of
program and service development, the quality of the assumptions made during the
planning process is paramount to the creation of desired outcomes. When developing a
program or service, assumptions will help an organization to better understand the
program’s operation, the expected outcomes, the implementation resources that will be
necessary, the staffing resources that will be necessary for implementation, and the
external forces that may influence the desired outcome.
16
Taylor-Powell, E, & Henert, E. (2008) Developing a Logic Model: Teaching and Training Guide.
Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin-Extension, Cooperative Extension, Program Development and
Evaluation. http://www.uwex.edu/ces/pdande.
152
The competitiveness initiative recently launched within the Turkish Cypriot
community in Cyprus is an excellent example of how the logic model can be
implemented on a micro scale to launch a new program/initiative. The following graph
outlines the thought process utilized by the Turkish Cypriot Chamber of Commerce, the
Turkish Cypriot Investment Development Agency and the Turkish Cypriot State Planning
Organization to achieve the desired outcome.
Throughout the logic model, an organization must ask itself a series of
“IF/THEN” questions in order to ensure accurate assumptions. By planning for
contingencies along the continuum of program planning, an organization can establish a
“chain of connections” in the achievement of short, medium, and long-term results. In
the competitiveness program example, there were three layers of outcomes. In the short
term, the stakeholders gained a better understanding of competitiveness and built trust.
In the medium term they identified appropriate actions to take and began implementing
them. In the long term, this may lead to a passage of appropriate “laws”, which could
lead to an increase in overall competitiveness. From the standpoint of planning, this
“chain of connections” looks like the following:
17
17
Taylor-Powell, E, & Henert, E. (2008) Developing a Logic Model: Teaching and Training Guide.
Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin-Extension, Cooperative Extension, Program Development and
Evaluation. http://www.uwex.edu/ces/pdande.
153
To ensure that the “chains of connection” are strong, however, it is incumbent on
an organization to overlay a series of “IF/THEN” scenarios, as outlined in the following
graph:
Using the “IF/THEN” principle as a guide, organizations can audit their
assumptions whenever programs and services do not achieve the desired outcomes. In
many cases, the problem is not with the desired outcomes, but with the assumptions used
to achieve them.
By using a building block technique that incorporates the linkage between inputs,
outputs, and outcomes, then overlaying the “IF/THEN” principle to establish “chains of
connection” organizations can greatly increase the potential effectiveness of programs
and services. In the end, the logic model developed will take the following shape, which
includes resource allocation and evaluation as necessary elements in establishing the
“chains of connection”.
18
18
Taylor-Powell, E, & Henert, E. (2008) Developing a Logic Model: Teaching and Training Guide.
Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin-Extension, Cooperative Extension, Program Development and
Evaluation. http://www.uwex.edu/ces/pdande.
154
One of the potential flaws in interpretation of the logic model is a lack of
understanding of its core elements. For instance, inputs are the “raw materials” needed to
produce outputs, such as staff, volunteers, time and money. Outputs focus on the
activities and participation needed to achieve desired outcomes. Organizations
sometimes confuse “outputs” with “outcomes”, though they are very different. The
difference in the two terms can be addressed with an easy example. For instance, the
number of participants that attend a competitiveness workshop is an output, while the
number of stakeholders that become actively involved in the competitiveness process is
an outcome.
Of organizations that do not use the logic model for the development of programs
and services, most cite its “complexity” as one of the factors. While this argument may
be valid at some level, the logic model’s benefits relative to the development of programs
and services outweigh its shortcomings. Some of these benefits are that the model:
Provides common language
Helps differentiate between what organizations do and what they achieve
Guides and focuses work
Leads to improved planning and management
Increases intentionality and purpose
155
Provides coherence across complex tasks
Enhances teamwork
Motivates staff
Helps identify important variables to be measured
Even with its obvious utilization in the area of programs and services planning,
specific actions should be taken before implementing the logic model. First, an
organization should determine the purpose for using the model (overall organizational
change, development of a program/service). It should then involve others in the process
to determine boundaries for the logic model. Following this, the organization should
endeavor to better understand the situation by conducting research, focus groups, surveys
and other input-gathering activities. In this way, the logic model necessary to ensure
achievement of desired outcomes can be structured properly.
As effective as the model is, it does have limitations. First of all, it represents
intentions, not reality. If assumptions change and actions are altered, outcomes will be
affected as well. Secondly, the model focuses on expected outcomes. Even if all the
assumptions are correct and the process works well, the outcomes achieved may not be
the ones expected due to outside influences and a host of other factors. This is called the
“challenge of casual attribution”, whereby process and outcomes are influenced by a
variety of factors. Finally, the logic model does not address whether or not an
organization is doing the right thing. For instance, if the demand for a program or service
is not significant, the effective use of the model is of no value because the organization
failed to do the right thing from the outset. In other words, the organization may “perfect
the key to the wrong lock”. To avoid this, organizations should check their logic models
by utilizing the “Five Way Test” discussed in the introductory chapter of this guidebook.
This establishes an evaluation mechanism that is consistent with good governance. The
following is a graphic illustrating the relationship between the model and evaluation:
156
The logic model helps with the evaluation of programs and services by a) helping
organizations match the evaluation mechanism to the program/service, b) providing a
guide as to what and when to measure, and c) providing focus on key and important
information. The following graphic explains the mechanism through which the logic
model aids evaluation:
19
Evaluation is the key to measuring the success of a program or service. Without
proper evaluation, the logic model performs only part of its usefulness. Within
19
Taylor-Powell, E, & Henert, E. (2008) Developing a Logic Model: Teaching and Training Guide.
Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin-Extension, Cooperative Extension, Program Development and
Evaluation. http://www.uwex.edu/ces/pdande.
157
organizations, the evaluation model is often the difference between a program or service
being successful on paper rather than in reality. It allows organizations to test
assumptions, address sustainability, build on success, and overcome failures.
Summary
The logic model has emerged as an effective way for organizations to develop
new or expand existing programs and services. It is not a panacea for every situation, but
it does provide a mechanism to allow organizations a process-oriented way to make
better programming decisions.
SECTION THREE: 99 POTENTIAL PROGRAM AND SERVICE IDEAS
Contrary to popular belief, the success of business associations is not all about
money. As a matter of fact, some of the most successful business associations I know
routinely walk away from potential revenue sources because they do not meet the
association’s criteria for participation. Robert Balink, who was my former Vice President
of Membership Development at the Colorado Springs, Colorado Chamber of Commerce,
put it this way. “If it doesn’t fit our mission, I don’t care how much money it makes.”
Successful business associations focus on the needs of their customers, and thus they
develop specific criteria for programs and services that may generate additional revenue.
The following methodology is one that I have found to be successful:
1. Gain Member (Customer) Input: Find out what kinds of products, services,
events, and information your members want. What they want and what they will
pay for will become a revenue source for the association.
2. Develop a Strategy: Using input from both members, professional staff and
volunteer leaders, develop a strategy for funding the association. Set specific
income percentage targets from membership dues and non-dues programs.
3. Use the Five Way Test: The five way test is a way to audit potential programs
and services to ensure their adherence to the association’s mission (detailed in
Chapter 4). A summary of the five way test is as follows:
i. Is the program or service compatible to the association’s mission? (If
no, the association should not embrace the program or service
regardless of its revenue potential).
ii. Is the program or service desired by the association’s membership?
(Even if the program or service is consistent with the mission, if the
association’s members do not perceive it as important, it may not be
the best use of organizational resource).
iii. Does the association have the technical and staffing capacity to sustain
the program or service? (If not the program or service may not be
implemented in a successful manner).
158
iv. Is the program or service duplicative with those offered by another
association(s)? (If so it may be counterproductive for the association to
initiate the program or service).
v. Is the program or service sustainable over the long term? (If not the
association should analyze its impact in the short and medium term to
see if it provides a return on investment that makes the implementation
effort worthwhile).
4. Assign Implementation Teams: Those programs and services that pass the five
way test should be assigned to implementation teams that will develop a strategy
and timeline to initiate them.
5. Develop Implementation Strategy: Each team should develop an
implementation strategy that includes a budget, revenue targets, timeline, and
logistical plan.
6. Implementation: The team should harness the necessary resources to implement
the program or service.
7. Evaluation: At the end of the implementation period, the program or service
should be evaluated based on the criteria developed to measure success.
The rule of thumb in developing revenue-generating programs and services is that
membership should come first. Everything a business association does should be done
with members in mind.
The following are 99 program and service ideas from around the world. They are
or have been implemented by business associations just like yours! Some of the programs
and services will not work for your association, but some may be those you want to
implement right away. At any rate, we strongly suggest that before implementing any of
them, you follow the seven steps discussed above. This will allow you to ensure that
your programs and services are compatible with your mission, and that your focus is
always on your members.
Membership:
1. Membership Campaign: Recruit ten to twenty volunteers, current members of the
business association that are committed to its success, and launch a campaign
through personal contact and the media to recruit new members to the association.
2. Thank You Drive: Recruit ten to twenty volunteers, along with the staff of the
business association, to personally visit every member of the association to say
“thank you” for their ongoing support. Each member should receive an
inexpensive but appropriate thank you gift, as well as some information on the
association’s programs and services. This effort will add revenue to the
159
association by increasing its member retention rate and creating visibility within
the community.
3. Testimonial Campaign: Ask the local newspaper to either donate or provide at a
low cost some advertising space for testimonials about the business association.
These testimonials should come from members of the association that are
committed to its success. They should communicate to potential members and the
community in their own words the importance of the association and its programs.
4. Logo Visibility: Ask your members to display the logo of the business
association in their regular advertisements in the mass media. For instance, if a
retail store runs an advertisement in the newspaper offering a discount on
clothing, ask the store manager to put the business association logo at the bottom
of the advertisement announcing, “This store is a member of the XYZ business
association”.
5. Passport to Progress: Create an inexpensive booklet listing the date, time and
type of each business association event. Distribute this booklet to all members
along with instructions that if they get the passport “stamped” by the association
staff upon their attendance at five or more of the events, they will qualify for a
drawing at the end of the year at which a significant prize (television, dvd player,
cash, etc.) will be awarded. They can only qualify if they participate in the
required number of events. This will increase participation, which will in turn
increase member retention.
6. Business After Hours: Charge a nominal fee for members to attend a Business
After Hours networking event. This event can be held at a business that
“sponsors” it by covering the costs. This is advertising for the business because it
raises the visibility of that particular business and provides access to more
customers for the business. The business association benefits because it generates
additional revenue, hosts a high profile event, and provides a way for members to
interact. Members benefit by networking with each other and with special invited
guests with the goal of gaining additional business opportunities.
7. Business to Business Breakfasts/Luncheons: Obtain a corporate sponsor to pay
the costs of the event, and charge a nominal fee to members that attend. The
breakfast or luncheon (depending on what is more desirable for the members) can
feature a special guest speaker that will ensure good attendance (e.g.
representative of an international donor organization, government official, etc.).
8. “We Care” Program: This program lets members know that the business
association cares for them and is ready to respond to their needs. The program
consists of focus groups, surveys, individual meetings, and other events
developed to let members and potential members know that they are important to
the business association. This will raise the profile of the association and increase
membership revenues.
160
9. Fee for Services: Under a fee for services program, an association member pays a
small membership fee (dues) and then pays an additional amount of the services
he/she uses (e.g. consulting, arbitration, networking, etc.). This allows an
association to keep its membership fees low, while still providing a way to
increase revenues and enhance programming.
10. President’s Club: The President’s Club is a group of 25-100 members that agree
to pay an increased amount of membership dues in order to receive certain
services. For instance, President’s Club members may be offered discounted
admission to association functions, special recognition in its publications, a
private audience with the President once per quarter, access to events where top
government officials will be present, and other amenities.
Publications:
11. Membership Directory: The membership directory is one of the most important
publications distributed by business associations. The cost of the directory can be
offset by advertising revenue, but the association can actually make money on the
publication by contracting with an advertising/printing company that will sell all
the advertising, collect all the funds, print the directories, and provide them to the
association for distribution to its members. Not only does the association obtain a
four-color directory for no charge, but also the royalty fees from the publication
can amount to thousands of dollars in income.
12. Newsletter: There’s no reason any business association should spend money on
the publication of a newsletter. On the contrary, it can make money on its
newsletter by selling advertising to cover the cost. Medium and large companies
within a community are generally very interested in the visibility they will receive
by advertising in a business publication. Also, there are printing/advertising
companies that will sell the advertising, produce the newsletter, and provide a
royalty to the association.
13. Tourism Publications: Tourism guides are also outstanding sources of revenue.
Revenue can easily be generated through advertising, since companies want to
reach tourists with their message. Associations can outsource the advertising
sales, printing and distribution and still make money through a royalty fee.
14. Trade/Investment Publications: Trade/investment publications are becoming
increasingly important to business associations that seek to attract national and
international investment opportunities for their members. While advertising sales
are not generally desirable in these publications, many large companies like to
sponsor them in order to gain visibility in the global marketplace. With two to
three corporate sponsors, the publication can be produced professionally, at a
profit for the association, and be distributed to potential investors.
161
15. City/Regional Maps: Virtually every business prospect that visits a community
wants an up-to-date city or regional map. Business associations can generate
income through advertising sales and at the same time produce a high quality
product. In addition, once the maps are printed, the association can sell them for a
small fee to business prospects, tourists, etc.
16. Local Government Handbook: Many associations around the world are producing
local government handbooks that provide information on elected officials, parties,
and issues. Typically, medium and large companies will fund such a publication
because they want access to the information. The business association’s role can
be to compile the information and generate sponsorships for the publication.
Once published, the handbook provides another reason for companies to join the
association.
17. Guide for Entrepreneurs: A guide for entrepreneurs can outline business
registration procedures, licensing procedures, financing alternatives, and other
useful information. Banks and other financing entities will usually fund such
publications because they reach potential customers. A business association can
generate revenue by soliciting sponsorship of the guide.
Public Policy Advocacy:
18. Legislative Reception: Members want access and many are willing to pay for it.
A business association can generate revenue from a legislative reception that
provides access to senior government officials and Members of Parliament.
Revenue is generated through the solicitation of sponsorships for the event, as
well as from a registration fee. To gain more revenue, an association can open the
event up to non-members at a significantly higher fee. This generates additional
revenue while providing members with an incentive to remain loyal to the
association.
19. Advocacy Day: An event of this type is usually held in a capital city and
coordinated by a business association in order to create visibility for its legislative
agenda as well as to provide access for its members to government officials and
Members of Parliament. The association can gain revenue from the event by
selling sponsorships to major corporations, as well charging a
registration/attendance fee for major events.
20. Legislative Breakfast: A legislative breakfast can be planned once per month and
feature a local, regional or national political figure as the keynote speaker. To
offset the cost, one or a number of companies can sponsor each event. Also, a
small registration fee can be charged to member companies, and a higher fee
charged to non-members.
21. Legislative Information Database: Through the creation of a database containing
information on legislative issues, profiles of elected officials, voter statistics, etc.
162
an association can achieve both credibility and income. The creation and
maintenance of the site can be funded by charging a monthly “subscription” fee to
users of the site, as well as through charging a fee for information generated from
the site.
22. Grassroots Database: Through creation of a database of names and contact
information for grassroots supporters of private sector initiatives, business
associations can gain both credibility and revenue. Since associations, NGOs, and
companies have legislative issues on which they want to take action, they need
access to a database of potential supporters. The business association can
generate revenue by providing this information for a fee.
23. Advocacy Newsletter: Real time information is critical to organizations, NGOs,
and companies that are active in the advocacy process. Through the creation of
an advocacy newsletter that focuses on issues, statistics and grassroots data, a
business association can generate revenue. The newsletter can generate income
through selling subscriptions to interested organizations.
24. Advocacy Training: A business association can increase its credibility and
income by providing advocacy training. By training at least one person in the
association to facilitate advocacy skill-building exercises, business associations
can generate revenue through registration fees for both traditional and on-line
programs.
International Trade/Investment:
25. Global Investment Forum: A business association can coordinate a forum to help
companies take advantage of global investment opportunities. Typically, donor
organizations will sponsor such events, as will multi-national companies. A small
registration fee can generate additional revenue for the association.
26. Business-to-Business Networking Reception: These events are designed to bring
together potential international investors (embassy commercial officers, CEOs of
multi-national companies, etc.) and local companies. Business associations can
benefit dually from revenue generated through sponsorships and participation fees
as well as gaining visibility in the community.
27. Trade Missions: Trade missions are important sources of revenue for
associations. To mitigate travel costs, the association can gain sponsorship of an
airline, hotel, etc. making them the “official” travel partners of the event. Also, in
addition to paying their travel costs, participants should pay a participation fee to
the association. Trade missions take months of coordination and should only be
conducted after thorough planning.
163
28. Trade Exhibitions: Business associations can gain revenue through providing
skill-building training to companies that want to participate in exhibitions. In
addition, associations develop an “Exhibition Task Force” made up of advertising,
design and economic development specialists that will work with members that
are participating in an exhibition. Generally, members will gladly pay a fee for
this expertise.
29. Virtual Trade Mission: By creating a Virtual Trade Mission portal business
associations can add another member service to their portfolios. In addition, the
associations can promote the portal to non-members since only verified
association members can gain access to its database of companies and offers. The
Virtual Trade Mission portal was specifically designed to help business
associations gain additional revenue through its use as a membership recruitment
tool.
Technology:
30. Website Development: Business associations around the world are finding
website development as a consistent source of additional revenue. In
collaboration with an internet service provider, business associations can contract
with member companies to design their web pages. Not only can associations
earn additional revenue from the companies themselves, but also from
collaborative agreements with ISPs that want to have access to potential new
customers.
31. E-Commerce Site: Associations are beginning to tap the revenue potential of e-
commerce sites. By collaborating with one or a group of technology companies,
associations can provide companies with the ability to develop their own e-
commerce sites. Rather than developing the sites, the business associations
receive a percentage of revenue from every site developed by the technology
companies involved in the project. This provides additional customers for the
web design companies and additional revenue for the associations.
32. Web-Based Advertising: Business associations are natural conduits for web-
based advertising, whether the associations sell the advertising themselves and
use the profit to fund other activities, or whether they contract with advertising
partners to sell the advertising and provide them with a percentage of the profit.
33. Electronic Newsletter/Magazine: Digital information represents increased
revenue opportunities for business associations. Electronic newsletters and
magazines are desired by members and can generate revenue through advertising,
subscriptions, and sponsorships.
34. On-Line Training: Business associations that possess the appropriate technology
can provide on-line training through sponsorships or subscriptions. This training
raises the profile of the association as well as provides additional revenue.
164
35. E-Networking: A majority of business association members list access to
customers as their number one expectation. With this in mind, business
associations can provide e-networking opportunities as well as more traditional
ones (see Business After Hours). One potential e-networking idea is to develop a
small and medium sized best practices portal in which SMEs can communicate
with each other, share offers, take advantage of training and financing resources,
and have access to outsourcing offers provided by larger companies. Business
associations can gain additional revenue by offering this service on a subscription
basis.
36. Community Video/CD: Potential business partners, investors, and donors want
access to as much information on communities as possible. Business
associations, by collaborating with one or a group of technology companies, can
develop a community CD-Rom or video that is sponsored by major companies.
These items can then be sold to potential investors, business prospects,
salespersons, etc.
37. Legislative Information Network: By providing real time information via the
internet or e-mail, business associations can gain additional revenue. On-line
legislative programs can provide information on issues, candidates, and parties as
well as statistics, voting records, etc. Business associations can offer this
information on a subscription basis and provide a password protected
environment in which it can be retrieved. Also business associations can
customize information for a higher fee to members who want specific information
on one or a group of issues.
38. Information Line: Business associations can install a special telephone line to
provide information on the community, the association, upcoming events, the
time and temperature, etc. This can be established as either a toll free or charge-
based line in order to provide revenue to the associations. Also, the line can be
“sponsored” a company or group of companies. Under this scenario, callers
would here a ten or twelve second “advertisement” about the sponsoring company
when they are connected to the information line.
Printing/Back Office:
39. Contract Mail Service: Business associations can contract with companies to
prepare and process its UPS, Federal Express, and DHL shipping. Associations
can charge a 5% commission on top of the shipping costs in order to generate
revenue.
40. Leasing of Office Space: Business associations that have excess office space can
lease space to small and medium sized companies at market or below market
rates. Also, they may want to charge these companies a small fee to use
equipment and other assets of the association.
165
41. Outsourcing Contract: Business associations can benefit financially from
outsourcing in a variety of ways. One way is for associations to do contract
bookkeeping for small enterprises that do not have the ability to do this on their
own. Another outsourcing opportunity is web design, which associations can
provide for a fee to members and non-members that do not have the capacity to
design a web page on their own.
42. Equipment Rental: Associations can invest in equipment such as video
projectors, lap top computers, overhead projectors, flip charts, etc. and rent them
to companies and organizations that do not have the funds to purchase the
equipment. This provides an ongoing source of revenue and helps to offset the
cost of the investment in equipment.
43. Mailing Lists: For a fee, associations can provide their mailing list on mailing
labels or list form to organizations, international donors, or companies. This
service is especially attractive to retail merchants that want to publicize offers.
This service can also be valuable to academicians and other researchers alike who
are interested in carrying out public or academic research.
Consulting Services:
44. Business Development Consulting: Business associations around the world have
found that business consulting is a consistent source of revenue. This may take
the form of financial consulting, marketing assistance, sales training, or customer
service support.
45. Entrepreneurial Assistance: This assistance can come in the form of financial
consulting, development of business plans, networking support, and assistance in
gaining appropriate licenses and permits to start a business. This has become a
basic source of revenue for many business associations.
46. Labor Negotiations: Some business associations, especially those that focus on
sector-specific activities, provide mediation services between member companies
and representatives of labor unions. This is typically done on a contract basis.
47. Arbitration Services: In recent years, many business associations have begun to
offer arbitration services in order to mediate disputes between member
companies. Arbitration is cheaper and faster than court proceedings and can
provide significant revenue to business associations that invest in the training of
certified arbiters.
48. Quality Standards: Business associations are increasingly interested in quality
standards assessment and training. This may encompass ISO certification, total
quality management integration, leadership development, or a myriad of other
services. This is best done on a contract basis with member and non-member
166
companies. As with all services, members should receive a significant discount as
a reward for their loyalty to the association.
49. Management Audits: Some business associations are now contracting with
companies to conduct management audits on a fee-for-service basis. This
requires associations to invest time and money in the certification of expert
auditors, and it also requires significant marketing.
50. Legal Services: In transitional economies, many business associations are now
offering legal consulting as part of their core services. On a contract basis,
consulting on legal issues can generate an impressive amount of revenue for
associations.
51. Market Research: Business associations are natural conduits for market research
as they typically are unbiased in their approach and have the resources to collect
real-time information. Companies, especially those launching a new product or
service, are willing to pay a significant fee for professional market research to
augment their own in-house efforts.
Events:
52. Top Company Event: A Top Company event (an event that honors top
performing companies) not only creates visibility for business associations, but
can also create revenue. Corporate sponsors can be solicited to offset expenses,
and additional revenue can be generated by ticket sales and publications.
53. Business Person of the Year Banquet: Business Person of the Year Banquets not
only increases the visibility of business associations, they also create loyalty.
Through solicitation of corporate sponsors, ticket sales, and publication sales,
associations can raise significant revenue.
54. Entrepreneurial Spirit Banquet: A banquet honoring entrepreneurs will typically
attract significant financial support from corporations, government, and the donor
community. The banquet could honor the top entrepreneurs in a region, feature a
keynote speaker, and highlight the top ten entrepreneurial ideas for consideration
by financial institutions and investors.
55. Excellence in Education Luncheon: Honoring outstanding educators and top
students is an effective way for business associations to gain both visibility and
revenue. Corporations are typically enthusiastic about sponsoring such events, so
the revenue potential is vast.
56. Excellence in Government Luncheon: By honoring the accomplishments of
government officials and Members of Parliament, business associations can
achieve the dual goals of highlighting their legislative agenda and thanking
167
elected officials that have assisted them over the course of a year. Corporations,
NGOs, and other organizations are usually good targets for sponsorship income
57. Annual Meeting (e.g. General Assembly): Many business associations have
failed to tap the revenue creation potential offered by their annual meeting (or
annual general assembly as it is called in some areas). Corporate sponsors are a
good source of revenue for the event, as are special events linked to the event like
an auction of donated prizes (such as trips, electronics, etc.) and tournaments
(such as football or basketball), which offer camaraderie but also, generate
revenue through registration fees.
58. Sports Tournaments (e.g. football, golf, basketball, etc.): Business associations
around the world are beginning to tap the potential of sponsoring sports
tournaments, as they are great sources for sponsorship fees and registration
income. Also, concession fees (the sale of food and drink) at these events can
generate thousands of dollars in additional revenue.
59. Affinity Programs: Affinity programs are those that provide members of an
association a discount or special offer because of their affiliation with the
association. .
60. Insurance Program: Business associations can develop an “insurance group” of
small and medium-sized companies that wish to offer additional insurance
coverage as an employee incentive. By contracting with an insurance company to
provide a group of a certain size to purchase life, health, auto, or homeowners
insurance, business associations can earn thousands of dollars in royalty fees.
61. Cellular Telephone Discount Program: This program is especially effective in
transitional economies where companies are competing fiercely for cellular
customers. Business associations can contract with a cellular telephone company
to establish it as the “official” cellular provider. By doing this, the associations
earn revenue from royalties based on the number of their members that subscribe
to the service; members received a reduced rate by being a member of the
business association; and the company gains new customers. More than one
company may participate by agreeing to pay the business associations a fee for
each of their members that register for service.
62. Internet Service Discount Program: Using the same scenario as with cellular
telephone providers, business associations can contract with one or a number of
ISPs and receive a fee for each association member that registers a new account.
63. Community Card: The community card is created in conjunction with local
merchants and it encourages people to shop at home rather than traveling to a
larger city or leaving the country. Business associations provide members with a
discount card that can be used at participating merchants for reduced prices on
one or a number of items. The merchants typically pay the associations a fee to
168
be part of the program as it increases their number of potential customers. The
community card is a free service the associations can provide to their members,
which ultimately creates additional membership revenue.
64. Rental Car Discount Program: Using the same scenario as with cellular
telephones and ISPs, business associations can contract with one or a number of
rental car companies to provide discounts to their members. Typically, the
associations receive a fee for each member that rents a car during the period of the
contract.
65. Travel Discount Program: Some business associations offer discount books for
reduced priced lodging, attractions, airfare, and meals. These coupon books are
supported by advertising revenue, so the members of the associations can receive
them free.
Agreements:
66. Collaboration Agreements: Business associations can collaborate with other
associations, companies, NGOs, or donor organizations to sponsor events and
programs. Each of the collaborative partners would have a share in the revenue
generated by the program or service. This allows small associations that have low
capacity to produce events and services on their own to partner with other entities
and gain access to needed revenue while offering a new program or service to
members.
67. Joint Marketing Agreements: Business associations sometimes join with
companies to jointly market products and services. For instance, associations
may join with a shipping provider such as UPS to jointly market its discount
shipping service during the Christmas holidays. Typically, companies are willing
to pay a joint marketing fee to business associations in order to gain access to
customers.
68. Licensing Agreements: A growing number of business associations are joining
with companies to create a product or service that can generate revenue through
licensing fees. For instance, an association in Indonesia contracted with an
information technology company to create membership development software for
membership based organizations. The association received a licensing fee for
each product sold. The company benefited by becoming identified with this
successful product, and its sales increased dramatically.
Merchandise:
69. Logo Merchandise: Some business associations, especially those with a high
profile or a definable logo, have created merchandise that features their logo.
This merchandise can include shirts, caps, coffee mugs, key chains, ink pens and
any other item that can be sold to the public.
169
70. Community Collectibles: In communities where unique products are produced
(such as porcelain, pottery, etc.) business associations can create revenue by
purchasing these products wholesale and selling them to the general public at
retail prices. Another possible scenario is for business associations to contract
with the manufacturers to promote their goods. Manufacturers are usually willing
to pay a commission to the associations for their assistance in marketing their
merchandise.
71. Photographs/Prints: Photographs and prints have become big business, and
visitors are especially interested in purchasing unique pictures of a city or region.
For a relatively low investment, business associations can produce professional
photographs and prints for sale to the public.
Services:
72. Community Guides: Community guides are consistent sources of additional
income. They are usually created in conjunction with an advertising/printing
partner that agrees to sell the advertising, produce the guides, and provide final
copies of the guide and a royalty fee to the business associations. The
associations control the editorial content of the guide and have input into the
design, but a majority of the work is done by the advertising/printing partner that
keeps up to 80% of the advertising revenue.
73. Translation Services: Business associations can offer translation services to
individuals and companies that wish to do business in a particular city or region.
For a fee, Chamber staff or contractors can translate official documents, letters,
and other information.
74. Interpretation Services: Business associations can offer interpretation services to
individuals and companies that wish to do business in a particular city or region.
For a fee, Chamber staff or contractors can interpret at meetings with clients, as
well as assist in logistical details of trips and transactions.
Community Events:
75. Festivals: Every community has cultural, historical and artistic uniqueness that
can be translated into the initiation of a festival. Festivals hold great opportunities
for business associations to generate additional revenue. Associations can
participate in festivals that already exist by selling merchandise produced by their
members, local or regional treats, etc. Associations can also initiate new festivals
and promote them on the regional, national and international markets. Some
organizations around the world generate tens of thousands of dollars from
festivals, though they take a great deal of coordination and expertise.
170
76. Silent Auctions: A silent auction is an event, usually attached to a reception,
annual meeting, or other major function, where a business association collects
donated items on which participants can bid. Rather than a traditional auction,
participants are provided the opportunity to bid “silently” by writing their bids on
a piece of paper. At various times throughout the event, bidders check the paper
in front of their desired item to see if anyone has bid higher than have they. If this
is the case, they can increase the bid until such time as the auction is declared
over. At that time, the person holding the highest bid gets the item. Business
associations can make thousands of dollars on silent auctions by collecting
donated prizes and obtaining sponsors for the event. By doing this, it ensures that
all the proceeds from the bids will go to the association.
77. Marathons/Sports Events: Marathons and other sporting events are good sources
of revenue. Because people are becoming more sports conscious, events that
include competition create an opportunity for business associations to create
revenue. While marathons are on the upswing, other competitions such as
football tournaments, basketball competitions, and even track and field events are
increasing in importance. By utilizing corporate sponsors and charging entry
fees, business associations can benefit from the competitive spirit of the
community.
78. Raffles/Drawings: While typically not a stand-alone activity, raffles and
drawings can be used effectively in conjunction with other events. Business
associations often get a major prize donated by a member company and they sell
raffle tickets to individuals who hope to win. The raffle prize may be a vacation,
two weeks at a mountain house, a flat screen television, or even an automobile!
The more desirable the potential prize, the more revenue that can be raised
through the raffle.
79. Galas: Increasingly, the members of business associations like to get dressed up
and attend a party honoring a community event, patron, political figure, or
significant achievement. Business associations create revenue by coordinating
these events, soliciting sponsors and selling tickets for participation. Some
associations have sponsored New Years Eve events, while others have focused on
specific business events such as an annual meeting or a businessperson’s ball.
80. Air Shows: Air shows are difficult to coordinate and often the initial costs are
high. However, due to attractiveness of these events to the general public,
business associations have begun to consider them as potential sources for
additional revenue. It typically takes two to three years for the event to generate
large amounts of revenue, and of course it is dependent on good weather and
other factors outside the business associations’ control.
81. Art in the Park: Associations are now beginning to consider arts and cultural
events when developing their strategies for creating additional revenue. Art in the
Park is an event at which local artisans (painters, craftsmen, sculptors, etc.)
171
display their works for sale in an outdoor setting. Not only does this event usually
draw large crowds, but also business associations can make money by charging
participation fees to the artists or contracting with them for a percentage of sales.
The event also provides increased visibility to the associations.
82. Reunion Days: This event is designed to bring former residents of a community
back for a day or a weekend in order to reminisce and enjoy a part of their past.
Business associations can generate revenue from this event by recruiting
corporate sponsors, charging participation fees to companies that want to be
involved, creating discount shopping programs at local merchants, etc. Also, it is
a high visibility event at which the associations can promote their activities.
83. Historical Tours: For cities with a great deal of historical significance, business
associations can unearth a treasure trove of potential revenue by training
volunteers to conduct historical tours. In many cases, the volunteers dress in
historic costumes and provide tourists with a unique historical experience.
Tourists typically will pay handsomely for this type of tour, and business
associations can either conduct them on their own or collaborate with one or more
tour operators on a royalty basis. In the case of the latter scenario, the
associations would agree to market the historical tours and the collaborating
companies would pay either a percentage fee or a participation fee to the
associations.
84. Arts for All: Since art is important to people of all ages, an Arts for All
celebration can bring a community together while creating revenue for the
associations that coordinate the activity. Arts for All is a “festival” that promotes
all types of art (theatre, sculpting, painting, crafts, cinematography, etc.) and puts
it on display for visitors. While the event requires broad-based community
support and collaboration with local government, it is very attractive to corporate
sponsors, visitors, and artisans.
85. Children’s/Youth Day: Children’s/Youth Day is a day designed for the
enjoyment of young people from babies to teenagers. Art and cultural events,
sports, food, music, and dancing can all be part of this day that celebrates the joy
of youth. Since young people are potential customers, and their parents already
are, corporate sponsors that are interested in brand identity are natural sponsors.
Also, this event produces very high visibility for the sponsoring association(s).
86. Theatre Night: Business associations can contract with a particular stage theatre
or acting company to do a special performance for members and potential
members of the associations. Companies view this event as a good sponsorship
opportunity since it usually draws the leaders of a community. Business
associations generate revenue through both ticket sales and sponsorships, while
creating a forum for distribution of information on the associations’ programs and
services.
172
Affiliates:
87. Foundation: An increasing number of business associations are developing
foundations as profit centers. These foundations can be charitable, social,
educational, business related. Since laws governing foundations are different than
those governing associations, foundations typically offer associations the ability
to address specific community needs while also increasing revenues.
88. Political Action Committee: Where they are legally authorized by law, political
action committees can become important entities to both business associations
and political parties. Political action committees are governed by a board of
directors and are usually affiliated with one or more business associations. The
associations generate revenue from the administration of the committees. Funds
for the political action committee are raised from both individuals and
corporations and are passed on in a legal and transparent manner to parties and
elected officials that support the development of the private sector.
Others:
89. Community Leadership Program: Community leadership programs are not only
good sources of potential revenue for business associations, but also are
organizations that can greatly enhance the leadership dynamics of communities.
The program typically runs on one year cycles and includes a class of ten to
twenty potential leaders that are nominated and selected based on the merits of
their applications. Business associations gain revenue through tuition, corporate
sponsorships of the program or of individual sessions, as well as through potential
donor community participation.
90. Economic Development Foundation: An economic development foundation
recruits jobs and investment, thereby making it an important conduit for public-
private financing. Most economic development foundations are funded by both
public and private dollars, with donor organizations and large corporations taking
on a lead role in private sector funding.
91. Service Corps of Retired Executives: This program, known as SCORE in much
of the world, partners retired business executives with entrepreneurs and small
business owners in an effort to provide consultation and support. Business
associations can gain revenue from this program by charging a small fee for
service to companies that wish to take advantage of the volunteer experts’
services.
92. Business Mentor Program: The business mentor program is a way for business
associations to provide an important service and also create revenue. Business
mentors are recruited from a variety of professions and assigned to individuals or
small companies that need specific support or advice. Corporate sponsors
typically embrace this program due to its focus on business.
173
93. Adopt-A-School Program: This program is a way to provide schools with needed
equipment and materials and at the same time generate revenue for business
associations. Adopt-A-School is a program where local businesses and individuals
are encouraged to donate funds, equipment and volunteers to schools in order to
enhance the quality of life for students. Revenue for business associations is
generated through sponsorship of the program by corporations and private
individuals.
94. Adopt-A-Teacher Program: This is a similar program to Adopt-A-School, except
it focuses on providing classroom supplies to individual teachers. The
administration of this program is complex, but business associations can benefit
from its community focus and from revenue provided by corporate sponsors and
individuals.
95. Adopt-A-Highway Program: The Adopt-A-Highway program is usually done in
conjunction with a municipal or regional authority that contracts with a business
association to administer it. The association recruits volunteers, provides supplies
(trash bags, protective vests, etc), and assigns the volunteers to specific roads or
streets. In turn, the municipal or county authority pays a fee to the association for
this service.
96. Corporate Social Responsibility Program: Due to recent events around the world,
Corporate Social Responsibility is becoming an increasingly important topic.
Business associations can benefit by coordinating conferences and providing
information on this topic. Corporations are keen to support such efforts, and
significant funding can be raised by business associations that become well-
versed on the topic and have the capacity to carry forward the initiative.
97. Corporate Governance Program: Corporate governance continues to be an
important issue, and donor organizations continue to pour money into business
associations that promote corporate governance programs.
98. Speaker/Lecture Series: Business associations can develop a lecture series
featuring noted speakers on a variety of issues. Each event can be sponsored by a
company or group of companies and a small admission fee can also be charged.
In addition to generating revenue, these events establish business associations as
the conduit for discussion and debate on significant issues.
99. Tourism Guides Program: Business associations can recruit and train tourism
guides that are then used by local tour operators. Tour operators can be charged a
fee for each guide used, or a higher registration fee that allows them to be part of
the program and use as many guides as they wish throughout the year.
174
CHAPTER EIGHT
FINANCIAL BEST PRACTICES FOR BUSINESS ORGANIZATIONS
Overview of Business Organization Financial Practices
It is common knowledge that more organizations are destroyed and more Chief
Paid Executives are terminated over financial matters than any other single cause. This
being the case, it is imperative that organizations accurately record and report their
financial positions to both the board of directors and membership at intervals established
within the bylaws. Typically, this means monthly reports to the board of directors and at
least annual reporting to the membership as a whole.
Financial processes consist of budgeting, financial reporting and, in the case of
organizations in transitional and post-conflict countries, sustainability planning. Salient
to financial reporting is the type of accounting system used to track income and expenses.
Most countries have laws that govern the type of system to be used, but as a general rule,
accounting principles are segmented into the following two processes:
Figure 8.1 Accrual and Cash Accounting
Accrual: In accrual basis accounting, accrued expense is a liability resulting from an
expense for which no invoice or other official document is available yet. Similarly,
accrued revenue is an asset resulting from revenue for which no official document is
issued yet. The other side of the entry will always be a profit and loss account - expense
in the first case and revenue in the latter one.
20
Cash: In cash basis accounting, income and expenses are recorded during the period
when they are actually received or paid.
As a general rule, business associations (especially smaller ones) prefer cash
accounting as it provides an easy snapshot of the organizations real-time revenue and
expenses. Regardless of the accounting method chosen, budgeting is the first and most
important process in accurately tracking finances.
Organizational Budgets
While each organization should determine the nature and design of its financial
reports, their accuracy begins with sound budgeting. From a financial standpoint,
organizational sustainability flows from the establishment of a sound budget that includes
a long term financial strategy. There are two primary types of budgets:
20
Source: Wikapedia
175
Organizational Budget
An organizational budget includes a projection of an organization’s revenue and
expenses during a fixed period of time. A number of organizations, especially those
receiving donor assistance, draft multi-year budgets similar to the following, which is
based on a fictional Women’s Business Association (WBA) operating in a transitional
economy:
8.2 Organizational Budget: Expense
Category Year One Year Two
Year
Three
Total
Local Office Operations
Personnel Expenses
Executive Director
$72,800 $75,600 $79,380
$
227,780
Executive Assistant
$9,600 $10,080 $10,584
$
30,264
VP of Membership
$30,000 $31,500 $33,075
$
94,575
Executive VP, Women's Training Center
$48,000 $49,500 $51,000
$
148,500
VP, Women's Trade Development Center
$36,000 $38,000 $40,000
$
114,000
IT Manager
$12,000 $12,600 $13,230
$
37,830
Publications Manager
$24,000 $25,200 $26,460
$
75,660
Receptionist
$3,600 $3,780 $3,969
$
11,349
Drivers
$14,400 $15,120 $15,876
$
45,396
Housekeeping
$4,800 $5,040 $5,292
$
15,132
Data Collectors
$4,800 $5,040 $5,292
$
15,132

Subtotal Local Office
$260,000 $271,460 $284,158
$
815,618

Program Expenses

Training Center
$123,000 $123,000 $123,000
$
369,000
Trade Development Center
$772,680 $772,680 $100,000
$
1,645,360
Printing
$15,000 $15,000 $15,000
$
45,000

Subtotal Program Expenses
$910,680 $910,680 $238,000
$
2,059,360

General and Administrative Costs

Office Lease (12 mos @ $3,500/mo)
$42,000 $42,000 $42,000
$
126,000
Utilities/Fuel
$1,200 $1,200 $1,200
$
3,600
Communications (12 mos @ $2,000/mo)
$24,000 $24,000 $24,000
$
72,000
Technology (6 computers @ $2,000)
$12,000
$
12,000
176
Copy Machine (1 large - 1 small)
$11,000
$
11,000
Printers (1 color- 2 b/w)
$1,800
$
1,800
Telephone System
$3,000
$
3,000
Furniture
$8,000
$
8,000
Office Supplies (12 mos @ $1,000/mo)
$12,000 $12,000 $12,000
$
36,000
Travel: Domestic
$12,000 $12,000 $12,000
$
36,000
Travel: International
$12,000 $12,000 $12,000
$
36,000
Vehicle
$20,000
$
20,000
Equipment Maintenance
$3,000 $3,000 $3,000
$
9,000

Subtotal General and Administrative Costs
$162,000 $106,200 $106,200
$
374,400

Total Local Office Expense
$1,332,680 $1,288,340 $628,358
$
3,249,378

Branch Office Operations

Personnel Expense

Regional Director (5)
$50,000 $60,000 $63,000
$
173,000
Office Assistants (5)
$24,750 $30,000 $31,500
$
86,250
Receptionists (5)
$14,850 $18,000 $18,900
$
51,750
Housekeeping/Facility Maintenance
$9,900 $12,000 $12,600
$
34,500

Subtotal Affiliate Office Expenses
$99,500 $120,000 $126,000
$
345,500

Program Expenses

Regional Round Tables
$15,000 $30,000
$
45,000
Capacity Building (internal training)
$50,000 $50,000
$
100,000

Subtotal Affiliate Program Expenses
$65,000 $80,000 $‐
$
145,000

General and Administrative Expenses

Rent and Utilities (5 offices)
$30,000 $36,000 $43,200
$
109,200
Furniture (5 offices)
$10,000
$
10,000
Technology (10 computers @ $1,500)
$15,000
$
15,000
Printers (5 @ $500)
$2,500
$
2,500
Telephones (2 per region)
$1,000
$
1,000
Copy Machines (5 @ $2,000)
$10,000
$
10,000
Compressor
$5,000 $
177
5,000
Communications
$12,000 $12,000 $12,000
$
36,000
Office Supplies (5 @ $200/mo for 12 mos)
$12,000 $12,000 $12,000
$
36,000
Travel (including drivers)
$8,000 $8,000 $8,000
$
24,000

Subtotal Affiliate General and Administrative Expenses
$105,500 $68,000 $75,200
$
248,700
Total Affiliate Office Expenses
$270,000 $268,000 $201,200
$
739,200
Total Expenses
$1,602,680 $1,556,340 $829,558
$
3,988,578
This three year budget deals only with expenses, as it is based on a fixed amount
of donor assistance over a three year period. Since no historical record existed to validate
expenses, the organization used its best estimate to ensure accuracy. This means the
WBA will have to closely monitor expenses in order to avoid a budget shortfall due to
flawed budget projections. More typical is a budget that also includes revenue projects,
like this example from the fictional Janpeth Manufacturer’s Association (JMA) in India:
178
Figure 8.3 Organizational Budget: Income and Expense
Income 
   
Category YearOne YearTwo YearThree

MembershipDues $221,500 $232,575 $244,203
OrganizationalMembershipDues $5,500$5,500$5,500
InternationalDonorandNGOMembershipDues $63,000$63,000$63,000

TotalMembershipDuesIncome $290,000.00 $301,075.00 $312,703

Divisions: 

NonMembershipDues$57,200$58,345$59,510
BusinessDevelopmentServices(BDS)$57,200$58,345 $59,510
TradeandInvestmentPromotionOffice$57,200$58,345$59,510
ManufacturingLinkagesProgram$46,300$47,225$48,170
PublicationsandEvents$27,300$27,845$28,400
FieldOffices$27,300$27,845$28,400

InternationalContracts $350,000$350,000$350,000

TotalIncome $912,500 $929,025.00 $946,203


Expenses 
   
Category

LocalOfficeOperations 

PersonnelExpenses 

ExecutiveDirector$55,000 $56,100 $57,222
ChiefOperatingOfficer$30,000 $30,600 $31,212
MembershipDirector $24,000 $24,480 $24,970
BDSDirector$18,000 $18,360 $18,727
TradePromotionDirector$18,000 $18,360 $18,727
ManufacturingLinkagesDirector$18,000 $18,360 $18,727
PublicationsandEventsDirector$18,000 $18,360 $18,727
FieldOfficesDirector$18,000 $18,360 $18,727
FinanceDirector$18,000 $18,360 $18,727
ITDirector$15,000 $15,300 $15,606
PublicPolicyandAdvocacyDirector$24,000 $24,480 $24,970
SupportStaff $80,000 $81,600 $83,232

SubtotalPersonnelExpenses $336,000 $342,720 $349,574

ProgramExpenses 
179

TradePromotion$25,000 $25,500 $26,010
ManufacturingLinkages$25,000 $25,500 $26,010
Membership$25,000 $25,500 $26,010
BDS $25,000 $25,500 $26,010
Publications&Events$25,000 $25,500 $26,010
FieldOffices$65,000 $66,300 $67,626

SubtotalProgramExpenses $190,000 $193,800 $197,676

GeneralandAdministrativeCosts 

OfficeLease(12mos@$9000.00/mo)$108,000 $108,000 $108,000
Utilities$1,200 $1,200 $1,200
Communications(12mos@$2,000/mo)$24,000 $24,000 $24,000
Technology(6computers@$2,000)
CopyMachine(1large‐1small)
Printers(1color‐2b/w)
TelephoneSystem
Furniture
OfficeSupplies(12mos@$1,000/mo)$12,000 $12,000 $12,000
Travel:Domestic$24,000 $12,000 $12,000
Travel:International$24,000 $12,000 $12,000
Vehicle$‐ $20,000
EquipmentMaintenance$3,000 $3,000 $3,000

SubtotalGeneralandAdministrativeCosts $196,200 $172,200 $192,200

TotalLocalOfficeExpense $722,200 $708,720 $739,450

BranchOfficeOperations 
PersonnelExpense 
RegionalDirector(5)$50,000 $60,000 $63,000
OfficeAssistants(5)$24,750 $30,000 $31,500
Receptionists(5)$14,850 $18,000 $18,900
Housekeeping$9,900 $12,000 $12,600

SubtotalBranchOfficeExpenses $99,500 $120,000 $126,000

GeneralandAdministrativeExpenses 
RentandUtilities(5offices)$30,000 $36,000 $43,200
Furniture(5offices)$10,000
Technology(10computers@$1,500)$15,000
Printers(5@$500)$2,500
Telephones(2perregion)$1,000
CopyMachines(5@$2,000)$10,000
Generators(5@$1,000)$5,000
Communications $12,000 $12,000 $12,000
OfficeSupplies(5@$200/mofor12mos)$12,000 $12,000 $12,000
Travel(includingdrivers)$8,000 $8,000 $8,000
180

SubtotalBranchOfficeGeneralandAdministrativeExpenses $105,500 $68,000 $75,200

TotalBranchOfficeExpenses $205,000 $188,000 $201,200

ContingencyExpenses$10,000 $10,000 $10,000

TotalExpenses $927,200 $896,720 $940,650

TotalProfit(Loss)$(14,700) $32,305 $5,553
The JMA budget is conservative on the revenue side while being more liberal on
the expense side. This prevents surprises during the year if revenues do not achieve
budgeted targets or expenditures are more than expected. Also, the JMA uses historical
financial performance to assist in the budgeting process. By analyzing income and
expenditures in past years, the association can better predict them in future years. Also,
its budget includes notes for each line item that are attached to the budget and provide
background on why particular budget numbers were used. This is useful at intervals
during the year as a reminder to the Chief Paid Executive or program managers as to why
line items were budgeted in a certain way.
Programmatic Budget
Both organizations also utilize another type of budgeting, programmatic, which is
imbedded in the organizational budget but split out for use by program managers. A
program budget focuses on a specific activity. In the WBA’s case, it developed the
following program budget for its entrepreneurship training center. Again, it only
addresses expenses since donor revenue to fund the activities is guaranteed for three
years:
Figure 8.4 Program Budget: Expense
ExpenseCategory YearOne YearTwo YearThree Total

Supplies$3,000 $3,000 $3,000
$
9,000
Programs 
EntrepreneurshipTraining$20,000 $20,000 $20,000
$
40,000
TradeExhibitionTraining$20,000 $20,000 $20,000
$
40,000
FinanceWorkshops$20,000 $20,000 $20,000
$
50,000
LeadershipEvents$20,000 $20,000 $20,000
$
55,000
NetworkingEvents$10,000 $10,000 $10,000
$
25,000
Mentorship$20,000 $20,000 $20,000
$
60,000
UniversityBusinessWomen'sClub$10,000 $10,000 $10,000
$
30,000

Total$123,000 $123,000 $123,000
$
369,000
181
Being a larger organization, the JMA developed a breakdown budget for functional areas
rather than specific programs. The following is the budget for its Trade Development
Center:
Figure 8.5 Program Budget: Income and Expense
Trade Development Center
Exhibition Income $10,800.00
Workshop Income $18,000.00
Corporate Sponsorships $18,000.00
Total Income $46,800.00
Personnel Expenses
Salaries, wages $15,000.00
Benefits
Payroll taxes
Commissions and bonuses
Personnel Expense Total $15,000.00
Program Expenses
Advertising $400.00
Direct marketing $215.00
Internet marketing $800.00
Press relations $150.00
Public relations $100.00
Communications and Training $2,000.00
Promotions and Incentives $3,500.00
Events $2,000.00
Program Expense Total $9,165.00
Other Expenses
Postage $300.00
Telephone $1,000.00
Travel $2,500.00
Computers and office equipment $3,000.00
Total Other Expenses $6,800.00
Total P/L $15,835.00
182
The budget shows that the Trade Development Center is projected to earn a profit
of $15,835 for the year. This amount would be reflected in the overall organizational
budget as either “program” or “departmental” income and expenses.
Financial Reports:
As stated earlier, budgeting is the foundation on which a sound financial
management is built. However, a business association’s ability to report on its finances is
equally important. Typically, financial reports are provided to the board of directors
monthly and to the membership on an annual basis. Financial reports to the board
generally include the following:
Figure 8.6 Content of Monthly Financial Report
Financial Statement: A financial statement compares actual expenses for a month
against planned expenditures. Typically a financial statement will include four columns:
current month, year to date, budget and difference. The current month lists in functional
income and expense areas the actual revenues and expenses for the reporting period. The
year-to-date column outlines revenue and expenses for the year up to and including the
current month. This being the case, it grows every month by the amount of current
month revenues and expenses. The budget column lists the budgeted amounts for each
income and expense category for the year. The difference column outlines how much
revenues and expenses are over or below budget for the year. The financial statement is
typically in the same format as the budget, including the same functional areas and
revenue/expense projections. It provides board members with a quick and easy way to
determine how well the organization is doing relative to its budget.
General Ledger: A general ledger lists monthly expenditures by date, budget code,
amount and vendor. This provides a way for an organization’s finance staff to determine
how much money is being spent, what it is being spent on and who (which companies
and/or individuals) are receiving it. While this is often more information than board
members want to review each month, it serves as a useful tool to answer questions and/or
validate expenses. Typically, a general ledger will begin with cash on hand at the end of
the prior month, include itemized expenses as noted above, and end with a total amount
of cash on hand at the end of the month.
Cash Flow Analysis: A cash flow analysis tracks how much money an organization has
on hand at a given time, usually at month end. This statement is important especially for
organizations that use accrual accounting, in that it may not be possible for board
members to ascertain the amount of cash on hand from looking at the financial statement.
It also provides a way to track the amount of cash on hand over a period of months.
Asset and Liabilities Statement: This statement lists an organization’s assets and
liabilities (such as property, accounts receivable, depreciation, and accounts payable). It
is important for the board to understand what fixed and non-fixed assets the organization
owns, as well as its short-term and long-term liabilities.
183
Sustainability Planning
Business associations in transitional countries may receive short or medium-term
financial assistance from donors. Not only does this assistance come with rules and
regulations that must be included in the organization’s policy and procedures manual, but
it also can create a mentality that provides a false sense of economic security. On many
occasions, an organization’s strength is directly proportional to the amount of donor
funding it receives. When the funding runs out, so does the organization’s capacity. For
this reason, a growing number of associations have developed sustainability strategies to
ensure long-term financial health.
The ten year sustainability strategy of the fictional Janpeth Manufacturer’s
Association (JMA) is included in the appendix. It includes projected income and
expenses for the next ten years, as well as projecting the organization’s financial health
during that period. For purposes of this example, the first three years are not projections
but actual numbers, leaving projections for years four through ten.
Within its sustainability plan, the JMA assumes that computer equipment will
need to be upgraded every three years while other expense categories will remain
constant. It reviews the plan each year, as actual numbers replace projections, and makes
changes accordingly. By following this strategy, the JMA can document for donors that
it is working toward sustainability, while at the same time focusing on specific revenue
and expense areas.
A matrix such as the one created by the JMA is usually accompanied by a
narrative that outlines the organization’s goals relative to sustainability. The JMA’s
narrative is also attached in the appendix.
Summary
Financial processes, such as budgeting, reporting and sustainability are integral to
both an organization’s credibility and sustainability. Transparency in financial processes,
as well as diligence in tracking financial transactions is critical to an organization’s
overall health.
184
CHAPTER NINE
DEVELOPING SUCCESSFUL PROPOSALS
SECTION ONE: OVERVIEW OF PROPOSAL DEVELOPMENT
Successful grant writing is a fairly straightforward process once you understand a
few basic principles.
Organizational Readiness
It is necessary for the organization or association to map out its priorities and
goals in a planning process prior to starting the grant writing process. It is not the job of a
grant writer to set goals or determine programs. That direction should come from the
board of director’s or association membership.
The Idea
Clarity and relevance are the two goals of any good proposal. Are you clearly
communicating about your program or service? Would the reader be able to explain your
ideas to someone else? Is your idea an appropriate response to the condition or problem
your organization wants to address?
Researching Potential Funders
After determining organizational goals and programs or services to meet those
goals, your task is to identify the best sources that are most likely to support your
proposals. The research process will allow you to prepare different proposal packages
based on the specific guidelines of particular funders.
Contacting and Cultivating Funders
This step is very important. It saves you from unnecessary or inappropriately
targeted proposals by making the specific objectives and guidelines of the funder clear.
Contact can come in the form of phone conversations, face-to-face meetings, board
contacts or written updates and progress reports.
Successful Proposal Writing
Proposal writing is a popular and effective way for NGOs and associations to
fund programs and projects. It can also be intimidating to those new to the endeavor.
There are many books and courses available on the topic, which provide specific “how
to” information, strategies, tips, dos and don’ts.
185
Experience indicates that many potential grant writers are overwhelmed by the
information available in print and at workshops, which causes them to lose their initial
optimism. Some never manage to sit down at the computer and start to write. Others may
write one proposal but if it is unsuccessful they give up and never write another.
However, writing a proposal is not “rocket science”. It takes willingness and experience
to be successful.
With this in mind, it is important to understand the basic philosophy of grant
funding:
Funding from grants should never be the only revenue source for an
association. The more sources of funding the organization has (dues, fees,
corporate sponsors, fundraising events etc.) the more secure its future and
the healthier it looks on paper to potential funders.
The competition for grant dollars can be intense. The number of
organizations submitting proposals grows every year.
Above all the proposal must reflect a well-planned project that matches the goals
and objectives of the funder, while meeting a genuine community need. It is important
that the results to be achieved are articulated clearly and quantifiably and that the
resources provided will be used wisely and efficiently. Much of the advice to grant
writers seems like common sense, yet these principles are more difficult to implement
than they are to acknowledge.
When it comes to the actual writing, follow the format and directions exactly as
outlined by the funder. This simple instruction is critically important. One writer with
good writing skills, an understanding of the organization and its programs and services,
should write the proposal. Writing by committee is not effective. However a review team
of several people is an excellent strategy for both refining your message and catching
typing or mathematical errors.
The following questions are helpful to use with a review team as they critique
your draft proposal:
Compatibility
Is the proposal a strong match with the mission, goals or guidelines outlined by
the funder?
Credibility
Does the proposal establish the organization as a good investment? Does the
organization have the qualifications, expertise, and ability to accomplish the results
outlined in the proposal?
186
Need
Is the need for this program or project clear and supported by relevant
information?
Objective
Does the proposal describe a measurable outcome? Does it appear feasible
considering agency resources and achievable in the time frame of the grant?
Method
Does the proposal describe how the objective will be achieved with a plan or
timeline? Does it appear realistic and cost-effective?
Evaluation
Is there a logical process for evaluating accomplishments?
Project Sustainability
Will the program or project require funding beyond the grant period? How will
the organization fund the operation in the future?
Budget
Is the budget accurate, realistic and sufficient to accomplish the project?
Associations and NGOs should also build relationships with funding agencies or
foundations. All fundraising is based on relationships and while grant proposal writing
seems to be the exception, grant proposals are typically only successful when a
relationship has been built before hand. Building and growing the relationship can be
done by asking good questions, sharing information, invitations to participate in events,
anything that will involve or engage the funder – see them as your partner in
accomplishing the project, program or service. Relationships with funders should be
transparent and professional. A potential grant recipient should never expect a funding
agency to accept a grant proposal just because of a relationship, and consequently a
potential grantee should never be given special privileges because of this relationship.
Elements of Common Grant Proposals
The following are the elements requested by most funders and descriptions of
what to keep in mind as you put together your proposal.
It is critical to always give the funder exactly what they ask for in their guidelines,
in the order that they ask for it. When a proposal is being reviewed and compared with
numerous other proposals the person reading the proposal must not think something
hasn’t been included simply because it isn’t in the right order.
187
Cover letter
Explains why the organization selected the funder. Highlights how the
proposal matches the funder’s priorities.
Briefly explains the need or problem that exists and the solution.
Gives the specific financial request being made.
Serves as the executive summary.
No more than two pages, preferably shorter.
Tip from Susan Saksa: “When I write grant proposals for my own organization, I
write the cover letter last. It is easier for me to write a summary after I have
completed the longer version. My cover letter is on my organizational stationary
and I have the board chair or president sign the letter. This shows the funder that
my board is knowledgeable and involved about the project and the request”.
Proposal Narrative
The body of the proposal typically includes the following sections:
Organizational Background:
Mission statement.
Brief history of the organization and its goals.
Overview of current programs, activities, accomplishments.
Purpose of the Grant or Project Description:
Statement describing the project for which funding is requested and
the dollar amount requested.
The need or problem being addressed, how it will be addressed, who
benefits and how many, the project goals, outcomes, and why the
writer’s organization is the best one to initiate the project
How the program will be implemented – activities or steps and the
timetable for implementation.
Anticipated results or outcomes.
188
How the results will be measured and evaluated (qualitative and
quantitative).
Tip from Susan Saksa: “Funders expect anticipated outcomes and methods of
evaluation to be included. These should be well written and brief, but also
thorough”.
Other sources of financial support (other funders, earned revenue).
How the project will be funded after the grant period, especially
important when seeking start-up or seed money.
How the funder will be recognized – especially important for
sponsorships/events.
Typical Attachments:
Board of Director’s list with affiliations
Names and qualifications of key staff
Financial statements, most recent (audited if available)
Agency or association budget
Project budget – specific to the request being made
Annual report (if available)
List of major contributors
Limited amount of materials unique to the organization (newspaper
article, newsletter, letter of support, program material)
Tip from Susan Saksa: “I suggest that you create a coversheet, which lists, in a
table of contents format, the attachments. I always provide only what has been
requested, in the order it was requested, unless I have discussed additional items
with someone at the funding organization”.
Project Budget Development
Financial description of the money needed and money expected for the specific proposal
request.
189
Tip from Susan Saksa: “Funders usually require both a full
organization/association budget and a project budget. I find that many groups
struggle with the budgets, following are some ideas for your project budget
development”.
List all paid personnel that will be involved in this project - calculate salary or
hourly wage and benefits for each person.
o If a paid staff person will only spend part of his/her time on this
project determine the percentage of participation in the project.
o Calculate the portion of salary attributed to the project.
o Total all personnel items.
Separately list and calculate cost of consultants or other contracted personnel.
List all non-personnel costs associated specifically with this project. Estimate
their costs. For example: materials, postage, copying.
Total the personnel and non-personnel costs to obtain cost of the project.
Tip from Susan Saksa: “Many funders will allow you to include a small percentage
of overhead costs in your project budget (range of ten to twenty percent above the
direct project costs). This is a good question to ask, if you are unsure of what they
will fund. If they will fund a portion of your overhead this is important to include.
Such indirect costs are the most difficult to fund”.
If overhead costs are included, insert specific line items such as: rent,
maintenance, computer, telephone, administrative support or percentage of
time spent by an executive director.
Recalculate the total for the project including the overhead expenses.
Budget Tips
A Budget is one of the most important documents included in a grant
proposal. It should clearly reflect the funding needs of the organization.
Include all costs and all revenue sources – don’t forget to consider things like
the cost of evaluating the project.
A spreadsheet with formulas should be used in order to avoid simple
mathematical errors.
Explain any “red flags”. Anything that looks like it costs too much or too
little, is a red flag. Anything out of the ordinary within the organization’s
budget (for example if it shows a deficit) is also a red flag. Remember, those
190
reviewing your proposals do not know the circumstances or reasons behind
the information listed. This being the case a budget note should be made
explaining anything that is out of the ordinary.
Retain all budget worksheets. When the time comes to report on how the
money is spent, the worksheets will be invaluable in determining the mindset
behind the budget calculations.
Packaging the Proposal
Send regular mail rather than expensive alternatives such as special delivery
or next day postal service. This is seen as extravagant expenses by many
funders.
Do not use binders or hard or fancy covers. Funders say “flashy presentations
do not impress us”.
Most funders will copy proposals or pieces of them for review. Make it easy
to un-assemble and reassemble. Number your pages.
Stewardship and Recognition
Acknowledge all money received and thank the funder in a personal manner
within 24-48 hours.
If any special recognition for the funder is promised in the proposal, make
sure it is delivered promptly and professionally.
SECTION TWO: GRANT PROPOSAL DO’S AND DON’TS
DO make the proposal clear, concise, factual, and persuasive.
DO be up front about the need for funding – don’t be apologetic.
DO make a case that the organization is worthy enough to receive the
investment offered by the funder.
DO focus on program outcomes, goals, objectives and evaluation.
DON’T be afraid to contact the funders. The staffs at foundations,
governmental funders and corporate giving programs are friendly and want to
help, utilize their expertise.
DON’T submit a proposal if the project does not fit closely with the priorities
or guidelines outlined by the funding agency. Funders don’t like proposals, or
organizations, that waste their time.
191
DO submit the proposal on time and plan to submit follow-up reports on time.
DO make a case for sustainability beyond the initial term of the grant.
DON’T use industry specific jargon or acronyms, big words and terms that
will not be easily understood. Funders are not impressed by language skills as
much as they are by quality content.
DO include an easy to understand realistic, supportable budget.
DO consider coalitions and collaborative efforts, these appeal to many
funders.
DO show a commitment to evaluation and a realistic approach to measuring
results.
DON’T automatically assume a proposal will be funded. The funding
environment is competitive and not all organizations will be successful –
some good proposals will not receive funding just because of limited resource
decisions.
DO build relationships with staff people when ever possible, ask questions,
clarify guidelines, involve and engage them.
SECTION THREE: BEST PRACTICES IN GRANT PROPOSAL
DEVELOPMENT
The sample proposals included on the guidebook’s companion CD were assessed
according to the following criteria:
Compatibility
Credibility
Need
Objectives
Method
Evaluation
Sustainability
Budget
Project Management
C
OMPATIBILITY
Professional grant writers agree that a proposal must be compatible with the
criteria, mission and culture of the potential funder. The proposals assessed in this
guidebook have in common the fact that they meet or exceed the funder’s requirements in
each of these categories. They are written from the understanding that the criterion
192
established by most donors represents the minimum standard at which a proposal will be
considered.
Experienced grant writers know that proposals must be compatible with the
mission of the funding organization. In this case, a business association or consortium of
associations submitted the proposals. It is obvious that the writers of all six proposals
understood the funder’s mission and tailored the proposal to fit the mission. The
proposal’s authors obviously conducted research to ascertain the types of proposals that
the funding organizations usually approve, and how these proposals fit with the
proposing organization’s mission.
Equally important from a compatibility standpoint is a focus on the funding
organization’s criteria. Even if a proposal is compatible with the funding organization’s
mission, it must also meet the minimum criteria for submission that is established by the
organization. Each of the proposals not only meets the criteria, but exceeds it. The
writers of all the proposals provided ample information to meet the criteria, while not
overloading the organization with additional information that didn’t support the proposal.
A more difficult compatibility issue is that of meeting an organization’s culture.
Cultural issues are not requirements, but they play an important role in a funding
organization’s consideration of a proposal. The author’s of the proposals included in this
assessment understood not only the funding organization’s criteria, but also its culture.
They understood that the funding organization’s Board of Directors prefers projects that
focus on advocacy, communications, and anti-corruption. With this in mind, they
structured their projects to address the “culture” of the organization.
Compatibility Tip: There are three ways to ensure the compatibility of grant proposal
with the mission, criteria, and culture of the funding organization. They are 1)
Research; 2) Relationships; and 3) Revelation.
The proposal writer must conduct research on the funding organization to ensure an
understanding of its mission, criteria and culture. In addition, he/she must build
relationships within the organization to ensure open and transparent access. Finally,
he/she must reveal to the funding organization the reason why the proposal should be
funded. Many times, proposals stop before they get to the revelation phase.
CREDIBILITY
Credibility is critical to the adequate consideration of a grant proposal. It takes
time to establish credibility with a funding organization and no opportunity to do so
should go unexplored. Each of the proposals included in the assessment was submitted
by business associations or groups of associations that have established credibility with
the funding organization by creating a high standard of excellence.
Establishing credibility has several components. First and foremost, each of the
associations submitting the proposals established credibility through outcomes. Funding
organizations typically give more consideration to proposals submitted by associations
193
that are known for their successes. By focusing on their past successes, the associations
reduce any fears that the funding organization might have about whether or not they can
achieve the outcomes discussed in their proposals.
Secondly, each of the associations established credibility through financial
accountability. They established this in two primary ways. Each association was
financially stable and organizationally sound. On an annual basis, each organization
made money that was reinvested in programs and services. Also, each association made
a substantial financial commitment to the project outlined in the grant proposal. All the
associations committed to funding at least 25% of the project on their own. This
increased their credibility in that they, along with the funding organization, had a
significant financial stake in the project.
Finally, each of the associations established credibility through reputation. The
associations were known as significant representatives of the business community. Of
course, these reputations were earned through the achievement of outcomes. However,
as one can easily see by reviewing the proposals, the associations were also very skilled
in marketing their accomplishments to potential donors, thereby creating a reputation of
excellence.
Credibility Tip: Each time an association launches a significant program, produces a
professional publication, or achieves a significant outcome, it should publicize this
success to potential funding agencies. This can be done by sending copies of the
publications, press releases, newsletters, and other material to the organizations on an
on-going basis. In addition, the author of a grant proposal should fluidly but
succinctly outline the association’s accomplishments within the text of the proposal.
N
EED
Grant proposals must clearly outline the need for a particular project. The need
for a project may be to focus specifically on the organization in order to build overall
capacity. More desirable to funding organizations, though, are proposals that are needed
and desired by the community as a whole. In the case of the proposals assessed in this
study, all have a community development component, meaning the scope of the “need” is
larger than just the organization itself.
In addition, the associations clearly establish the difference between “want”,
which may or may not be a desirable scenario for a funding organization, and “need”,
which almost always is desirable. The writers of the six proposals establish the need for
each project in the summary and background statements. The writers focused on key
words they knew would be desirable to the funding organization’s Board of Directors
such as “private sector development”, “economic cooperation”, and “public policy
advocacy”.
Need Tip: The proposal writer can establish need in a variety of ways. One such way
is to provide letters of support from NGOs, business association collaborators,
members, and government officials. Another way to establish need is by providing data
194
to prove that if a project is initiated, the results will have a significant impact on the
target audience (whether it’s the region, community, or membership).
OBJECTIVES
Once the need for a project is established, the objectives, or scope, of the project
becomes critical. This is basically the “purpose” statement of the proposal. The writers
of each of the proposals assessed in this guidebook outlined the project objectives clearly
and succinctly. By putting them in “bullet” form, the writers ensured that the evaluation
committee would not miss important information.
Each proposal used words like “to demonstrate”, “to advance”, “to assist”, and “to
encourage” in order to create an active tense voice. The objectives were broad, but not
theoretical, comprehensive but not unrealistic.
Objectives Tip: A grant proposal writer should always use active voice and should list
objectives in a logical order. Once objectives are developed, the writer may want to
share the objectives with a neutral party to gain feedback and to determine whether
they are easily understood.
M
ETHOD
The “method” of a proposal refers to the writer’s ability to establish a clear
process by which the proposed outcomes can be achieved. This includes the creation of a
strategic plan for initiating the project, the development of a timeline, and the
implementation of a structured implementation process. In the proposals assessed for this
guidebook, the method cannot be defined in one particular session, but is a thread that
runs through the entire document.
The method for each proposal was established by the creation of clear objectives,
action steps, evaluation procedures, and outcomes that provided the funding
organization’s Board of Directors with a clear indication of the process that would be
used to achieve the desired results.
Method Tip: A proposal writer should consider method to be a series of building
blocks that are used to construct a project. This being the case, he/she should begin
with the outcomes to be achieved and construct a process that works backward to the
objectives. By using this approach, the method of the proposal will become apparent to
the evaluator.
EVALUATION
An essential element in the favorable consideration of a grant proposal is the
writer’s understanding of the evaluation process to be used in measuring results. In each
of the proposals assessed, the evaluation process was well defined and specific. The
evaluation mechanisms were quantifiable and measurable. More than half of the
proposals included evaluation by sources outside the organization (e.g. the government,
citizens, etc.). This highlighted the fact that the associations are transparent, and not
195
afraid to be evaluated by neutral parties. It showed a commitment to quantitative
evaluation versus simple measurement of results.
Evaluation implies more than just an assessment of whether or not the project
succeeded or failed. Rather it focuses on developing building blocks for future success.
Evaluation Tip: Funding organizations typically like to see specific and measurable
evaluation criteria. With this in mind, the proposal writer should focus on evaluation
as both validation of the project’s success, as well as initiation of follow on activities.
S
USTAINABILITY
Increasingly, sustainability is becoming an important criterion on which proposals
are assessed. Funding organizations appear to be less interested in one time projects,
regardless of how successful they may be, than in longer term sustainable efforts.
Each of the proposals assessed focused on long-term objectives and included a
plan for sustainability. In reviewing the project budgets, a majority of the proposals
reflected not only significant up-front investment by the business associations, but also a
plan to generate financial sustainability in the future.
Sustainability Tip: A grant proposal writer should include a one year project budget as
required by the funding organization, but as an attachment offer a budget for at least
two additional years that highlights the association’s plan to create a financially
sustainable effort. Because few proposals contain this type of information, this is likely
to pique the interest of the evaluator. Also, sustainability should be specifically
addressed within the body of the proposal.
BUDGET
Evaluation committees always contain individuals that have the primary job of
analyzing the project budget. This being the case, any mistakes in the budget become
obvious and usually seriously impair the proposals chances of being funded. Each of the
proposals assessed followed the funding organization’s criteria to the letter in that there
were no mathematical errors; there was a clear explanation as to what expenses would be
paid by the funding organization and what would be paid by the business association
submitting the proposal; the budget was in spreadsheet form; and the budget clearly
focused on programming versus personnel expenses.
The last point cannot be overemphasized in that donors typically downgrade
proposals where a high percentage of the budget is devoted to salaries, benefits and
equipment. While these areas are legitimate from an expense category, the proposal
writer should clearly explain how the expenditure in each area contributes to the overall
success of the project.
Budget Tip: The proposal writer should submit a project budget in the format required
by the funding organization. However, he/she should also include budget notes, which
provide a clear breakdown of costs and an assessment of why each expense area is
196
important to the success of the project. Budget notes also allow the proposal writer to
explain any anomalies that might cause questions or concerns among the members of
the grant evaluation committee.
P
ROJECT MANAGEMENT
The management team for a project is crucial to its success. Funding
organizations typically look carefully at the background and experience of management
team members. Each of the proposed project were to be managed by individuals with
specific experience in the field of study covered by the project. Also, most of the
members of the management team had specific skills in certain areas of the project, such
as strategic planning, training, and advocacy.
Consultants were used sparingly, as many funding organizations have strong
beliefs about the use of indigenous expertise. A brief biographical sketch of each member
of the management team was included in the narrative and the curriculum vitas for each
team member were attached. The writers of the proposals didn’t assume that members of
the evaluation committee would read the curriculum vitae’s, which is why they included
the brief biographical narratives.
Project Management Tip: Include a picture and short biographical sketch of each
management team member in the proposal narrative. Include cv’s only as
attachments. In addition, focus on the entire team versus just on the project manager.
The proposal writer should construct the project team based on the outcomes to be
achieved. Funding organizations appreciate having at least one financial expert on the
implementation team.
197
EPILOGUE
THE TOP TEN WAYS TO BUILD ORGANIZATIONAL CAPACITY
Developing a successful business association is not an accident, nor is it
guaranteed. Success depends largely on the ability of an organization’s leaders to
embrace a new way of doing business. The following are the top ten factors that some of
the highest-functioning associations in the world have in common, and they serve as a
guide for those associations that are building capacity at the present time. To succeed,
these organizations decided to:
1. Change the Way They Think. A noted business association expert once said,
“An organization will never change the way it acts (operates) until its leaders
change the way they think”. This does not mean that some organizational
philosophies are “right” while others are “wrong”. It also does not mean that
every association has to conform to standards set by those in other countries,
regardless of culture and history. It means that business association leaders,
both paid staff and volunteers, must be willing to embrace new ideas, think
about different ways of accomplishing goals, and define a vision for the
future. It is human nature for individuals to operate in a way that is consistent
with what they know. Transformation of thought comes by taking risks, and it
is only risk that will elevate an organization to a higher level of development.
In summary, when business leaders change the way they think, their actions
will also change. This will enable the organization to progress up the
sustainability pyramid as it embraces opportunities for growth.
2. Embrace a Development Methodology: No two business associations are
exactly alike, yet there are commonalities in the methodology used to develop
organizational capacity. This methodology, described in Chapter 1, focus on a
building-block method used by some of the most successful associations in
the world. Within this methodology, organizations should develop
customized strategic plans that focus on foundational, informational,
developmental and financial resources. The methodology, outlined by the
sustainability (organizational) and empowerment (membership) pyramids is
constant, but the strategies developed to precipitate movement up these
pyramids is different for every organization. Once leaders embrace an overall
methodology for development, they have a “roadmap” to build organizational
capacity.
3. Embrace International Best Practices: Business associations cannot thrive in
isolation. They should benchmark their governance, programs/services,
membership processes, public policy advocacy initiatives and other
developmental areas against international best practices used by the world’s
most successful organizations. While some best practices may not apply to
organizations in transitional and/post conflict countries, a significant number
198
may be appropriate, thereby allowing them to take advantage of new ideas
that have proven effective for other business associations.
4. Benchmark against the Best Organizations: Organizations that want to be the
best should benchmark against the best. There are business associations
around the world that set a standard for excellence in governance, membership
development, public policy advocacy, financial responsibility,
programs/services, and technology. Organizations that want to build capacity
in these areas can learn from them. New ideas are an organization’s lifeblood.
Without them, stagnation can occur, which eventually leads to irrelevance.
5. Embrace a Culture of Membership Development: Whether in a context of
mandatory or voluntary membership, business associations should recognize
that members are the reason they exist. Of course, this is obvious in voluntary
membership associations where focus on membership is critical in an
organization’s survival. However, mandatory membership organizations have
an equal obligation to focus on membership development, as this will not only
build organizational capacity in the short-term but also position it for future
success. A well-known business association in the United States placed a sign
in its office that proclaims, “Business is our Business”, meaning that the more
its members succeed, the more the organization succeeds.
6. Use Failure as a Learning Experience: Organizations are often afraid to fail,
so they avoid risk. In doing so, they usually fail. There is no doubt that with
risk sometimes comes failure, but it is also true that success is born out of
adversity. Successful business associations are not afraid of failure, as they
know that strength comes through meeting challenges head on. There are
hundreds of examples of organizations that launched a program that failed, led
a public policy campaign that was unsuccessful or tried a strategy that did not
work and not only survived, but became stronger and more knowledgeable in
the process.
7. Embrace Teamwork: Around the world, top-down management is being
replaced by teamwork. Organizations that build strong, motivated and
experienced teams are enjoying success in even the most difficult
developmental contexts. This concept contradicts the management style in
many transitional and post-conflict countries, where corporations and
organizations tend to value a “top down” approach. The “Achilles heel” of
this approach is that it assumes that one person is skilled enough to know
everything that must happen to ensure success. This could not be further from
the truth. Successful leaders build strong teams and empower them to achieve
organizational goals.
8. Focus on Sustainability: In many transitional and post-conflict countries,
international donor organizations provide direct or indirect support for
business association development. This often created a “donor mentality”
within these organizations that prevents them from making real progress
toward sustainability. Donor organizations, regardless of the amount of
money they dedicate to the effort, cannot build sustainable organizations.
199
This can only be done internally, through strategic planning and a focus on
international best practices. Business associations in developing countries
must make sustainability their number one priority in order to create a lasting
legacy of support for the private sector.
9. Become an Advocate for the Private Sector: Business associations in some
developmental contexts (especially those that are established by public law
and granted mandatory membership) are perceived more as representatives of
the government than of the private sector. To be true private sector advocates,
business associations must support what is right over what is politically
expedient. This means that associations often have to engage government and
the international community in frank dialogue that protects the interests of its
members above all else, and they must accept the consequences of this action
as a “cost of doing business”. Power is the “holy grail” for business
associations. Those that have it enjoy success. Those that do not are often
relegated to the status of mere existence. Power comes through a process of
transparent advocacy that is built on the foundation of private sector support.
10. Make learning a priority: As stated in an earlier chapter, the illiterate of the
21
st
Century will not be those that cannot read and write, but those that will
not learn and re-learn. Association development is a learning process. Staff
and volunteer leaders must learn and re-learn every day in order to remain
proactive. Willingness to learn implies an understanding that organizational
leaders do not know everything necessary to achieve success. Those that
think they do are often sorely mistaken…and their associations suffer the
consequences.
200
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
Mark T. McCord is an expert in international business association, enterprise,
governance and trade development. After a highly successful career as an organizational
executive, Mr. McCord embarked on a career in international development. As a Certified
Chamber Executive and former executive for the Greater Colorado Springs Chamber of
Commerce as well as for three metro chambers in Oklahoma, Mr. McCord has extensive
experience in communications, public relations, organizational diagnostics, personnel
management, membership development, economic development, fundraising and public
policy advocacy. During his Chamber of Commerce career, he was voted Oklahoma
Chamber of Commerce Executive of the Year on two separate occasions and was one of
the youngest executives to receive the American Chamber of Commerce Executive’s
Certified Chamber Executive (CCE) designation.
He has conducted seminars on strategic planning, trade development, competitiveness,
institutional development, governance and public policy advocacy for business
association executives in over 53 countries, including extensive experience in Eastern
Europe/Russia, Southern and Eastern Africa as well as Central, South and Southeast
Asia. He is currently Chief of Party for the Promoting Private Sector Development
(PPSD) project in Cyprus, which is funded by USAID and implemented by BearingPoint
and has also served as Chief of Party for two USAID-funded projects in Afghanistan (3 ½
years) and a USAID-funded project in Romania (3 years). He has extensive experience
in post-conflict development as well as negotiation.
201
BearingPoint's mission is
to
work
with
clients
to
create Innovative
and practical
management
and
technology
solutions
that
help
them
achieve sustainable results. BearingPoint
implements
the
Economic
Development
and
Growth
for
Enterprises
(EDGE)
project
in
Cyprus,
one
of
many
places
where
it
is
working
to
build
capacity,
instill
vision,
and enhance sustainable approaches
to
economic
development.
More
specifically.
EDGE
is dedicated
to
improving
the
competitiveness
of
the
Turkish
Cypriot
community,
including
through
building
the
capacity
of
its business association partners
in
sectors
such
as
asri-business, special
interest
tourism,
trade,
information
technoloBY and bankins.
like
all U.S.
Government
programs in
Cyprus,
EDGE
is
aimed
at
facilitating
reunification
of
the
island
through
encouraging responsible and
market
-driven
economic
growth
.